A-Z of Business Strategy

Contents

5

Contents How to Get the Most Out of this Book Strategy: An Introduction The 10 Schools of Strategy The Economic Goals of an Organization Strategic Planning Operationalising the Strategy Change Management Strategic Control Evaluating and Rewarding Performance The Road Ahead

9 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 20 21

Ackoff, Russell L. Activity Based Costing (ABC) Adaptive Planning Adjacencies Adjusted Present Value (APV) Agency Theory Alignment Ansoff, Igor H. Anti-Takeover Strategy Argyris, Chris

25 25 26 26 27 27 28 30 32 33

Backward Integration Balanced Scorecard Bargaining Power of Buyers Bargaining Power of Suppliers Barnard, Chester Barriers to Entry Barriers to Imitation Bartlett, Christopher A. BCG Growth-Share Matrix Beachhead Market Benchmarking Best Practices BHAG Bias for Action

34 34 35 35 36 37 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 41

Big Hairy Audacious Goals (BHAGs) Blue Ocean Strategy Bottom of the Pyramid Brainstorming Brand Management Breakeven Analysis Bureaucracy Business Ethics Business Forecasting Business Model Business Process Reengineering (BPR) Business Risk Buy Back

41

Cadbury Committee Report Capacity Expansion Capital Structure Cartel Cash Cow Chandler, Alfred DuPont Change Management Christensen, Clayton M. Clusters Coase, Ronald Code of Ethics Commoditization Company Profile Comparative Advantage Competitive Advantage Competitor Analysis Competitive Strategy Concentration Ratio Concentric Diversification Conglomerate Diversification Contestability Contingency Planning Contract Manufacturing Co-opetition

49 49 51 51 52 52 53 54 55 56 56 56 57 57 58 59 62 63 64 64 64 64 64 65

42 44 44 45 45 45 45 46 47 47 47 48

6

A to Z of Business Strategy

Core Competence Core Ideology Core Values Corporate Governance Corporate Image Corporate Philanthropy Corporate Purpose Corporate Renewal Corporate Restructuring Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) Corporate Venturing Cost Leadership Cost of Capital Counterparry Country of Origin Effect Country Risk Critical Success Factor (CSF) Cross Country Subsidization Cross Holding Customer Relationship Management (CRM) Customer Switching Costs Cusumano, Michael

65 67 68 68 69 69 70 71 71 71

Decision Making Deming, William Edwards Demographic Environment Devil’s Advocacy Diamond Differentiation Discovery Driven Planning Diseconomies of Scale Disruptive Technology Diversification Divestiture Divisional Structure Downsizing Drucker, Peter F. Due Diligence Dynamic Capability Building Dynamic Specialization

77 78 80 80 80 83 84 84 85 85 88 89 89 89 90 91 91

Earnings Before Interest and Taxes (EBIT) Economic Value Added (EVA) Economies of Scale Economies of Scope

93

72 72 74 74 74 74 74 75 75 75 76 76

93 94 94

Emotional Intelligence End-game Strategies Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) Enterprise Risk Management (ERM) Entrepreneurship Environmental Scanning Experience Curve

94 95 96 96 96 97 98

Fayol, Henri First Mover Advantage Five Forces Model Flat Organization Focus Follett, Mary Parker Force Field Analysis Forward Integration Franchise Free Rider Full Costing Functional Strategy Functional Structure

99 99 100 101 101 102 102 103 103 104 104 104 105

Game Theory Garbage In, Garbage Out Generic Strategy Ghoshal, Sumantra Global Corporations Global Industry Global Leverage Global Value Chain Configuration Globalization Goals Golden Handcuffs Golden Handshake Golden Hello Golden Key Golden Parachute Govindarajan, Vijay

106 106 106 107 108 108 108 109

Handy, Charles Hedgehog Principle Herfindahl Index Herzberg, Frederick Hierarchical Organization Hostile Bid

113 113 113 114 115 115

109 111 111 111 112 112 112 112

Contents Human Capital Hygiene Factors

115 115

Independent Director Industry Industry Shakeout Innovation Innovator’s Dilemma Institutional Investor Intrapreneurship

116 116 118 120 122 123 123

Japanese Style of Management Joint Venture Judo Strategy Just–in-Time

124

Kaizen Kanban Kaplan and Norton Keiretsu Kepner-Tregoe Matrix Khanna, Tarun Knowing-Doing Gap Knowledge Management (KM)

126 126 126 127 127 127 128 128

124 124 125

Lateral Thinking 130 Law of Conservation of Profits 130 Law of Unintended 130 Consequences Leadership 132 Lean Manufacturing 136 Lean Thinking 137 Licensing 137 Long Term Objectives 138 Loss Leader 138 MBO (Management By Objectives) Managerial Grid Model Market Defense Market for Corporate Control Marketing Mix Market Power Market Signals Maslow, Abraham Matrix Structure Mayo, Elton and Roethlisberger, Fritz

139 139 140 141 141 141 142 143 143 144

7

McGregor, Douglas McKinsey 7-S Framework McNamara, Robert S. Merger Mintzberg, Henry Mission Motivation Multi Domestic Industry Murphy’s Law

145 146 147 147 148 149 150 151 152

Nearshoring Net Present Value (NPV) Nine-Cell Planning Grid Not-Invented-Here

153 153 153 154

Offshoring Ohmae, Kenichi Oligopoly Operating Strategies Opportunity Cost Optimizing Planning Organic Growth Organizational Behavior Organizational Chart Organizational Culture Organizational Design Organizational Development (OD) Organizational Inertia Organizational Learning Organizational Mapping Organizational Structure Outsourcing Overheads

155 155 156 157 157 157 157 157 158 158 160 161

Palepu, Krishna G. Pareto’s Principle Parkinson’s Law Personal Effectiveness PEST (Political, Economic, Social and Technological Factors) Analysis Peter Principle Platform Leadership Poison Pill Policies Political Risk Porter, Michael E.

164 164 165 165 166

161 162 162 163 163 163

167 167 169 169 169 169

8

A to Z of Business Strategy

Positioning Price / Earnings Ratio (P / E) Process Innovation Process Life Cycle Process Networks Product Innovation Product Life Cycle (PLC) Product Platform Prospect Theory Purpose-Process-People Doctrine Pygmalion Effect

171 172 172 174 175 175 178 179 180 180

q-theory Quinn, James Brian

182 182

Real Options Regulatory Capture Resource-based Theories Responsiveness Planning Reverse Engineering Risk Rivalry

183 183 183 184 185 185 186

Satisficing Scenario Planning S-Curve Senge, Peter Service Level Agreement (SLA) Shareholder Value Simple Structure Simon, Herbert A. Six Sigma Skimming Skunk Work Sloan, Alfred P. Slywotzky, Adrian J. Span of Control Spender, J. C. Stakeholders Strategic Advantage Strategic Alliance Strategic Architecture Strategic Business Unit (SBU) Strategic Choice Strategic Control Strategic Cost Management

188 188 189 189 190 190 190 191 191 192 192 192 193 193 194 194 194 195 196 196 196 197 197

181

Strategic Fit Strategic Groups Strategic Inflection Point Strategic Innovation Strategic Intent Strategic Management Strategic Market Strategic Options Strategic Planning Strategic Pricing Strategy Evaluation Strategy Implementation Stretch Stuck in the Middle Succession Planning Supply Chain Management (SCM) Switching Costs SWOT Analysis

197 198 198 199 201 202 203 203 205 207 209 210 211 212 212 213

Taylor, Frederick W. Technology Risk Threat of Substitutes Tipping Point Total Quality Management (TQM)

217 218 220 221 222

Utterback, James

223

Valuation Value Chain Value Migration Value System Values Vertical Integration Value Innovation Vision

224 224 227 227 227 228 231 232

Whistle Blower White Knight Williamson, Oliver E. Willpower Winner’s curse

233 233 233 234 234

Zero Base Budgeting

235

Bibliography

236

215 215

Strategy: An Introduction

9

How to Get the Most Out of this Book Alphabetization:

All entries are alphabetized by letter rather than by word so that multiple-word terms are treated as single words. In cases where abbreviations or acronyms are more commonly used than full terms, they are given as entries in the main text. For example, MBO is more commonly used than MANAGEMENT BY OBJECTIVES, and so the concept is explained under MBO. Where a term has several meanings, the various meanings are given. Cross References:

To offer a fuller understanding of a concept, sometimes it is both necessary and useful to refer to other related entries in the book as well. Such cross references are printed in SMALL CAPITALS. Italics

have been used to indicate titles of publications, books, journals,

etc. Parentheses:

Parentheses have sometimes been used in entry heading to indicate that an abbreviation is as commonly used as the term itself, for example, BIG HAIRY AUDACIOUS GOALS (BHAG). Examples, Illustrations and Tables:

The book contains numerous examples to help you better understand a concept, or to relate it to the real business world. Illustrations and tables are also given at many places along with their related entries.

10

A to Z of Business Strategy

Strategy: An Introduction

As the business environment becomes more complex, strategic management is gaining in importance. Few words are as commonly used in management as strategy. In simple terms, strategy means looking at the long term future to determine what the company wants to become, and putting in place a plan of getting there. Strategy is both art and science. Strategy is an art because it requires creativity, intuitive thinking, an ability to visualize the future, and to inspire and engage those who will implement the strategy. Strategy is science because it requires analytical skills, the ability to collect and analyze information and take well informed decisions. Without a strategy, an organization is directionless and vulnerable to changes in the business environment. Strategy acts as some kind of a guidepost for a company‘s ongoing evolution. Strategy provides a direction for the company and indicates what must be done to survive, grow and be profitable. According to Constantinos Markides*, strategy addresses three questions:   

Who are the customers? What products / services should be offered to them? How can the company do this efficiently?

These questions look deceptively simple. But the answers to these questions which form the core of corporate strategy. The term strategic is widely used, but often in the wrong context. So we must understand the term carefully. We can call an issue strategic if it requires top management involvement, involves commitment of major resources, has either a long term impact or organization-wide implica*

Markides, Constantinos C., ―A Dynamic View of Strategy‖, MIT Sloan Management Review. Spring 1999. pp. 55-63. Also see All The Right Moves by the same author, published by Harvard Business School Press, 2000.

Strategy: An Introduction

11

tions. Though the involvement of top executives is a must in strategic management, people at all levels in the different business units and functions must also be involved. Unless plans are understood and implemented effectively at these lower levels, the whole purpose of strategic management would be defeated.

The 10 Schools of Strategy The body of knowledge on corporate strategy has evolved over time. With different schools of thought looking at strategy in different ways, it‘s a good idea to review all of them briefly in order to get an integrated picture. According to Henry Mintzerg*, there are ten different schools of strategy: 













*

Aims at creating a fit between a company‘s internal strengths and weaknesses and external threats and opportunities. The Planning School: Views strategy as an intellectual, formal exercise, involving various techniques. The Positioning School: The company selects its strategic position after thoroughly analyzing the industry. Effectively, planners become analysts. Entrepreneurial School: The focus here shifts to the chief executive who largely relies on intuition to formulate strategy. The emphasis is less on precise designs, plans or positions and more on broad vision and perspectives. Cognitive School: The focus here is on cognition and cognitive biases. Learning School: Strategies are emergent, not deliberate. They evolve as the organization learns. Power School: Strategy making is rooted in power. At a micro level, people are involved in bargaining, persuasion and confrontation. At a macro level, the organization uses its power over others and among its partners in alliances, joint ventures and other network relationships to negotiate things in its favor. The Design School:

Mintzberg, Henry; Lampel, Joseph, and Ahlstrand, Bruce, Strategy Safari: A Guided Tour Through the Wilds of Strategic Management, The Free Press, 2005.

12







A to Z of Business Strategy

Cultural School:

Views strategy formulation as a process rooted in culture. Culture shot into prominence after the Japanese style of management became widely written about in the 1980s. The Environment School: The focus here is on coping with the environment. As Mintzberg mentions, this school sees the strategy formation as a reactive process. The strategy is a response to the challenges imposed by the external environment. Where other schools see the environment as a factor, the environmental school sees it as an actor. Configuration School: This school views the organization as a configuration and integrates the claims of other schools. A variation of this somewhat academic perspective is a more practitioner-oriented view which focuses on how an organization moves from one state to another, such as from start up to maturity.

The approaches mentioned above need not be viewed as exclusive, watertight compartments. They can be combined in appropriate ways.

The Economic Goals of an Organization Understanding the firm‘s long term economic goals is the starting point in strategy formulation. As Pearce and Robinson* rightly put it, three economic goals must drive the strategy of any organization — survival, profitability and growth. A firm has to first survive, if it is to serve the interests of its stakeholders. Survival is often taken for granted. But many companies do go bankrupt. Indeed, the average life of a Fortune 500 company is only 40 to 50 years, according to the research of a former Shell executive Aries de Geus†. Reckless or expedient short term oriented decision making, complacency and quick fixes to structural problems are some of the ways in which the survival of an organization is threatened. Profitability is the main goal of any business. Not only should a firm make profits but it must also ensure that these profits are sustainable in the long run. Moves aimed merely at improving short term profitability *

Pearce, John A. and Robinson, Richard B., Strategic Management — Strategy Formulation & Implementation, Richard D. Irwin, 1995. †

De Geus, Aries P., ―Planning as Learning‖, Harvard Business Review, MarchApril 1988, pp. 70-74.

Strategy: An Introduction

13

must be avoided. Equally important, profits should come from the company‘s core business, not through non operating income (such as sale of assets) or accounting manipulation. The third goal is growth or, more precisely, profitable growth. A profitable organization which is not growing is a cause for alarm. Lack of growth means the company is not able to identify opportunities to expand its market, compete with other players, develop new products, attract new customers, etc. Lack of growth also implies that competitors are probably moving ahead, thereby marginalizing the company‘s competitive position. For example, slow growth in recent times of famous companies such as Microsoft and Hindustan Lever has been a major source of worry for their investors.

Strategic Planning In general, strategic plans contain the following components: The organization‘s deeply desired future. The organization‘s purpose in terms of products, technology and markets. Core Competencies: The tangible and intangible assets the company will need to build and leverage to gain competitive advantage. Values: The driving beliefs that define a company‘s culture, help managers to set priorities and guide day-to-day operations. Strategic Objectives: The targets that allow a company to measure how it is performing in key result areas such as market share, customer loyalty, quality, service, innovation and human capital.



Vision:



Mission:







The business environment needs to be analyzed carefully before a strategic plan is prepared. According to Pearce and Robinson*, the business environment can be divided into the remote environment and operating environment. The remote environment includes political, economic, social, technological and industry factors. The operating environment has a direct impact on the ability of the firm to sell its products and services profitably. Among the factors to be considered here are competi-

*

Pearce, John A. and Robinson, Richard B., Strategic Management — Strategy Formulation & Implementation, Richard D, Irwin, 1995.

14

A to Z of Business Strategy

tive position, customer profile, reputation among its suppliers / creditors and the labor market. The operating environment is much more under the control of a firm, compared to the remote environment. So the firm should be more proactive in dealing with the operating environment. Environment data must be collected for a meaningful range of factors. Such data should be analyzed to determine the implications for the firm in terms of opportunities and threats. Strategic plans should be sufficiently flexible to deal with unexpected variations from environmental forecasts. During the planning stage, the company will also have to identify key issues; for example, weaknesses to be addressed or opportunities to be exploited with respect to the products and services to be offered to customers, the internal process changes needed to support the company‘s strategy, and the skills and resources needed to create value more efficiently and effectively. Some of the important issues faced by any organization are costs, service, new markets and products, geographic expansion, acquisitions, divestitures, organizational structure, core competencies and processes, new technologies, training and development, and information systems. Any strategic plan also involves commitment of resources. Adequacy of existing resources, training needs, requirement of new information systems, etc. must be carefully examined. Strategic management decisions take place at three levels: Corporate, Business Unit and Function. Corporate level decisions tend to be macro level and conceptual in nature. The choice of business, the kind of growth strategy to pursue and the kind of capital structure the company should have are good examples. Business level decisions cover more specific areas such as plant location, market segmentation, geographic coverage and distribution channels. Functional level decisions tend to cover the next level of detail such as choice of plant / equipment, inventory level, etc.

Operationalising the Strategy The difference between the best and mediocre companies often lies not in strategic planning but in the way strategy is implemented. The key issues must be translated into action plans, which must include the key metrics, timelines, important steps involved, resources needed, cross

Strategy: An Introduction

15

functional collaboration required, etc. Effective implementation demands identification of annual objectives, functional strategies and appropriate policies that are aligned with the long term plans / objectives. Annual objectives effectively break down long range goals into what needs to be achieved during the year. So they must be focused, specific and measurable. Examples of annual objectives include:   

To reduce employee attrition by 10% by the end of the year. To reduce time from order receipt to order execution by 20%. To increase the member of consultants in the company, who are Six Sigma Certified Black Belts by 30%.

Functional strategies represent the action plans for sub-units of the company. Functional strategies outline how key functional areas like marketing, finance, operations, R&D and human resources must be managed. Functional strategies must be framed with respect to each key activity. Take the case of pricing, for example. The following issues must be addressed: 1. What segment is being targeted — mass market or premium end of the market? 2. How much of price discrimination should be practiced across customer segments? 3. Is the cost structure aligned with the price? 4. What kind of discount can be offered, given the cost structure? 5. Should the price be above or below that of competition? Policies act as specific guides for operating managers and their subordinates. By linking policies to long term objectives, strategy implementation is greatly facilitated. Policies are clear statements about how things are to be done. They ensure disciplined decision making without the need for frequent intervention by top management. By standardizing answers to many questions, policies not only speed up the decision making process but also help establish consistent patterns of action and reduce the uncertainty involved while handling routine problems. Strategy implementation will not be effective without defining accountability. Managers need to determine who will be responsible for the overall effort and, in turn, who will ―own‖, or be responsible for, each of the different steps.

16

A to Z of Business Strategy

Accountability, autonomy and responsibility go together. Managers need to clarify how much autonomy individuals and teams will have in discharging their responsibilities. Some individuals may like to consult other team members before making a choice. Others may be capable and confident of making decisions independently. A few others may have relatively little experience in decision making. Managers may want to empower them to make some lower risk decisions themselves to gain more exposure. Communication is an integral part of operationalising the strategy. Even the best thought-out plans cannot be executed unless team members clearly understand the plan, are enthusiastically convinced about it and discharge their responsibilities skillfully. Meetings, informal conversations, e-mails, and other communication channels can be used to communicate the importance of the company‘s strategy and the role of different groups in implementing it. Communication must focus on the following:  

  

Rationale for the company‘s strategy. How the initiatives that are being carried out support the corporate strategy. The implications if the plans are implemented successfully. The implications if the company fails to implement its plans. The attitudes and behavior expected from each person in the team.

Regular communication can go a long way in making people believe that strategy is truly a collective responsibility.

Change Management Managing change is an integral part of strategic management. Analysis of industry structure, competitive positioning, resources currently available to the firm or a sharp decline in the company‘s financial performance may indicate the need for launching a major change initiative. Effective change management calls for a clear vision about where the organization is heading, involvement of people, responsibility for taking action and appropriate measurement and control systems. Radical change is usually best implemented by outsiders, who can bring in fresh perspectives. A new CEO promoted from within but who

Strategy: An Introduction

17

is not closely associated with the past strategy can also spearhead such a change initiative. Leadership of radical change initiatives usually involves creating an inspiring vision of the future, supporting it with tangible and symbolic actions, and generating support and commitment across various levels of the organization. Change is difficult for most people due to various reasons. Change tends to be seen as an admission that something wrong has happened. Change also upsets status and power relationships. Resistance might take the form of outright defiance, apparent agreement to do something but failure to follow through, an emotional attachment to the way things have been done in the past and a diminishing commitment to the job. People who resist change can slow down things. They must be dealt with on a one-to-one basis. After understanding the reasons for their resistance, various approaches can be tried out: 







Give them plenty of information about market developments and why a new corporate strategy and initiatives are needed. Invite them to participate as much as possible in planning and implementation, so that they have a personal investment in the strategy and initiatives. Identify the reasons behind the resistance. Mentoring / Counseling may overcome such resistance. Training can go a long way in facilitating change. Training can impart new skills and competencies and facilitate behavioral intervention.

If all these approaches fail, managers may have little choice but to move such people to areas where they are less likely to do harm. In extreme cases, people resistant to change should be dismissed in the larger interests of the organization.

Strategic Control Strategy implementation may take years. But companies cannot wait till a strategy is fully implemented to compare actuals with targets. Strategy must be tracked even as it is being implemented. Suitable mid-course correction must be taken in response to various developments, internal

18

A to Z of Business Strategy

*

and external. According to Pearce & Robinson , strategic control has four aspects:    

Premise control; Implementation control; Strategic surveillance; and Special alert control.

Premise control aims at systematically checking whether the assumptions made during the strategic planning exercise continue to hold good. It is not necessary to track all the assumptions made during planning. It makes sense to focus on those assumptions which are likely to change and which would have a major impact on the organization if they did. When these assumptions change, plans also must undergo a corresponding change. Implementation control examines whether the overall strategy should be changed in light of unfolding events and the results of the various actions already taken to implement the strategy. One useful technique is a milestone review. It involves a full-scale reassessment of the strategy and the advisability of continuing or changing the direction of the company. Such a review may take place after a passage of time, occurrence of critical events, or at points before major resource allocations. Strategic surveillance involves monitoring a broad range of events, internal and external, that may derail the strategy or significantly influence the implementation. Special alert control is a mechanism to thoroughly, and often rapidly, reconsider the firm‘s strategy in the wake of a sudden, unexpected event. Occurrence of such events must trigger off an immediate and intense reassessment of the company‘s strategy and circumstances, and a re-look at the plan. At lower levels, operating managers need control systems to guide the allocation and use of the company‘s resources. These systems set performance standards, measure actual performance, identify deviations from standards and initiate suitable corrective action or adjustment. Examples of operational control systems include budgets, schedules and key success factors. A budget is simply a resource allocation plan.

*

Pearce, John A. and Robinson, Richard B., Strategic Management — Strategy Formulation & Implementation, Richard D. Irwin, 1995.

Strategy: An Introduction

19

Scheduling helps in allocating the use of a time-constrained resource or arranging the sequence of interdependent activities. Key success factors must receive constant management attention.

Evaluating and Rewarding Performance Evaluating performance entails measuring how both a unit as a whole and its individual members have fared with respect to set objectives, using both qualitative and quantitative criteria. Qualitative criteria are those where numbers cannot be put. Some examples are: 

 

 

 

Evaluating whether the unit is exceeding expectations in the accomplishment of strategic initiatives. Evaluating the commitment to learning. Evaluating if individuals are developing innovative ways to accomplish the job. Evaluating how well a unit is working together as a team. Evaluating how well team members are collaborating with one another, resolving conflicts, and sharing what they‘ve learned. Evaluating how well the unit plans ahead. Evaluating how deeply team members understand the company‘s business, their own role in supporting the corporate strategy, and the details of the action plans they‘re responsible for.

Quantitative criteria focus on revenue, cost of goods, market share, and other quantifiable and measurable parameters. For example, a unit might decide to increase revenue by 20% annually over the next three years. At the end of Year-1, the unit may review the situation and confirm whether revenue did, in fact, increase by 20% that year. People can be rewarded for good work in different ways. Most people want some form of financial reward for their work. A few are motivated by non-monetary factors such as recognition, power and influence, autonomy, job variety and learning opportunities. So a judicious combination of financial and non-financial rewards must be used to encourage a culture of excellence. The reward system should be transparent. Employees must understand clearly what is expected of them, and the kind of rewards they will

20

A to Z of Business Strategy

receive if they perform well. Some of the issues that must be communicated to people in a transparent manner include: 



Is the reward system permanent, or will it be modified or discontinued after some time? Will everyone be eligible for rewards?

For example, if the reward system features bonuses for sales of a new product, will the R&D staff also be rewarded for their contribution?

The Road Ahead The classical views of strategy have focused on understanding industry structures and developing suitable capabilities to position a firm effectively in relation to competitors. But in today‘s complex and changing environment, when the very boundaries of many industries are being constantly reshaped, does it make sense to try and understand the evolving industry structure? Are ad hoc short-term movements the only way to cope with the uncertain environment? Is long term strategic planning no longer relevant? The short answer is that strategic planning is as relevant as ever. It provides direction. As John Hagel III and John Seely Brown* mention, speed without a sense of direction may result in random motion. Without a sense of direction, companies may become reactive and sometimes spread their resources thin by pursuing too many options simultaneously. Even in tech industries which are always in a state of flux, long range planning is important. They give the example of Microsoft which developed a strong sense of direction in two sentences: ―Computing power is moving inexorably to the desktop. To succeed, we must own the desktop.‖ The directional statement acted as a powerful guiding force even during times of major challenge over a period of almost two decades. To be effective, directional statements should be brief and high level. ―In complex, rapidly evolving markets, any attempt to specify outcomes in detail is bound to create the illusion of greater insight and control over events than warranted . . . it might be more accurate to describe these

*

Hagel III, John and Seely Brown, John, The Only Sustainable Edge, Harvard Business School Press, 2005.

Strategy: An Introduction

21

statements of long-term direction as focusing or orienting perspectives rather than definitive statements of advantaged positions. The statements help executives know when to look, rather than telling them what they will find.‖ To strike a balance between speed and direction, two different time horizons are needed — a long term horizon for setting the direction and a short term horizon to focus on operational initiatives. Hagel III and Seely Brown have come up with a frame work called FAST — Focus, Accelerate, Strengthen, Tie it all together. ―Focus‖ refers to long term positioning, and specialization and capability building in the chosen area of business. ―Accelerate‖ means moving fast in the short term. ―Strengthen‖ means removing road blocks that prevent faster movement in the short run. This includes building shared meaning and trust and making appropriate investments in information technology. ―Tie it all together‖ means integrating these three components across networks of organizations to amplify learning and accelerate capability building. As they mention: ―The sequential approach of traditional strategies simply cannot generate the rapid learning and capability building that one needs for moving quickly back and forth between a very short-term operational horizon and a much longer term strategic horizon.‖ In fast paced, intensely competitive markets, how can companies develop superior strategic decision making skills? According to Kathleen Eisenhardt, effective strategy formulation is about*:   



Building collective intuition; Encouraging healthy conflict; Maintaining a pace so that decisions are taken within a stipulated time; and Defusing political behavior.

Building collective intuition means gathering information on real time basis and involving people by holding intensive discussions with them in groups. Through such discussions, the company can get a sense of how it should move ahead.

*

Cusumano, Michael A. and Markides, Constantinos C. (Editors), ―Strategy as Strategic Decision Making‖ in Strategic Thinking for the Next Economy, Jossey Bass, 2001.

22

A to Z of Business Strategy

Inviting and debating divergent views is an important part of strategy formulation. Conflict promotes creative thinking, a healthy debate on the various options available, validation of the various assumptions made and an overall improvement in the quality of decisions. Companies which are good at strategic planning get into action mode quickly. They encourage debate and bring a lot of energy into the discussions. But they also know when to end the deliberations and freeze a decision. While trying to build consensus, they know how to break a deadlock. They take a decision even when people are finding it difficult to agree and come to an understanding. On the other hand, companies which are weak in strategic management tend to postpone strategic decisions and end up making hurried, last minute decisions. Strategic decision making has its associated share of politics. Politics must be minimized, if not eliminated, by emphasizing a shared vision and through a more balanced power structure which gives different decision makers latitude and scope to contribute. A clear definition of responsibilities may make managers feel more secure, more willing to cooperate and consequently reduce unhealthy competition. The rise of the knowledge economy and the growing importance of knowledge workers are putting pressure on companies to change their style of operating. The three Ss, Strategy, Structure, Systems are giving way to the 3 Ps, Purpose, Process and People. The 3P doctrine developed by Christopher Bartlett and Sumantra Ghoshal* emphasizes that the focus must shift from enforcing compliance to facilitating cooperation among people and valuing initiative more than discipline. Top management must establish a sense of purpose within the company. Purpose allows strategy to emerge from within the organization at different levels. Purpose generates energy and alignment. Instead of emphasizing structure, the top management should focus on building the core organizational processes that will promote an entrepreneurial mindset that can help in creating and leveraging knowledge to create value. Finally, instead of building systems, top management should develop people and help them in fully exploiting their potential. Senior managers should play the role of mentors rather than rule enforcers.

*

Ghoshal, Sumantra and Bartlett, Christopher A., The Individualized Corporation, Harper Collins, 1997.

Strategy: An Introduction

23

The basic principles of Porter‘s competitive strategy also need to be reinterpreted in a fast paced business environment. As Arnoldo Hax and Dean Wilde* suggest, in addition to competing on cost leadership or differentiation, companies can explore other options. The ―customer solutions‖ option is based on offering a wider range of products and services that satisfy most if not all the customers‘ needs. This broad bundle of services might be customized according to market needs. This strategy emphasizes bonding with customers, anticipating their needs and working closely with them to develop new products. The ―system lock in‖ option considers all the meaningful players in the system that contribute to the creation of economic value. The company concentrates on nurturing, attracting and retaining complementors‘ share to lock out competitors and lock in customers. As the new millennium gets under way, there is little doubt that strategy will play a key role for companies across industries. Flexibility, shorter planning cycles, the ability to gather data in real time, rapid midcourse corrections and efficient execution will hold the key to success in the coming years.

*

Hax, Arnoldo C and Wilde II, Dean L. ―The Delta Model: Adaptive Management for a Changing World‖, Sloan Management Review, Winter 1999, pp. 1128.

24

Ackoff, RUSSELL L.

A Ackoff, Russell L. One of the early strategy gurus, Ackoff introduced rigor into strategic planning. In his book A Concept of Corporate Planning, Ackoff mentions that there are some aspects of the future about which we can be virtually certain. Here, companies can pursue commitment planning. There are other aspects of the future about which we cannot be certain, but we can be reasonably sure of what the possibilities are. Here, CONTINGENCY PLANNING is useful. A good example is planning for a military invasion. Every possibility is identified and analyzed and a suitable action plan prepared because time is of the essence, once a possibility has become a reality. Finally, there are some aspects of the future, which cannot be anticipated. Here, RESPONSIVENESS PLANNING can be used, i.e. building flexibility into the organization. (See also: ADAPTIVE PLANNING)

Activity Based Costing (ABC) Activity based costing increases the accuracy of cost information by linking overhead and other indirect costs to product or customer segments more precisely. Traditional accounting systems distribute indirect costs on the basis of direct labor hours, machine hours, or material costs. This leads to a distorted picture. Decisions about which product line to invest in and which not to invest in, become difficult. ABC undertakes detailed economic analyses of important business activities to improve strategic and operational decisions. To build a system that will support ABC, companies should:   

Determine the key activities performed; Determine the cost drivers by activity; and Determine overhead and other indirect costs by activity, using clearly identified cost drivers. ABC can be used to:

Adjacencies

1.

25

Re-Price Products:

Managers can analyze product profitability more accurately by combining activity based cost data with pricing information. This can result in the re-pricing or elimination of unprofitable products. Managers can also estimate new product costs accurately. 2. Reduce Cost: ABC identifies the components of overhead costs and other cost drivers. Managers can reduce costs by lowering the cost of an activity, or the number of activities per unit. 3. Influence Strategic and Operational Planning: ABC can facilitate target costing, performance measurement for continuous improvement, and resource allocation based on projected demand and infrastructure requirements. ABC can also assist a company in identifying / evaluating new business opportunities. (See also: FULL COSTING, STRATEGIC COST MANAGEMENT)

Adaptive Planning This school of strategic planning, developed by Russell ACKOFF, believes that the principal value of planning lies not in the plans themselves but in the process of producing them. Companies should try to put in place a system that will minimize the future need for retrospective planning, i.e. planning aimed at removing deficiencies produced by past decisions. This school classifies the future into three types: certainty, uncertainty and ignorance. When the future is reasonably certain, commitment planning can be used. When the future is uncertain but we can be reasonably sure of what the possibilities are, CONTINGENCY PLANNING can be used. Finally, there are some aspects of the future that just cannot be anticipated. The only way to deal with such uncertainties is by building responsiveness and flexibility into the organization. This is called RESPONSIVENESS PLANNING.

Adjacencies A term coined by Chris Zook and James Allen* for markets close to a company‘s core business. By identifying and exploiting such markets, *

Zook, Chris, Beyond the Core: Expand Your Market Without Abandoning Your Roots, HBS Press, 2004; Zook, Chris, and Allen, James, Profit From the Core: Growth Strategy in an Era of Turbulence, Harvard Business School Press,

26

Adjusted PRESENT VALUE (APV)

companies can create a new growth trajectory. Adjacencies essentially imply related diversification, i.e. moving into a new area which has some resemblance to the firm‘s core business and taking advantage of its existing competencies. Adjacencies represent new growth opportunities which have a strong fit with the existing business. (See also: CORE COMPETENCE, DIVERSIFICATION)

Adjusted Present Value (APV) NET PRESENT VALUE

(NPV) is a popular method of evaluating an investment decision. NPV involves estimating the cash flows expected from the project and discounting them to the present value. NPV is, however, not suitable in other more complex situations where risk is different for different cash flows. Adjusted present value is a modified version of NPV. APV uses different discount rates for different cash flows depending on the associated risk. Higher the risk, higher the discount factor used.

Agency Theory A theory which probes the relationship between principals and agents. Principals appoint agents to get the work done. The goals of principals usually differ from those of the agents. This gives rise to the agency problem. For example, advertisers (principals) tend to emphasize sales goals and the cost-effectiveness of marketing communications, whereas advertising agencies may be more inclined to think of creative goals and attention-getting commercials. Professors of top business schools would like to spend most of their time doing research and consultancy. But the owners expect these professors to spend more time with students both in the classroom and outside. Agency theory is a key concept in corporate governance. Professional managers often pursue strategies that increase their personal payoffs at the expense of shareholders. For example, they may grant themselves lavish perquisites, including elegant corner offices, corporate jets, large staffs and extravagant retirement programs.

2001 and Zook, Chris, and Allen, James, ―Growth Outside the Core‖, Harvard Business Review, December 2003, pp. 66-73.

Alignment

27

Managers also often tend to pursue growth at the cost of profitability. Shareholders generally want to maximize earnings, since growth in earnings results in stock appreciation. Since managers are typically compensated more for sales rather than earnings growth, they tend to be enthusiastic about strategies such as mergers and acquisitions even when this enthusiasm is not really justified. Managers may also pursue diversification opportunities that are not necessarily in line with the company‘s best interests. In other cases, managers may become complacent and allow things to drift. They may avoid risk since they feel they are more likely to be fired for failure than for mediocre performance. Executives may be far less entrepreneurial than they should be. They may not make the bold moves that a situation demands. One way to tackle the agency problem is to align the interests of managers with those of the owners by using appropriate incentives such as stock option and executive bonus plans. But, ironically enough, these schemes may also tempt managers to act against the best interests of the firm. For example, they may manipulate the financial statements to artificially increase earnings. (See also: CORPORATE GOVERNANCE)

Alignment A key factor in effective implementation of strategy. Most large organizations are divided into business units which are out of synch and work at cross purposes. The challenge is to coordinate the activities of these units and leverage their skills for the benefit of the organization as a whole. Kaplan & Norton* call this alignment. By aligning the activities of its various business and support units, an organization can create additional sources of value in various ways. Financial synergies can be generated through centralized resource allocation and financial management. Value can also be created if corporate headquarters can operate internal capital markets better than external market mechanisms, and share knowledge across business units in a

*

Kaplan, Robert S. and Norton, David P., Alignment — Using the Balanced Score-card to Create Corporate Synergies, Harvard Business School Press, 2006.

28

Alignment

manner that would be difficult if the various units were independent entities. Customer synergy means enhancing customer relationships by offering a range of complementary products and services from different business units. Corporations can leverage their multiple products and services to create unique integrated solutions, resulting in customer satisfaction and loyalty that less diversified and more focused organizations cannot match. Companies can also generate value by delivering a value proposition consistently throughout their decentralized units. Cross selling to specific customers can also generate value. Internal process synergies can be created by generating economies of scale in activities such as procurement, logistics, information technology and infrastructure. Sharing processes across units generates economies of scale in such activities and helps cut costs. Centralized resources having specialized expertise and knowledge in operating a key process or service can be leveraged. The sharing of common philosophies, programs and competencies across business units can also generate significant benefits. Expertise sharing can reduce the time it needs to respond to customer needs and better equip the company to exploit emerging opportunities in the business environment. Learning and growth synergies can be generated by developing and sharing critical intangible assets, including people, technology, culture and leadership. Corporate headquarters can put in place effective processes for developing intangible assets and promote the sharing of knowledge and best practices throughout all its business and support units. New ideas can rapidly spread across the enterprise and be assimilated by the business units in a manner that would be difficult were they independent entities. Growing leaders faster than competition can generate competitive advantage. There are different ways of achieving alignment. One way is to start at the top and then cascade down. Another way is to start in the middle, namely at the business unit level, before building a corporate scorecard and map. Some companies launch an enterprise-wide initiative right at the start. Others conduct a pilot test at one or two business units before extending the scope to other enterprise units. Alignment has four components:

Ansoff, IGOR H.

1. 2. 3. 4.

29

Strategic fit; Organization alignment; Human capital alignment; and Alignment of planning and control systems.

Strategic fit exists when the internal performance drivers are consistent and aligned with the desired customer and financial outcomes. Organization alignment explores how the various parts of an organization can synchronize their activities to generate synergy. Human capital alignment is achieved when employee‘s goals, training and incentives become aligned with business strategy. An alignment of planning and control systems exists when management systems for planning, operations and control are linked to strategy. As Kaplan and Norton put it, ―Strategy execution is not a matter of luck. It is the result of conscious attention, combining both leadership and management processes to describe and measure the strategy, to align internal and external organizational units with the strategy, to align employees with the strategy through intrinsic and extrinsic motivation and targeted competency development programs and finally, to align existing management processes, reports and review meetings, with the execution, monitoring and adapting of the strategy.‖ (See also: BALANCED SCORECARD)

Ansoff, Igor H. A famous strategy guru, Igor Ansoff developed the notion of corporate strategic planning. He argued that any business needs to look at its resources, and align them with its business environment. Ansoff‘s analytical tools, such as competence grids, flow matrices, charts and diagrams are popular in contemporary management literature. He used the term competitive advantage years before Michael Porter did. Ansoff‘s book, Corporate Strategy: An Analytical Approach to Business Policy for Growth and Expansion (1987) mentions three classes of decisions: 5. Strategic (the selection of the product / market mix); 6. Administrative (structure); and 7. Operating (process).

30

Ansoff, IGOR H.

According to Ansoff, strategy should focus on three fundamental issues:   

Definition of the firm‘s core objectives; Whether the firm should diversify and, if so, into what areas; and How the business should exploit and develop its new or existing market.

The closer a business stays to its existing products and markets, the lower the risk. Introducing new products into new markets for diversification carries the highest risk. Hence, the recommendation to stick to the knitting. Ansoff depicted this in a matrix form, with four possible strategies, depending on the situation faced.

Old Markets

Old Products

New Products

Market Penetration

Product Development

New Markets









Market Development

Diversification

Market penetration means increasing market share by encouraging current customers to buy more, attracting competitors‘ customers, or convincing non-users to use the product. Market development implies launching the current product in a new market by expanding distribution channels, selling in new locations or identifying additional potential users. Product development involves launching a new product in the current market by developing new features, improving quality levels, etc. Diversification means moving beyond the current business. Concentric (related) diversification involves developing new products for the same market segment. Conglomerate (unrelated) diversification involves developing new products for new markets. Ansoff is also famous for:

  

Establishing corporate planning as a formal management process. Popularizing SWOT analysis. Developing the idea of environmental scanning.

Anti-Takeover STRATEGY







31

Repositioning ―strategic planning‖ as part of a continuing process rather than a once-a-year (or less frequent) planning process. Articulating the various advantages and disadvantages of deliberate strategy versus emergent strategy. ―Gap‖ analysis — which looks at the gap between our aspirations and the likely outcome of current strategies.

Ansoff‘s seminal book, Corporate Strategy emphasizes the need to break down the strategy process into various steps:    

External analysis — understanding market opportunities and threats; Internal analysis — understanding strengths and weaknesses; Choice (and our alternatives); and Implementation. (See also: STRATEGIC OPTIONS, SWOT ANALYSIS)

Anti-Takeover Strategy Methods used by an incumbent management to thwart a takeover bid. A takeover means change of ownership and, usually, a change of management as well. The current management can resist the takeover bid in various ways. Important methods used in thwarting takeovers include: 









The golden parachute is a provision in a CEO‘s contract to ensure that he will get a large bonus in cash or stock if the company is acquired. The supermajority is a defense that requires an overwhelming majority of shareholders to approve of any acquisition. This makes a takeover much more unlikely. A staggered board of directors prolongs the takeover process by preventing the entire board from being replaced at the same time. The terms are staggered so that some members are elected, say, every two years, while others are elected every four years. The acquirer may not want to wait four years for completely reconstituting the board. Dual-class stock allows company owners to hold on to voting stock, while the company issues stock with little or no voting rights to the public. This way the new investors cannot take control of the company. A poison pill refers to anything the target company does to make itself less valuable or less desirable as an acquisition once such a raid has

32

Argyris, CHRI S

begun. For example, high-level managers and other employees may threaten to leave the company if it is acquired. A specific asset of a company, such as its R&D center or a particular division may be sold off to another company, or spun off into a separate corporation. A flip-in provision may allow current shareholders to buy more stocks at a steep discount in the event of a takeover attempt. The flow of additional cheap shares into the total pool of shares dilutes their value and voting power. A more drastic poison pill involves deliberately taking on large amounts of debt.

Argyris, Chris A social psychologist by training, Chris Argyris conducted pioneering work on how individuals respond to changing organizational situations and the impediments to organizational learning. Argyris has undertaken extensive research on learning in teams and drawn attention to the problems created by defensive behavior. The cleverer the team is, the more difficult it becomes to maintain openness to learning, and to avoid becoming defensive. Argyris describes the process involved as ―doubleloop learning‖. While ―single-loop learning‖ involves doing existing things better, double-loop learning entails doing existing things in new ways, or inventing new things. Effectively, double-loop learning involves reframing problems and stepping outside existing mind-sets. Argyri‘s language is sometimes hard to understand. So he is often perceived as an esoteric rather than a popular guru. But his ideas and thoughts are profound and continue to guide the functioning of today‘s organizations. (See also: ORGANIZATIONAL LEARNING)

Balanced SCORECARD

33

B Backward Integration Moving along the VALUE CHAIN towards the inputs side. By producing internally some or all of the inputs, a firm can benefit in various ways. It can avoid sharing proprietary information and data with its suppliers. This can be an important factor if the exact specifications of component can reveal the key characteristics of the final product‘s design to the supplier. Backward integration may result in inputs with closely controlled specifications, enabling the firm to improve quality and differentiate its product. If the inputs are critical, backward integration helps a firm to gain greater control of the value chain and to mitigate the high BARGAINING POWER OF SUPPLIERS. Some good examples of backward integration are India‘s largest aluminum manufacturer Hindalco setting up a power plant, Reliance moving into petroleum refining and Tata Steel setting up its own township in Jamshedpur as also mines and collieries in various parts of Orissa and Bihar. On the flip side, backward integration can also reduce the flexibility of a business if the demand for the end-product slows down. Margins might then reduce due to high overheads. Moreover, the activities involved in backward integration can often be handled more efficiently by a specialized external supplier. (See also: VERTICAL INTEGRATION)

Balanced Scorecard Designed by Robert KAPLAN and David NORTON, the balanced scorecard provides a comprehensive set of objectives and performance measures to monitor a company‘s progress. These include: 



Financial performance, namely revenues, earnings, return on capital, cash flow, etc. Customer value performance, namely market share, customer satisfaction, customer loyalty, etc.

34





Bargaining POWER OF BUYERS

Internal business process performance, namely productivity, quality, delivery, etc. Learning and growth — percent of revenue from new products, employee suggestions, rate of improvement, employee morale, knowledge, turnover, use of best demonstrated practices.

The challenge in implementing balanced scorecard lies in identifying the key metrics and measuring them on an ongoing basis so that the firm can systematically achieve its objectives. Too many metrics can make things complicated. So a few key metrics must be carefully chosen. (See also: ALIGNMENT)

Bargaining Power of Buyers One of the forces in Porter‘s FIVE FORCES MODEL. The higher the bargaining power of buyers, less attractive the industry. The bargaining power of buyers is high under the following circumstances:    





Few buyers who purchase in large quantities. Low switching costs, resulting in low loyalty. Numerous, and relatively small, sellers. The item being purchased is not an important one for buyers who can either take it or leave it. Buyers have a lot of information about competitive offers, which they can use for bargaining. There is a good possibility that buyers may decide to integrate backwards, namely make the product themselves rather than buy it. (See also: PORTER, MICHAEL E.)

Bargaining Power of Suppliers One of the forces in Porter‘s FIVE FORCES MODEL. Higher the bargaining power of suppliers, the less attractive the industry.

*

Abstracted from the book, The Essence of Competitive Strategy by David Faulkner and Cliff Bowman, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.

Barnard, CHESTER

35

Bargaining power of suppliers tends to be high under the following circumstances:     

The purchase is important to the buyer. Buyers face high switching costs. There are few alternative sources of supply. Any particular buyer is not an important customer for the supplier. There is a strong possibility that the supplier may integrate forward. (See also: PORTER, MICHAEL E.)

Barnard, Chester One of the first management thinkers to think differently from the then gurus, Frederick Taylor and Max Weber, Barnard spent his whole career as a business executive with the Bell Telephone Company. He wrote two influential books, The Functions of the Executive (1938) and Organization and Management (1948). Barnard emphasized the importance of communication and shared values in organizations. Barnard excelled at organization building skills. His tenure as CEO was marked by a sense of public service and personal integrity that are almost unimaginable to many today. He showed exemplary commitment to corporate welfare policies. For example, at the height of the Depression in 1933, Barnard announced a no-layoff policy choosing to reduce employee‘s working hours instead. Management authority, he realized, rested in its ability to persuade rather than to command. The challenge was to balance the inherent tension between the needs of individual employees and the goals of an organization. He also recognized that much of the creative potential of an organization lay in informal networks, not in its formal hierarchy. He understood the role of constructive conflict. Barnard viewed the organization as a complex social system. The main challenge for management was achieving cooperation among its groups and individuals to facilitate the achievement of organizational goals, i.e. resolving the tension between achieving organizational goals and the need for individuals to achieve personal goals. Organizational goals could not be accomplished unless the leadership of the organization acknowledged individual aspirations and devised a means of helping employees achieve them.

36

Barriers TO ENTRY

For Barnard, conventional incentive schemes were essentially a selffulfilling prophecy. Much before Maslow, Barnard argued that beyond a certain level of equitable compensation, employees would not necessarily be motivated by financial incentives. Bonuses and incentives only created a culture of greed. Barnard argued that management had to focus on the ―strategic‖ few that would offer ―the greatest leverage over the outcomes of a particular decision‖. He suggested that deciding what decisions not to make was as important as which decisions to make. ―The fine art of executive decision consists in not deciding questions that are not now pertinent, in not deciding prematurely, in not making decisions that cannot be made effective, and in not making decisions that others should make.‖ Here, Barnard seemed to be in agreement with Peter Drucker.

Barriers to Entry One of the five forces in Porter‘s famous FIVE FORCES MODEL. barriers to entry are the obstacles that a firm must overcome in order to enter an industry. When high entry barriers exist in an industry, competition is usually less intense and profitability tends to be high. On the other hand, when entry barriers are low, new firms can enter the industry more easily. While demand may not go up immediately, the new entrants bring along additional capacity and reduce the overall level of profitability in the industry. The barriers to entry can be tangible or intangible. Tangible barriers include capital and various kinds of physical assets like plant and machinery and infrastructure. Tangible barriers are easier to replicate than intangible barriers, such as brands, corporate reputation, customer loyalty and relationships with vendors / distribution channels. Barriers to entry may be high under the following circumstances*: 

*

Economies Of Scale:

If there are major cost advantages to be gained from operating on a large scale or scope then new entrants will not find it easy.

Abstracted from the book, The Essence of Competitive Strategy by David Faulkner and Cliff Bowman, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.

Barriers TO IMITATION

















37

Learning Curve:

If low unit costs can be achieved by accumulated learning, inexperienced new entrants will be at a unit cost disadvantage. Knowledge and Skills: Access to process knowledge and particular skills can make entry difficult. Customer Brand Loyalty: Customers may have preferred brands, or they may have strong relationships with their existing suppliers. New entrants have to persuade customers that it is worth incurring switching costs and move to the product of a new entrant. Capital Costs: High capital costs involved in setting up production facilities, R&D centers, dealer networks and brand building will limit the number of potential entrants. Distribution Channels: It is often difficult for a new player to break into an existing distribution network. If all major distribution outlets are already closed to the new entrants, they may have to make heavy investments in setting up their own direct distribution network. High Switching Costs: High switching costs for customers constitute a barrier to entry. Government Policy: Government may restrict licenses, issue exclusive franchises or establish regulations that are troublesome and costly to implement. Access to Low-Cost Inputs: This may act as a barrier to entry if potential entrants do not have such access to inputs which competitors enjoy. (See also: BARRIERS TO IMITATION, FIVE FORCES MODEL)

Barriers to Imitation With innovations rapidly diffusing, the key to success in today‘s business environment is creating barriers to imitation. In general, tangible assets are easier to replicate compared to intangible resources. Thus, brands create formidable barriers to imitation but large factories can be easily replicated. Similarly, when a way of working is built into the company‘s culture, imitation becomes difficult. For example, just-intime, in which Toyota is a master is less about techniques and more about corporate philosophy and culture. That is why companies have found it difficult to implement just-in-time even though so much has been written about it and Toyota allows managers from all over the world to visit its factories.

38

Bartlett, CHRISTOPHER A.

(See also: BARRIERS TO ENTRY, FIVE FORCES MODEL)

Bartlett, Christopher A. Famous for his work on globalization and strategic management. Bartlett is the author / coauthor of several important books, including Managing Across Borders and Individualized Corporation both coauthored with Sumantra GHOSHAL. Managing Across Borders is considered one of the best ever books written on business management and possibly the most authoritative book on globalization. The book has been translated into several languages. (See also: GLOBALIZATION)

BCG Growth-Share Matrix The Boston Consulting Group (BCG) developed a matrix to help companies analyze their product lines and businesses. The 2x2 matrix considers two factors, market growth rate and the company‘s market share, as indicated below.

Accordingly, the BCG matrix divides products / businesses into four categories:

Beachhead MARKET









39

Stars:

These high growth products in a fast growing market need higher resource commitments. For a company like Satyam Computer Services, its ERP implementation business is a star. Cash Cows: These are low growth, high market share products where minimal investments are envisaged. Indeed, cash cows provide cash flows that support other businesses. The soaps and detergents business is a cash cow for Hindustan Lever Ltd. Question Marks: These are low market share business units in high growth markets. Investment is needed to build them into stars. The foods division of HLL falls in this category as also the games business of Microsoft, and the retailing venture of Reliance. The long term profitability of these businesses is by no means certain. Dogs: These are low growth and low market share businesses which generate just enough cash to maintain themselves. They are businesses from which the company is likely to withdraw in the near future. IBM thought the PC business was a dog and sold it to the Chinese computer manufacturer, Lenovo.

Businesses evolve over time. According to the conventional product life cycle, question marks may turn into stars, and then become cash cows if the market growth falls, finally becoming dogs towards the end of the cycle. It is, however, not necessary that businesses must evolve in this fashion. A star may turn into a dog overnight if a DISRUPTIVE TECHNOLOGY emerges in an industry. That is what happened to mini computers when PCs arrived. On the other hand, a cash cow can be converted into a star by brand repositioning or by targeting a new customer segment. In India, Cadbury‘s has attempted to reposition its chocolates as products that can also be consumed by adults. (See also: NINE-CELL PLANNING GRID)

Beachhead Market A market similar to a targeted strategic market but which provides a low-risk learning opportunity. For example, Austria / Switzerland can be considered beachhead markets for companies planning to enter Germany. Singapore is a beachhead market for the Asian region. (See also: GLOBALIZATION)

40

Benchmarking

Benchmarking A process by which a company compares itself with another company in the same or different industry on how well it is faring on various parameters. Benchmarking helps companies in setting stretch targets, improving the way of functioning and avoiding complacency. (See also: BEST PRACTICES)

Best Practices The most effective way to carry out a business activity or process. The term ―best‖ is highly subjective, context dependent, and also seems to imply that no further improvements are possible. Many people now prefer the term good practice. Best practices are often contextual. So transferring them across organizations may not be as easy as it often looks. Sometimes the transfer of a best practice across departments / functions even within an organization, can be a challenge. When best practices are embedded in an organization‘s culture, replication in another organization becomes very difficult. (See also: BENCHMARKING, BARRIERS TO IMITATION)

BHAG See BIG HAIRY AUDACIOUS GOALS.

Bias for Action Many managers fail to take purposeful action. They tend to ignore or postpone dealing with crucial issues which require reflection, systematic planning, creative thinking, and above all, time. Instead, they tend to be happy dealing with operational activities that require more immediate attention. Daily routines, superficial behaviors, poorly prioritized or unfocused tasks make unproductive busyness the most critical behavioral problem in large companies. Managers who want to cultivate a bias for action must take full responsibility for the intentions or goals. Without this kind of personal commitment, they will easily go astray or else blame others for setbacks.

Big Hairy Audacious Goals (BHAGs) A term coined by James C. Collins and Jerry I. Porras in their wellknown book, Built To Last. Visionary companies set big hairy audacious

Blue OCEAN STRATEGY

41

goals for themselves that raise the bar and inspire people across all levels. Examples of BHAGs include:    

Boeing‘s decision to commit to a Boeing 707 or 747; Walt Disney‘s decision to create Disneyland; Henry Ford‘s declaration, ―We will democratize the automobile‖; Dhirubhai Ambani‘s ambition of constructing the world‘s largest petroleum refinery.

A BHAG should be consistent with the company‘s core ideology. It should be so clear and compelling that it must require little or no explanation. It must get people excited and pumped up. A BHAG should fall well outside the comfort zone. While it is important for people in the organization to believe they can pull it off, it should require tremendous effort. A BHAG should be so bold and compelling in its own right that even if the organization‘s leaders disappeared, it would continue to inspire progress. (See also: CORE IDEOLOGY, CORPORATE PURPOSE)

Blue Ocean Strategy* Most companies focus on beating the competition. But according to W. Chan Kim and Renee Mauborgne, two of the most respected contemporary scholars in the area of strategy, the best way to beat the competition is to stop trying to beat the competition. Markets can be divided into red oceans and blue oceans. Red oceans represent the known or existing market space. Blue oceans denote the non-existent or unknown market space. In red oceans, industry boundaries are defined and accepted, and the basis for competing is wellknown. Here, companies try to grab market share from each other. As competition intensifies, both profitability and growth decline and products become commodities. Blue oceans, in contrast, represent untapped

*

Kim, W. Chan; Mauborgne, Renee, ―Blue Ocean Strategy‖, Harvard Business Review, October 2004, pp. 76-84, and Kim, W. Chan; Mauborgne, Renee, Blue Ocean Strategy: How to Create Uncontested Market Space and Make Competition Irrelevant, Harvard Business School Press, 2005.

42

Blue OCEAN STRATEGY

markets in which the rules of the game are still not defined. Blue oceans offer highly profitable growth opportunities. Although some blue oceans are created well beyond existing industry boundaries, most are created from within red oceans by expanding existing industry boundaries. Identification of blue oceans cannot be done by looking at the past. About a hundred years ago, many of today‘s industries, automobiles, music recording, aviation, petrochemicals, health care and management consulting were either unheard of or were just emerging. Even as recently as thirty years back, industries such as mutual funds, cell phones, gas-fired electricity plants, biotechnology, discount retail, express package delivery, minivans, snowboards, coffee bars and home videos did not exist in a meaningful way. Blue ocean strategy is the result of a new mindset that moves the attention of companies away from competitors to alternatives, and from customers to non-customers. It involves changing the rules of the game through the careful examination of factors that:    

Can be eliminated; Should be reduced well below the industry‘s standard; Should be raised well above the industry‘s standard; and Should be created.

In most industries, a common definition tends to emerge of who the target buyers are and what value they are looking for. Some industries compete principally on functionality. Other industries compete largely on emotional appeal. But what is often overlooked is that the appeal of most products or services is rarely intrinsic. Through the way they have competed in the past, companies unconsciously shape buyer‘s expectations. Over time, functionally oriented industries may become more functionally oriented while emotionally oriented industries may become even more emotionally oriented. In the process, aspirations of customers tend to get ignored. When companies are willing to challenge conventional wisdom, they often find new market space. In emotionally oriented industries, removing frills may create a fundamentally simpler, lower-priced, lower-cost business model that customers would welcome. Conversely, functionally oriented industries can often infuse commodity products with new life by adding a dose of emotion.

Brainstorming

43

Swatch transformed the functionally driven budget watch industry into an emotionally driven fashion statement. The Body Shop did the reverse, transforming the emotionally driven cosmetics business into a functional, no-nonsense one. (See also: VALUE INNOVATION)

Bottom of the Pyramid A term coined by the well-known guru, C. K. Prahalad*. Till recently, marketers tended to ignore people in the lower income groups because of their low per capita purchasing power. The current thinking is that people at the bottom-of-the-pyramid (BoP) comprise a huge market with distinctive characteristics. By understanding these characteristics and tailoring the marketing mix suitably, companies can unearth major opportunities to exploit this market. The bottom-of-the-pyramid is driven by factors such as affordability, access and availability. 





Affordability:

The key to success at the bottom of the pyramid is affordability without sacrificing acceptable levels of quality. Access: Distribution patterns for products and services must take into account where the poor live as well as their work patterns. Distribution networks must penetrate deeply into small towns and villages. Most BoP consumers work the full day before they have enough cash to purchase the necessities for that day. Thus, for example, stores that close at 5:00 PM have no relevance to them, as their shopping begins after 7:00 PM. Further, BoP consumers cannot travel great distances. Stores must be easy to reach, often within a short walk. This calls for effective penetration of the distribution network. Availability: Often, BoP consumers make their purchase decision based on the cash they have on hand at any given time. They tend to buy for immediate consumption. Availability, thus, is a critical factor in serving BoP consumers.

Brainstorming A useful technique for generating new ideas when confronting an unfamiliar situation or a problem. Brainstorming is a group activity in which *

Prahalad, C. K., Fortune at the Bottom of the Pyramid: Eradicating Poverty Through Profits, Wharton School Publishing, 2006.

44

Brand MANAGEMENT

members are encouraged to speak freely, say the first answer that strikes them about how to solve a problem, no matter how weird or absurd it might be. Having obtained as many ideas as possible, the group then examines each one in more detail to determine the feasibility of implementation.

Brand Management For companies across industries today, brands are becoming increasingly important in the quest to gain competitive advantage. Brands symbolize trust, reputation and quality. Brands are intangible assets that are not easy to imitate. The high valuation of many of the successful companies today is on account of the brands they own. Brand management must be considered an integral part of corporate strategy and not just part of the marketing function. Little wonder that most contemporary CEOs get personally involved in branding related matters.

Breakeven Analysis Companies incur two kinds of costs, fixed costs which are incurred independent of the level of production, and variable costs which vary with the level of output. The breakeven point is the level of output at which a firm makes just enough profit to cover its overheads. The difference between price and variable cost is called contribution. In the short run, a firm may operate below the breakeven point just to recover part of the overheads. But in the long run, the firm must operate above the breakeven point and fully recover its overheads in order to survive and grow.

Bureaucracy Bureaucracy refers to the administrative execution and enforcement of rules. A bureaucratic organization is characterized by standardized procedure, formal division of responsibility, hierarchy, and impersonal relationships. Common examples of bureaucracies include governments, armed forces and the courts. Bureaucracies enforce order and discipline, especially while handling routine matters. But beyond a point they can also frustrate employees. A key task of managers in knowledge-based organizations is to eliminate bureaucracy.

Business FORECASTING

45

Business Ethics Business ethics is a form of applied ethics that is concerned with the various moral or ethical problems that can arise in a business setting, and any special duties or obligations that apply to persons who are engaged in business. Ethics is a normative discipline which involves making specific judgments about what is right or wrong, about what ought to be done or what ought not to be done. In some situations, if not all, what is right depends on the context. Many companies have a code of ethics that helps employees understand what actions are acceptable and what are not. (See also: CODE OF ETHICS)

Business Forecasting Business forecasting is an integral part of strategic planning. Various types of forecasts are used by companies depending on the situation: 

Economic Forecasts



Financial Forecasts include



Sales Forecasts



Technological Forecasts

are published by governmental agencies and private economic forecasting firms. A business firm can use these forecasts as a starting point. forecasts of financial variables such as the amount of external financing needed, earnings and cash flows. project future sales for the company‘s goods or services for a certain period. estimate the rate of technological progress.

Qualitative forecasting approaches are based on judgment and opinion. These include expert opinions, Delphi and consumer surveys. Quantitative approaches either crunch historical data (time series analyses) or associative data (causal forecasts). Time series methods include moving averages, exponential smoothing and trend analysis. Causal forecasts include simple regression, multiple regression and econometric modeling. Quantitative models work well in a relatively stable environment. In a highly volatile business environment, the qualitative approach based on human intuition and judgment is more useful than number crunching. The choice of a specific forecasting technique will depend on various factors, like the:

46

Business MODEL



Cost of developing the forecasting model;



Relationships being forecasted;



Time horizon;



Degree of accuracy desired; and



Data availability.

Business Model The way a company runs its business. A company‘s business model must address three issues: 8. Who are the customers? 9. What are they looking for? 10. How do we deliver the products or services needed by customers better than how competitors can? These questions may look simple. But it is the ability to address these questions well that determines the effectiveness of a business model. Business model design implies making major trade offs, deciding which customer segments not to serve, which activities not to do in-house, what kind of risks to avoid, and so on. Business model innovation, which goes far beyond process or product innovation, is essentially about changing the rules of the game. (See also: PROCESS INNOVATION, PRODUCT INNOVATION, VALUE CHAIN)

Business Process Reengineering (BPR) BPR involves the radical redesign of core business processes to achieve dramatic improvements in productivity, cycle times, and quality. In BPR, companies start from scratch and redesign existing processes to increase efficiency and to deliver more value to the customer, often by reducing organizational layers and eliminating unproductive activities. Functional organizations are transformed into cross-functional teams with a strong process orientation. Information technology (IT) is used to improve data dissemination and decision-making. BPR must be completed before any major IT intervention, otherwise the existing inefficiencies will simply get amplified.

Buy BACK

47

(See also: PROCESS INNOVATION)

Business Risk Business risk refers to the degree of uncertainty associated with a firm‘s sales volume and price realization. This risk is core to the business. Market characteristics and the firm‘s business model together determine business risk. Business risk is not easy to quantify. Yet, companies should try to go beyond qualitative statements and arrive at some numbers wherever possible. (See also: ENTERPRISE RISK MANAGEMENT)

Buy Back When a firm has more capital than it needs, it may buy back shares from the market. Buy backs are often viewed positively by the stock market because they signal that the company is prepared to return cash to its shareholders instead of frittering it away on unproductive investments or meaningless diversification. A company may also resort to buy back when the management feels that the market is undervaluing its shares in relation to their intrinsic value.

48

Cadbury COMMITTEE REPORT

C Cadbury Committee Report A standard reference point for any discussion on corporate governance. Prominent institutions in London concerned about audit and regulatory issues following a number of company collapses in the 1980s, set up a committee chaired by Sir Adrian Cadbury. To keep under control overpowerful chief executives or overenthusiastic executive management, the committee‘s 1992 report advocated various checks and balances at the board level. These included:     

Wider use of independent non-executive directors; Establishment of an Audit Committee; Separation of the posts of Chairman and CEO; Use of a remuneration committee; and Adherence to a detailed code of best practice. (See also: CORPORATE GOVERNANCE)

Capacity Expansion Growing an existing business often involves expansion of capacity in terms of plant, human resources, technological infrastructure, R&D facilities, etc. Any major capacity expansion is a strategic decision that involves significant resource commitment, and is often difficult to reverse. So such a decision has to be made carefully. Capacity expansion is often narrowly applied to manufacturing. But in many businesses, there is little or no manufacturing. So capacity needs also to be understood in terms of the investments made in the most critical area of the value chain. Thus in the pharmaceutical industry, capacity has to be defined in terms of scientific manpower and sales force. In a software development company, capacity has to be understood in terms of the number of programmers employed. In a business school, capacity may be defined as the number of professors available to teach students.

Capacity EXPANSION

49

According to Michael PORTER, the decision to expand capacity has to take into account various factors. Some of these are:     

Future demand. Future input prices. Likelihood of technological obsolescence. Probable capacity expansion by competitors. Future industry capacity and individual market shares.

The main risk in capacity expansion is the creation of excess capacity. When there is excess capacity, competition intensifies as players try to increase capacity utilization and profits come down. Excess capacity may result because of various reasons:  





















Capacity often has to be added in lumps, not in incremental fashion. Economies of scale or significant learning curve can prompt indiscriminate capacity expansion. Long lead times in adding capacity may motivate firms to add capacity even when future demand is uncertain. Changes in production technology may attract new firms even as older plants continue to operate due to exit barriers. Equipment suppliers, through price cutting and attractive credit schemes, can lure manufacturers into buying their products. Large buyers, by promising more business in future, can tempt their suppliers to add capacity. In some industries, such as airlines, the firm which has the largest capacity may be able to grab a disproportionately large chunk of the market. When there are several players in the market, they may all try to increase market share by increasing capacity. Firms often build more capacity than is needed in the initial stages when future prospects look favorable. Excess capacity often results when firms overestimate the potential of their competitors and want to preempt them by adding more capacity. Many manufacturing firms do not like to be left behind by competition and embark on a regular process of capacity expansion. Tax incentives sometimes motivate manufacturers to over-invest in plant and equipment.

50

Capital STRUCTURE

Capacity expansion can be used as a pre-emptive strategy to lock up a major share of the market and to both discourage competitors from expanding and potential rivals from entering the industry. According to Porter, a preemptive strategy is risky. It tends to succeed only under the following conditions:  





The expansion of capacity is large relative to market size. There are substantial economies of scale and learning curve advantages. The firm‘s strategy looks credible in terms of availability of resources, technological capabilities, past track record, etc. The firm announces its plans before competitors develop even a reasonable degree of commitment to the process.

A preemptive strategy is unlikely to succeed when competitors pursue non-economic goals, consider the business to have strategic importance and are prepared to give up profits in the short run, or have equal or better staying power.

Capital Structure The relative proportion of debt and equity used by a company to run its business. Debt is borrowed capital and has to be returned to the lenders in the short or medium term. Debt costs less but the mandatory interest and principal payments can cause strain on cash flows, especially in a company‘s early or difficult days. Equity is more expensive. But it has to be returned to investors only under exceptional circumstances. Companies must arrive at the appropriate capital structure after making appropriate trade offs. For example, in technology businesses where the markets tend to be volatile and the business risk high, it may be necessary to reduce FINANCIAL RISK by having a larger proportion of equity.

Cartel An illegal arrangement in which different market players come together and collude to fix the price or share the market suitably by voluntarily limiting competition. One of the most famous cartels in business history has been the Organization of Petroleum Exporting Countries (OPEC). (See also: OLIGOPOLY)

Chandler, ALFRED DUPONT

51

Cash Cow A business that generates more cash than is required to maintain its earning power. Such a business is expected to continue to generate cash without providing significant opportunities for growth through reinvestment of profits. Cash flows from such a business can be pumped into more promising ventures. (See: BCG GROWTH-SHARE MATRIX)

Chandler, Alfred DuPont One of the best-known business historians of our times, Chandler explored the relationship between strategy and structure. He realized that the overload in decision making at the top was indeed the reason for creating a new structure. This overload resulted not from the larger size of an enterprise per se, but from the increasing diversity and complexity of decisions that senior managers had to make. Chandler argued that growth without structural adjustment could lead only to economic inefficiency. As he wrote, ―Unless new structures are developed to meet new administrative needs which result from an expansion of a firm‘s activities into new areas, functions, or product lines, the technological, financial, and personnel economies of growth and size cannot be realized.‖ Chandler‘s book, Scale and Scope, which was published in 1990, provides several insights on the evolution of the modern industrial enterprise. Chandler pointed out that major industrial corporations clustered in industries in which high-technology production processes made it possible to exploit the cost advantages of economies of scale and scope. These tended to be capital intensive rather than labor intensive. In these industries, large-scale, low-cost producers operated at a much greater cost advantage than smaller, labor intensive producers. As these capital intensive producers grew in scale (volume), scope (diversification) and, consequently, complexity, they also began to invest in their own distribution networks. Over time, scale and scope demanded suitable changes in structure for effective management. (See also: ECONOMIES OF SCALE, ECONOMIES OF SCOPE, ORGANIZATIONAL DESIGN, ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE)

52

Change MANAGEMENT

Change Management In a rapidly changing business environment, organizations must learn to adapt themselves quickly. Change is necessary to ensure survival, growth and profitability of any business enterprise. But change is difficult for many reasons. Change requires effort and a new mindset. People find it difficult to adjust to changing status and power relationships. There is also a tendency to avoid change as it might be interpreted as a tacit admission of the failure of past policies. As Michael PORTER mentions*, change is extraordinarily painful and difficult for any successful organization. The past strategy becomes ingrained in organizational routines. Information that would modify or challenge it is either not sought or simply filtered out. As the past strategy becomes rooted in company culture, suggesting change is equated with disloyalty. Successful companies often seek predictability and stability. They become preoccupied with defending what they have. Supplanting or superseding old advantages to create new ones is not considered until the old advantages are long gone. Change often involves a sacrifice in financial performance, and unsettling organizational adjustments. A clear corporate vision is the starting point in any major change management initiative. It helps employees to understand why change is needed. Change can then be introduced proactively instead of being introduced as a fire fighting measure. Symbolic gestures tend to reinforce change by telling employees that management means business. To bring about change, it is also essential that responsibilities are clearly allotted. Accountability puts pressure on individuals to move fast. Metrics are also needed to track performance. Change initiatives must focus on a few critical areas in order to prevent resources from being spread too thin. Culture plays an important role in change management. Culture refers to the beliefs and values of employees. People have set notions about what is to be done and how it should be done on the basis of these beliefs and values. Culture is built up over a period of time and it cannot

*

Porter, Michael E., The Competitive Advantage of Nations, The Free Press, 1990.

Christensen, CLAYTON M.

53

be changed overnight. But strong leadership which sends out the right signals can hasten the process.

Christensen, Clayton M. Best known for his book, The Innovator’s Dilemma, Christensen‘s writing reflects highly insightful thinking on innovation and is a marked departure from conventional wisdom. Christensen‘s main argument is that successful companies lose their competitive edge over time because they try to pamper existing customers by adding more features, instead of looking at new customer segments which are looking for something simpler or cheaper that has necessarily to be delivered by a new business model. But it is not easy for successful companies to take actions which threaten their existing business model. This is what gives rise to the INNOVATOR’S DILEMMA. Based on his research in a variety of industries, including computers, retailing, pharmaceuticals, automobiles, and steel, Christensen shows how truly important, break-through innovations — or disruptive technologies — are initially rejected by mainstream customers because they cannot currently use them. This makes it difficult for firms with a strong focus on existing customers to find new markets for the products of the future. Even as they let go these opportunities, the more nimble entrepreneurial companies emerge to catch the next great wave of industry growth. The Innovator’s Dilemma presents useful insights for dealing with disruptive innovation. These insights can help managers determine when it is right not to listen to customers, when to invest in developing lowerperformance products that promise lower margins, and when to pursue small markets at the expense of seemingly larger and more lucrative ones. The Innovator’s Dilemma, together with The Innovator’s Solution and Seeing What is Next, form a trilogy that is compulsory reading for companies serious about innovating and creating value for their shareholders. (See also: INNOVATION, INNOVATOR’S DILEMMA, S-CURVE, TECHNOLOGY RISK)

54

Clusters

Clusters Michael PORTER* uses the term ―clusters‖ to describe geographical concentrations of interconnected companies and institutions in a particular business. In a globalized economy, companies can access capital, goods, information and technology from all parts of the world. Thanks to faster methods of transportation and communications, physical location has become less important. Yet, there are geographic concentrations of industrial activities. For example, Silicon Valley in California is reputed for its cluster of computer hardware and software companies. Even though it is a very expensive location, many tech companies continue to perform their key value adding activities in this region. Clusters include suppliers of components, machinery, services and institutions which provide specialized infrastructure. Sophisticated, demanding customers who keep companies on their toes can also be considered a part of the cluster. So can the local government, universities, research centers and think tanks who play a vital role in encouraging innovation and creating suitable conditions for more efficient value addition. Due to the superior quality of the local infrastructure, clusters help in improving productivity. Other aspects which give a location a head start over other centers include a high quality transportation network, which facilitates fast and efficient movement of goods, availability of skilled, educated and trained manpower, a sound legal system and favorable tax rates. Many leather goods, footwear, apparel and accessories companies operate out of Italy because of the country‘s reputation for fashion and design. France is an important country for cosmetics, since it has highly sophisticated customers. In a location with well-established marketing networks, companies can also take advantage of referrals. Clusters help companies improve as competition with rivals keeps them on their toes. The presence of companies engaged in related value chain activities, both downstream and upstream, facilitates effective coordination even without vertical integration. Proximity also builds a greater degree of trust among the various players.

*

Porter, Michael E., ―Clusters and the New Economics of Competition‖ Harvard Business Review, November-December 1998, pp. 77-90.

Commoditization

55

The presence of demanding customers in a cluster motivates companies to innovate, while the presence of competent suppliers and partners helps in bringing innovations to the market faster. A company within a cluster can source what it needs much faster, closely involve suppliers and partners in the product development process and obtain relevant technical and service support. (See also: COMPARATIVE ADVANTAGE, GLOBAL VALUE CHAIN CONFIGURATION, STRATEGIC ADVANTAGE)

Coase, Ronald A British economist and the Clifton R. Musser Professor Emeritus of Economics at the University of Chicago Law School, Coase is best known for two articles, ―The Nature of the Firm‖ (1937), which introduced the concept of transaction costs to explain the size of firms, and ―The Problem of Social Cost‖ (1960), which suggested that well defined property rights can overcome the problems of externalities. A graduate of the London School of Economics, Coase received the Nobel Prize in Economics in 1991.

Code of Ethics The corporate code of ethics defines a company‘s core values and guiding principles and often describes how employees are expected to behave in different circumstances. Well managed companies take various steps to enforce high ethical standards among employees. Through a corporate code of ethics, a firm can publicly display its commitment to high standards of moral excellence. (See also: BUSINESS ETHICS)

Commoditization As industries mature, the scope to differentiate reduces. The offerings of different players begin to look increasingly alike. Price-based competition intensifies. This phenomenon is called commoditization. Companies can deal with commoditization in various ways. One way is to wrap value added services around the core product. Differentiation of the core product may be difficult but there may be scope to innovate in packaging, delivery, customer experience or supply chain management. In the highly commoditized PC industry, for example, Dell suc-

56

Company PROFILE

ceeded largely because of its excellence in supply chain management. Online auctions may look like a commodity business but ebay has done astonishingly well by building a community and providing a great customer experience. A second way of preventing, or reversing, commoditization is to reposition the product. Repositioning both helps change the perceptions of customers and also in differentiating the product. (See also: BLUE OCEAN STRATEGY, DIFFERENTIATION)

Company Profile An explicit mapping of a company‘s capabilities and expertise. A company which has a good understanding of its capabilities and expertise can formulate effective strategies by accurately aligning its profile with its corporate mission and environmental factors. One way to develop the company profile is to critically examine each function, and the key components under each function. An example of various functions and key components of each is illustrated in the table below: Marketing

Product range, sales organization, distribution network, pricing strategy, after sales services, etc.

Finance &

Fund raising capabilities, cost of capital, tax planning,

accounting

cost control, costing system, etc.

Operations Personnel

Raw material availability and costs, supplier relationships, inventory control systems, sub contracting, etc. Employees’ skills, morale, industrial relations, manpower turnover, specialized skills, etc.

General

Structure, communication systems, control systems, cul-

management

ture, decision making, strategic planning systems, etc.

(See also: ENVIRONMENTAL SCANNING, SWOT ANALYSIS)

Comparative Advantage The ability to cut costs by a suitable location of value chain activities. Global companies can realize comparative advantages by locating value chain activities in cheaper locations. Some automobile companies have preferred to locate their assembly plants at cheaper locations in Asia and Latin America, rather than North America or Europe. Many companies trying to enter the European Union (EU), including Dell and Intel, have preferred to locate their plants in Ireland, a cheaper location,

Competitive ADVANTAGE

57

compared to more developed countries, such as France and Germany. Texas Instruments set up a software design subsidiary at Bangalore in India to access the relatively low cost, highly skilled technical workers available locally. Many global companies such as General Electric (GE) and Citigroup are locating their back office operations in India. (See also: STRATEGIC ADVANTAGE)

Competitive Advantage Competitive advantage is the key message in Michael Porter‘s theory of COMPETITIVE STRATEGY. Competitive advantage means that a firm must be able to create a defendable position in an industry, in order to cope successfully with competitive forces and generate a superior return on investment. Superior performance within an industry can be achieved through COST LEADERSHIP, DIFFERENTIATION, or FOCUS. 





Cost leadership involves becoming the lowest cost producer in an industry by pursuing strategies such as economies of scale, process automation, supply chain efficiency, etc. Differentiation means being unique in an industry along some dimensions that are widely valued by buyers. Differentiation can be achieved on the basis of product, distribution, sales, marketing, service, image, etc. Focus means being the best in a carefully chosen segment, or group of segments.

Firms should pursue one of these strategies and take care not to get stuck in the middle. But care must also be taken to maintain a proper balance between cost leadership and differentiation. Thus a cost leader should not be seen to be offering distinctly inferior products compared to rivals who are competing on the basis of differentiation. Similarly, a differentiator cannot afford to have a very high cost structure. The costs should not exceed the price premium it receives from the buyers. The sustainability of competitive advantage depends on three conditions*. The first is the particular source of the advantage. There is a hierarchy of sources of competitive advantage in terms of sustainability. *

From Porter, Michael E., ―From Competitive Advantage to Corporate Strategy‖, Harvard Business Review, May-June 1987, pp. 43-59.

58

Competitor ANALYSIS

Lower-order advantages, such as low labor costs or cheap raw materials are relatively easy to imitate. Higher-order advantages, such as proprietary process technology, product differentiation, brand reputation and customer relationships are more durable. Higher-order advantages involve more advanced skills and capabilities such as specialized and highly trained personnel, internal technical capability and often close relationships with leading customers. Such advantages also demand sustained and cumulative investment in physical facilities and specialized intangible assets. The second determinant of sustainability is the number of distinct sources of advantage a firm possesses. If there is only one advantage, competitors can more easily nullify this advantage. Firms which sustain leadership over time, tend to proliferate advantages throughout the value chain. The third, and the most important, basis for sustainability is constant improvement and upgrading. A firm must keep creating new advantages at least as fast as competitors can replicate existing ones. The firm must improve its performance relentlessly against its existing advantages. This makes it more difficult for competitors to nullify them. In the long run, competitive advantage can be sustained only by expanding and upgrading sources and by moving up the hierarchy to more sustainable types. To sustain competitive advantage, a firm may have to deliberately destroy old advantages to create new, higher-order ones. A company must learn to exploit industry trends and close off the avenues along which competitors may attack by making pre-emptive investments. (See also: COST LEADERSHIP, COMPETITIVE STRATEGY, DIFFERENTIATION, FOCUS)

Competitor Analysis Analyzing competitors is an integral part of strategic planning. Michael * Porter‘s book, Competitive Strategy , offers valuable insights in this regard. In identifying current and potential competitors, firms must consider several important variables: *

From the book, Competitive Strategy: Techniques for Analyzing Industries and Competitors by Michael E. Porter, The Free Press, 1980.

Competitor ANALYSIS

 

 

59

How do other firms define the scope of their market? How similar are the benefits offered by the firm‘s products and services to those of other firms? How committed are other firms in the industry? What are the long-term intentions and goals of competitors?

Certain pitfalls must be avoided while doing competitor analysis. These include: 

  







Focusing on current and known competitors while ignoring potential entrants. Concentrating on large competitors while ignoring smaller players. Assuming that competitor behavior will not change with time. Misreading signals that may indicate a shift in the focus of competitors, or a refinement of their present strategies or tactics. Excessive focus on the tangible assets of competitors, while ignoring their intangible assets. Assuming that all the firms in the industry have the same constraints and opportunities. Getting too obsessed with outsmarting the competition, instead of focusing on customer needs and expectations.

The first step in analyzing competition is to understand the goals of competitors, whether they are satisfied with their current position or are likely to change strategy, and also how they might react to a competitor‘s moves. Porter draws a distinction between threatening and nonthreatening moves. Moves are non-threatening if competitors do not notice or are not concerned. In contrast, threatening moves are taken seriously by rivals. Before making such moves, it is important to estimate the likelihood, timing, effectiveness and extent of retaliation and assess whether the retaliation can be countered effectively. The response of a firm which gives importance to profitability is likely to be different from another which emphasizes market share. Given their goals some strategic moves can threaten certain competitors more than the others. In such cases, there is greater likelihood of retaliation. The stated and unstated financial goals, capabilities and psyche of a firm‘s competitors in the industry must be studied carefully. Analysis of competitor‘s goals helps a firm to avoid retaliatory moves that can trigger off intense rivalry. For instance, a move to gain

60

Competitor ANALYSIS

market share from a firm divesting its business would not provoke any retaliation. On the other hand, rivalry may intensify if an attempt is made to grab market share from a firm which is trying to build its business. A low cost producer is likely to respond very aggressively to the price cutting moves of a competitor. On the other hand, a firm which focuses on differentiation and customer loyalty is less likely to retaliate. It is important to thoroughly understand the capabilities and psyche of competitors. These include a competitor‘s beliefs about its relative position, historical and emotional identification with particular products and policies, cultural factors, organizational values, the extent to which a competitor believes in conventional wisdom, etc. Historical information on the competitor‘s past financial performance, track record in the market place, areas of success, past reactions to strategic moves, etc. can also be very useful. It is also important to gain greater understanding about the top management, the types of strategies that have worked for the management in the past, other businesses with which the top management had been earlier associated, events which have influenced top management in the past, the technical background of the management, etc. A company which is serious about a competitive move must clearly communicate that it is committed to the move and has the necessary resources to back it. Rivals are, then, more likely to resign themselves to the new position. Similarly, if a firm says it loud and clear that it will react strongly to moves by competitors, it may be able to deter them from making competitive moves. The greater the certainty with which the competitor sees the commitment being honored, the greater the deterrent value of the commitment. Competitors should understand that the firm has both the resources and resolve to carry out the commitment quickly. A firm should select its strategy based on all these considerations. An ideal strategy would prevent competitors from reacting. Such a situation arises when the legacy of the past makes some moves very costly for competitors to counter. Small and new firms often have little stake in the strategies practiced by industry leaders. These challengers can benefit substantially by pursuing strategies that penalize competitors for their stake in such existing strategies. (See also: COMPETITIVE STRATEGY)

Competitive STRATEGY

61

Competitive Strategy A coherent set of offensive or defensive actions to compete effectively in an industry. Thanks to Michael PORTER, companies today have considerable knowledge of competitive strategy. For Porter, the essence of competitive strategy formulation is understanding the industry structure and relating the company to its environment. Industries differ widely both in the nature of competition and opportunities for sustained profitability. The structural attractiveness of an industry depends on five factors, which form Porter‘s famous FIVE FORCES MODEL: 

The Entry of Competitors.

How easy or difficult is it for new entrants

to enter the business? 

The Threat of Substitutes.

How easily can the company‘s product or

service be substituted? 

The Bargaining Power of Buyers.

How strong is the position of buy-

ers? 

The Bargaining Power of Suppliers.

How strong is the position of

sellers? 

The Rivalry Among Existing Players.

Is there intense competition

among the existing players? The second central concern in strategy is a company‘s position within an industry*. Some positions are more profitable than others, regardless of what the average profitability of the industry may be. At the heart of positioning is COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE. In the long run, firms succeed relative to their competitors if they possess sustainable competitive advantage. There are two basic types of competitive advantage: COST LEADERSHIP and DIFFERENTIATION. Cost leadership is the ability of a firm to design, produce and market a comparable product at a lower cost, i.e. more efficiently than its competitors. Differentiation is the ability to provide unique and superior value to customers in terms of product quality, special features, after-sale service, etc. Differentiation allows a firm to command a premium price which leads to superior profitability, provided costs are comparable to those of competitors.

*

See: Michael Porter‘s The Competitive Advantage of Nations, The Free Press, 1990.

62

Concentration RATI O

It is difficult, though not impossible, to achieve lower cost and differentiation simultaneously relative to competitors. So a trade-off is involved. However, any successful strategy must pay close attention to both types of advantage while excelling in one. A low-cost producer must offer acceptable quality and service to avoid having to give discounts, while a differentiator‘s cost position must not be so far above that of competitors as to offset its price premium. A key variable in positioning is competitive scope. A firm must choose the range of product varieties it will produce, the distribution channels it will employ, the types of buyers it will serve, the geographic areas in which it will sell, and the array of related industries in which it will also compete. Most industries are segmented, with distinct product varieties, multiple distribution channels and several different types of customers. These segments have frequently differing needs. Serving different segments requires different strategies and, correspondingly, calls for different capabilities. Competitive scope is also important because firms can sometimes gain competitive advantage by exploiting interrelationships by competing in related industries through sharing of important activities or skills. Both industry structure and competitive position are dynamic. Industries can grow more or less attractive over time, as barriers to entry or other elements of industry structure change. Industry attractiveness and competitive position can also be shaped by a firm. Successful firms not only respond to their environment but also attempt to influence it in their favor. Achieving competitive advantage requires a firm to make choices. If a firm is to gain advantage, it must choose the type of competitive advantage it seeks to attain and the scope within which it can be attained. (See also: GENERIC STRATEGIES)

Concentration Ratio A measure of the degree of competition in an industry. Thus the fourfirm concentration ratio is the percentage of the market accounted for by the top four industry players. (See also: HERFINDAL INDEX, OLIGOPOLY)

Contract MANUFACTURING

63

Concentric Diversification Diversification into related areas. A less risky strategy compared to CONGLOMERATE DIVERSIFICATION. The new business may be related to the existing business in terms of product, technology — or both. (See also: DIVERSIFICATION)

Conglomerate Diversification Diversification into unrelated areas. Firms sometimes enter a new business simply because it represents the most promising investment opportunity available. The main concern here is the profit generating capacity of the new venture and financial synergies. For instance, businesses with sales patterns moving in opposite trends may balance each other. It is widely accepted that related diversification is more likely to succeed than conglomerate diversification. The key, of course, lies in understanding what is related and what is not. (See also: DIVERSIFICATION)

Contestability The degree to which firms can enter or leave an industry. Contestability provides a measure of the effect of potential competition in an industry. Perfect contestability implies there are no barriers to entry. In the early 1980s, the economist W. J. Baumol pointed out that perfect contestability could yield the results of perfect competition in a market, even without having a large number of small firms. The airline industry is generally held up as an example of a reasonably contestable industry. (See also: BARRIERS TO ENTRY)

Contingency Planning The development of a management plan comprising alternative strategies to ensure the success of a project even in the event of things going wrong. Essentially, it means preparing for highly uncertain situations. (See also: ADAPTIVE PLANNING, ACKOFF, RUSSELL.)

Contract Manufacturing Production on behalf of a client who owns the design and brand name. Contract manufacturing helps a company gain access to capacity in a cost effective way. On the other hand, the contract manufacturer does

64

Co-opetition

not have the burden of marketing the product and handling end customers. (See also: LICENSING)

Co-opetition Co-opetition, a word coined by Ray Noorda (the founder of Novell), is defined by Brandenburger and Nalebuff as a new mindset that combines cooperation and competition. Cooperation generally leads to an expansion of the cake and competition to a slicing up of the cake. Both cooperation and competition are necessary. An exclusive focus on competition ignores the potential for expanding the market or creating new profitable forms of enterprise. A co-opetition mindset actively looks for ways to change and expand the business, as well as newer and better ways to compete. (See also: DYNAMIC CAPABILITY BUILDING, PROCESS NETWORKS, STRATEGIC ALLIANCES)

Core Competence A core competence is a bundle of skills and technologies that enable a company to provide superior value to customers. A term coined by C. K. Prahalad and Gary Hamel*, core competence is effectively a company‘s specialized capability to create unique customer value. This capability is largely embodied in the collective knowledge of its people and the organizational procedures that shape the way employees interact. Over time, investments made in facilities, people and knowledge that strengthen core competencies create sustainable sources of competitive advantage. A core competence should not be equated with a single skill or discrete technology. If a company identifies too many competencies, it is probably referring to discrete skills. At the same time, if it identifies only one or two competencies, the level of aggregation is too broad. Typically, a firm may have between five and fifteen core competencies. Skills which are a pre-requisite for becoming an industry player, should not be confused with core competencies. A core competence is *

Prahalad, C. K. and Hamer, Gary, Competing for the Future, Harvard Business School Press, 1994.

Core COMPETENCE

65

also not a physical asset. For instance, a factory, a distribution channel, brand or patent cannot be referred to as a core competence. The ability to manage these assets may, however, be a core competence. A core competence should: 

 

Provide significant and appreciable value to customers, relative to competitor offerings; Be difficult for competitors to imitate or procure in the market; Enable a company to move into new markets or to develop new technologies.

Core competencies are not product specific. They can and should be leveragable to create new products or services. Indeed, a core competence is truly core when it forms the basis for entry into new product lines or businesses. Sony‘s core competence in miniaturization has enabled it to develop a range of popular consumer products. Reliance Industries‘ core competence in project management has enabled it to complete many complicated projects that span across industries ahead of schedule. The Aditya Vikram Birla group has a similar competence. By understanding core competencies, a firm can identify which businesses to strengthen and which to divest. Identification of core competencies can also lead to greater clarity on potential entrants into the industry who may be using similar core competencies to make other products. To sustain competitive advantage, competencies need to score well on four dimensions: 







Appropriability:

The degree to which the profits earned by a competence can be appropriated by someone other than the firm in which the profits were earned. The lower the appropriability of the asset, the more sustainable the profits. Durability: How durable is the competence as a source of profit? Shortening product and technology life cycles make most competencies less durable than they were a decade earlier. Transferability: The easier it is to transfer the core competencies and resources, the lower the sustainability of its competitive advantage. Replicability: If it is possible for a competitor, to construct a nearly identical set of capabilities by appropriate investment or by purchasing a similar asset, the competitive advantage is not sustainable.

66

Core IDEOLOGY

The following are some examples of core competence: Company

Core Competency

Products

Sharp / Toshiba

Flat screen display

Laptop computers, Television; Videophone

Sony

Miniaturization

Personal audio

Federal Express

Logistics management

Courier services

Walmart

Logistics management

Discount retailing

Motorola

Wireless communication

Cellular phones

Ranbaxy Labs

Reverse engineering

Generic drugs

Honda

Combustion engineering

Motor cycles, cars,

Gujarat Ambuja

Energy management

generators Cement

Cements

Some management scholars feel that core competence has several limitations. It is more useful in explaining why something has gone right or wrong and less useful in predicting what will turn out right or wrong. For instance, the innovation guru Clayton CHRISTENSEN feels that core competence is too internally focused. Instead of asking what they are good at, companies must ask what customers value. Accordingly, they must develop new competencies when circumstances demand, instead of continuing to exploit existing ones. Indeed, Prahalad himself has warned of core competencies becoming core rigidities. A dramatic structural change in an industry can substantially reduce the value of a core competence. That is why it is important to assess the value of a core competency by the benefits it generates for customers rather than the technicalities underlying the core competence. (See also: DIVERSIFICATION)

Core Ideology A term coined by Collins and Porras in their book, Built to Last. Core ideology describes an organization‘s identity that transcends all changes

Corporate GOVERNANCE

67

related to its relevant environment. Core ideology consists of two notions:  Core Purpose — the organization‘s reason for being; and  Core Values — the essential and enduring principles that guide an organization, its behavior and actions. (See also: CORPORATE PURPOSE)

Core Values Core values are the basic or central values of an organization. They serve to guide the company and have a profound influence on how people in that organization think and act. So long as actions are aligned with core values, no external justification is required. These core values define the organization in terms of what it is and what it does, and give the organization a unique identity. In other words, core values provide the glue that holds an organization together. Core values are an organization‘s essential and enduring tenets that should not be compromised for financial gain or short-term expediency. Even during hard times, core values should not be diluted. These values should undergo modification only in the most exceptional situations. (See also: CORE IDEOLOGY, CORPORATE PURPOSE, CULTURE)

Corporate Governance Corporate governance is the subject that deals with the responsibilities of senior managers, directors and shareholders. Directors are expected to safeguard the interests of shareholders by monitoring the actions of managers. But time and again, directors have not been able to impose necessary checks and balances. That explains why boards have come in for sharp criticism and independent directors have become so important. In the United Kingdom, the importance of good corporate governance came into the public domain after a series of corporate collapses and scandals in the 1980s and 1990s. The functioning of boards was criticized and the importance of independent, impartial non-executive directors was highlighted. Following the publication of the CADBURY COMMITTEE REPORT in 1992, a code of best practices was established. Although it is voluntary, all listed companies in UK are expected to comply with it. Since the Cadbury Report, a number of other committees have established best practices in specific areas, such as director‘s pay.

68

Corporate IMAGE

In the US, the Sarbanes Oxley Act 2002 (SOX) was framed to enhance and enforce corporate accountability, transparency and disclosure in all the activities and transactions the company undertakes. SOX requires the CEO and the CFO of a publicly listed company to certify in the annual report that all the disclosures made are accurate and true. In India, too, various codes of corporate governance have been formulated through committees like the Kumara Mangalam Birla committee on corporate governance (2000). This report made various recommendations, both mandatory and non-mandatory, for publicly listed companies with respect to the structure and composition of the board, the audit committee, the remuneration committee, accounting and financial reporting standards, functions of the management and shareholders‘ rights. For instance, a company‘s half-yearly declaration of financial performance, including a summary of the significant events in last six months, must be sent to each shareholder. (See also: AGENCY THEORY)

Corporate Image Corporate image refers to the way the business of an organization is perceived by its investors and customers. A positive corporate image represents a major intangible asset. For example, in India the Tatas have successfully leveraged their positive image both to raise funds and enter various businesses. Corporate image is shaped by an organization‘s history, its beliefs and philosophy, its ownership, its people, the personality of its leaders, its values and its strategies. Public relations play an important role in building a company‘s image by explaining to its stakeholders what the organization stands for. A company‘s advertisements, statements made by its leaders, relations with stakeholders and the website all contribute to image building. The financial community, business community, consumers, other thought leaders, top managers, employees, shareholders and the government must all be kept in mind, while shaping the corporate image.

Corporate Philanthropy The involvement of business firms in charitable activities through contributions in the form of time, money, goods, or services. Corporate phi-

Corporate PURPOSE

69

lanthropy is not merely about spending money. It is also about getting the best returns and the best results for the money spent and involving the larger community, especially NGOs. One of the best examples of corporate philanthropy is the Bill Gates and Melinda Gates Foundation which has taken up various laudable initiatives across the world, especially to improve healthcare in poor countries. (See also: CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY)

Corporate Purpose As defined by Collins and Porras in their book, Built to Last, corporate purpose is the organization‘s fundamental reason for existence. The primary aim of corporate purpose is to guide and inspire the company. The corporate purpose should not be confused with specific goals or business strategies. Two companies could have a very similar purpose but operate in different ways in different businesses. A visionary company continues to pursue, but never really reaches, its purpose. As Walt Disney once remarked, “Disneyland will never be completed as long as there is imagination left in the world.” Unilever‘s corporate purpose states*: 







*

Unilever‘s mission is to add vitality to life. We meet everyday needs for nutrition, hygiene and personal care with brands that help people feel good, look good and get more out of life. Our deep roots in local cultures and markets around the world give us our strong relationship with consumers and are the foundation for our future growth. We will bring our wealth of knowledge and international expertise to the service of local consumers — a truly multilocal multinational. Our long-term success requires a total commitment to exceptional standards of performance and productivity, to working together effectively, and to a willingness to embrace new ideas and learn continuously. To succeed also requires, we believe, the highest standards of corporate behavior towards everyone we work with, the communities we touch, and the environment on which we have an impact.

Adapted from Unilever website.

70

Corporate RENEWAL

(See also: CORE IDEOLOGY, MISSION, VISION)

Corporate Renewal Proactive change management that involves both tightening belts from time to time, and inspiring employees with a powerful vision. Because of organizational inertia and inflexibility, many companies continue to bet on strategies that have worked in the past, taking customers and competitors for granted. Leaders must set stretch targets for their employees and constantly encourage them to question the basic assumptions of the business. At the same time, they must move people in a clear direction through an inspiring vision. Organizations need to renew themselves continuously as the external environment changes. But they often do not do so, persisting zealously with what has succeeded in the past. Managers have a tendency to support structures, systems and decisions that have ensured a company‘s success in the past. This tendency is reinforced by a belief that customers are captive and competitors are weak. Great organizations facilitate renewal by setting stretch targets and articulating a powerful vision that encourages people not to see themselves in terms of the past, but in terms of the future potential. They go beyond the task of ensuring ALIGNMENT of existing resources to providing new challenges. They create organizational disequilibrium. And, most importantly, within the turmoil they are willing to make choices and commitments to new options and opportunities. (See also: CORPORATE RESTRUCTURING)

Corporate Restructuring The various actions involved in realigning the organization in the light of emerging market trends. Over time, as industry structures change and markets evolve, the internal profile of an organization may need a major revamp. This may include a new organizational structure, divestment of unviable businesses, alteration of capital structure, reduction of headcount and outsourcing of non core activities. CHANGE MANAGEMENT is often a key ingredient of corporate restructuring. (See also: CORPORATE RENEWAL)

Corporate VENTURING

71

Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) A concept that a company has a responsibility to the society at large in which it operates. For any medium sized or large company, society is an important stakeholder. Though companies are primarily guided by the profit motive, they cannot act without considering the larger interests of society. Several years ago, the famous economist Milton Friedman argued that the social responsibility of a business is to make profits. Friedman was clear that corporate actions motivated by anything other than shareholder wealth maximization threatened the well being of shareholders. Today that view is considered somewhat extreme. Most businesses accept that they have a responsibility towards society. A responsive corporate social policy may not only enhance a firm‘s long-term viability but also preempt restrictive government regulations. Ardent supporters of CSR argue that, when a company behaves responsibly, there is a direct adverse impact on the bottom line. Some CSR activities do have tangible economic benefits. Expenses incurred on CSR are often tax deductible. Some socially responsible practices such as recycling of water may even generate cost savings and, as a result, increase profits. For example, recycling may reduce input costs and pollution simultaneously. CORPORATE PHILANTHROPY can also lead to intangible benefits such as goodwill. However, there is no guarantee that CSR will automatically lead to an improvement in profitability, especially in the short run. At the same time, there is wide acceptance that CSR will generate a positive impact in the long run.

Corporate Venturing A large firm investing in a smaller but promising venture. Corporate venturing provides an alternative way of generating growth and tapping expertise that would otherwise take time to develop. Corporate venturing enables a company to develop products to expand its core business, to enter new industries or markets, or to develop breakthrough technologies that could substantially change the industry. Corporate venturing can be done by taking a passive, minority position in an outside business, by taking an active interest in an outside company, by building a new business as a stand-alone unit, or by building a new business inside the existing firm but with independent management.

72

Cost LEADERSHIP

Cost Leadership A strategy that focuses on making the firm‘s operations more efficient and cutting costs wherever possible. It may result from scale / scope efficiencies, tight overhead control, careful selection of customers, standardization and automation. Cost leadership aims at achieving the lowest costs in a market. This makes the company best placed to survive a price war or generate the highest margins if a price war does not occur. Gujarat Ambuja Cement has pursued this strategy in the Indian cement industry. The largest retail chain in the world, Wal-Mart also believes in cost leadership. Tata Steel has been a cost leader* in the Indian steel industry. Controlling costs systematically can lead to competitive advantage in industries where price is an important factor. If a company offers a standard product or service at a lower cost when compared to the industry average, the company will earn higher profits. If required, low cost can enable the company to compete on price. It can also generate profits that can be reinvested to improve product quality while charging the same price as the average in the industry. Low cost producers are more likely to survive a price war. If suppliers hike prices, the low cost leader will not be squeezed as much as the other players. The firm‘s low cost position may also act as an entry barrier, particularly if the potential entrant hopes to compete on price. A cost leader can also use price as a weapon to ward off threats from substitute products. There are also some risks associated with the cost leadership strategy: 





*

If the buyer perceives the product to be cheap or of low quality, then the company would have to reduce the price to sell it. In such a case, cost leadership will not lead to superior profitability. Too much focus on costs can lead to the firm losing touch with the changing requirements of its customers. Many routes to a low cost position can be easily copied. Competitors can purchase the most efficient scale of plant. As industries mature, the experience curve effect confers fewer benefits. But perhaps the greatest threat comes from competitors who are able to price at mar-

This term is taken from the book, The Essence of Strategic Management by Clief Bowman, Prentice Hall of India, 1990.

Country RISK

73

ginal cost in one industry because they have other, higher profitearning product lines to recover the fixed costs. (See also: GENERIC STRATEGY, OFFSHORING, OUTSOURCING)

Cost of Capital The cost related to the capital needed to set up and run a business. The capital employed by a firm must yield returns that exceed costs incurred for it to create value for shareholders. So it is important to measure the cost of capital and keep tracking it on an ongoing basis. Debt is a cheaper source of capital compared to equity. Within debt, there are various instruments available. Corporate treasurers must choose the appropriate mix of debt instruments and equity to achieve the targeted cost of capital. (See also: CAPITAL STRUCTURE)

Counterparry A term coined by globalization guru, George Yip, to describe a firm‘s response to a competitive attack in one country by retaliation in another. The retaliation is done in a country where the competitor will be hurt most. To make a counterparry effective, a company needs strong presence in important markets, especially the home countries of its major competitors. Kodak used this strategy against Fuji. (See also: CROSS COUNTRY SUBSIDIZATION, GLOBAL LEVERAGE)

Country of Origin Effect The special preference given by customers to goods produced in certain countries. Japan, for example, symbolizes quality and reliability in consumer electronics business. Similarly, Switzerland represents excellence in watch making, and Germany in precision engineering.

Country Risk The risk associated with a particular country, either because of an investment made there by the firm, a loan given or some other commitment. Understanding and estimating country risk involves the examination of economic, political and geographical factors. Country risk is an important factor to be considered in international business. (See also: POLITICAL RISK)

74

Critical SUCCESS FACTOR ( CSF)

Critical Success Factor (CSF) Those critical areas where things must go right for the firm in order for it to flourish. For example, the ability to attract and retain talented people is a critical success factor for Indian IT services companies such as Infosys, TCS and Satyam. Similarly, the ability to control freight costs is a critical success factor for steel manufacturers. The ability to manage R&D effectively is a critical success factor for global pharma companies like Merck. Supply chain management is a critical success factor for large retail chains.

Cross Country Subsidization Using profits from one country to subsidize losses in other countries. This strategy is closely related to COUNTERPARRY. Global companies, thanks to their presence across countries, have this capability.

Cross Holding The holding of equity shares by companies in each other. In countries like India this is a common practice that enables promoters to retain management control of a company with minimal investment. It also provides opportunities for tunneling, i.e. movement of funds across subsidiaries. Cross holding is considered bad for corporate governance because there is an imbalance between control and cash flow rights. Cross holding also leads to unrelated diversification resulting in unwieldy conglomerates, which often generate less than satisfactory returns for shareholders.

Customer Relationship Management (CRM) Efforts by companies to understand their customers and manage them in the most profitable way. CRM is an age-old concept which has become hot in recent times because of the rise of information technology. CRM aims at improving customer retention, offering differentiated products based on customer needs, smart customer acquisition and reward programs, and better customer service programs. CRM usually employs information technology to manage large amounts of customer data and automate various steps in order to prevent human error. Data collected through CRM enables firms to serve target segments more effectively by tailoring products to closely match customer needs. CRM also provides

Cusumano, MICHAEL

75

data to educate employees, align their incentives, and make a company better placed to profit from evolving market needs.

Customer Switching Costs The costs that tend to tie buyers to their current supplier. These costs tend to be high when a product needs specialized inputs, when the customer has invested a lot of time and energy in learning how to use the product, or when the customer has made special-purpose investments that cannot otherwise be used. Enterprise resource planning (ERP) software falls in this category. (See also: BARRIERS TO ENTRY)

Cusumano, Michael Well known for his work on business strategy, especially in the computer software industry, Cusumano has extensively studied tech companies across the world, including Microsoft, Netscape, and Intel. Based on his research, he has contributed valuable insights on the strategic management of tech companies. Cusumano argues that strategic planning is important even in a fast changing industries such as information technology. The only difference is the planning cycles have to be shorter. Among the ideas for which Cusumano is famous are PLATFORM LEADERSHIP and knowledge transfer across projects.

76

Decision MAKING

D Decision Making Decision making is a key element in strategic management. Good decision making is as much about collecting hard data and doing painstaking analysis as it‘s about behavioral issues. According to Nobel laureate Herbert Simon, decision making takes place in four stages: 

  

Intelligence

involves discovering, identifying and understanding the problem. Design includes identifying and exploring solutions to the problem. Choice means choosing one of the alternatives. Implementation means making the chosen alternative work.

These stages explain how decision making should logically take place. In practice, the influence of various behavioral issues cannot be overlooked. Moreover, the four steps, instead of occurring sequentially, may overlap. And, in many cases, decision making takes place in iterative fashion, accepting things that work and rejecting those that do not. Three key factors that are an impediment to good decisions are information quality, human filters, and resistance to change. Thus, information may not be accurate, complete, consistent or available on a timely basis. Managers have selective attention, various biases and focus on some dimensions of the problem while ignoring others. Last, but not the least, people are resistant to change. So, decisions often tend to be a balancing of the firm‘s various interest groups rather than the most optimal solution. The way people think, both as individuals and in groups, affects the decisions that they make*. Bad decisions take place when the alternatives are not clearly defined; the right information is not collected and the costs and benefits are not accurately weighed. Sometimes the fault

*

Hammond, John S. III, Keeney, Ralph L. and Raiffa, Howard, ―The Hidden Traps in Decision Making‖ Harvard Business Review, 24 June 2006.

Deming, WILLIAM EDWARDS

77

lies not in the decision making process, but in the mind of the decision maker. Managers often do not realize the various traps that exist while taking decisions. Some common traps include: 











The Anchoring Trap:

Managers tend to give disproportionate weight to the first piece of information they receive. The Status quo Trap: People like to maintain the status quo, even when better alternatives exist. The Sunk Cost Trap: Companies often perpetuate the mistakes of the past because they have invested so much in an approach or decision that they find it difficult to alter course. The Confirming Evidence Trap: Managers tend to seek information to support an existing tendency and discount opposing information. The Overconfidence Trap: Most people have an exaggerated belief in their ability to understand situations and predict the future. The Framing Trap: People‘s roles in an organization influence the way problems are framed. So often a problem or situation is incorrectly stated.

Deming, William Edwards

*

An American engineer who is regarded as the founder of total quality management. It was under Deming‘s stewardship that Japan became renowned for producing innovative high quality products. In times, the Japanese have named their premier quality award after him. Deming’s Key Ideas

Deming understood that technology was not enough to tackle quality problems. The people best equipped to resolve such problems were those who worked with the system on a daily basis, and who knew it best. Insights into the system and useful ideas for changing it had to percolate up from the bottom of the organization. So management had to shake up the hierarchy, drive fear out of the workplace and foster the intrinsic motivation of its employees. Deming emphasized the systems approach, namely, the interdependence of all the organizational units that work to accomplish the goals of

*

Adapted from www.wikipedia.org.

78

Deming, WILLIAM EDWARDS

an organization. Strongly opposed to traditional performance appraisal and merit pay, Deming argued that merit rating encouraged short-term performance and undermined long-term planning, built fear, destroyed teamwork and fueled rivalry and politics. Deming argued that pay for performance was intrinsically unfair because it ascribed to the people in a group differences that might actually be caused by the system they were working in. If management did its job well in terms of hiring, developing employees, and keeping the system stable, most employees would perform as well as the system permitted. Deming believed that the desire for achievement was fundamental to human nature. Employees wanted to be given the chance to demonstrate their abilities and exploit their potential. The greatest competitive advantage would accrue to companies that helped employees achieve their full potential. Deming contended that within a stable system, most fluctuations in individual performance over time would be attributable to natural variations in the system. Moreover, it was almost impossible to measure the contribution of a single individual within a system that was subject to the vagaries of numerous other variables. Deming emphasized that by embracing appropriate principles of management, organizations could increase quality and simultaneously reduce costs — by reducing waste, rework, staff attrition and litigation while increasing customer loyalty. The key lay in practicing continual improvement and viewing manufacturing as a system, not as bits and pieces. Principles for Successful Business Transformation

Deming articulated various principles for successful business transformation, some of which are: 





Reduce dependence on mass inspection to achieve quality. Instead, improve the process and build quality into the product in the first place. Build leadership capabilities for managing people, recognizing their unique abilities, capabilities, and aspirations. Leaders should help people, machines, and gadgets do a better job. Drive out fear and build trust so that everyone can work more effectively.

Diamond









79

Break down barriers between departments. Abolish competition and build a win-win system of cooperation within the organization. Eliminate slogans, exhortations, and targets asking for zero defects or new levels of productivity. Such exhortations only create adversarial relationships, as the bulk of the causes of low quality and low productivity lie in the system and thus lie beyond the power of the work force. Remove barriers that rob people of joy in their work. Abolish the annual rating or merit system that ranks people and creates competition and conflict. Involve people at all levels. (See also: TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT)

Demographic Environment Comprises factors such as age, population, immigration, marital status, sex, education, religious affiliations and geographic dispersion. Based on these characteristics, demand forecasts can be made and the market appropriately segmented. Unlike many other trends, demographic trends are generally stable and easy to predict. Also, they are unlikely to change suddenly. So market forecasts can be made with a fair degree of accuracy. One of the important demographic trends of recent times, the ageing of Japan and Europe, for example, has major implications for marketers and pension fund managers. (See also: ENVIRONMENTAL SCANNING)

Devil’s Advocacy A way of improving the decision making process. When a proposal is being discussed, someone can act as a devil‘s advocate and argue why the proposal should not be accepted. By examining the downside, the risks associated with the proposal can be better understood and managed. Creativity guru Edward De Bono calls this black hat thinking. However, if taken too far devil‘s advocacy may be equated with cynicism or obstructionism.

Diamond A term coined by Michael Porter to describe the COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE an industry derives from the national diamond, i.e. four differ-

80

Diamond

ent determinants which are created within the nation state: factor conditions, demand conditions, related and supporting industries, and firm strategy, structure and rivalry. Factor Conditions

Factors can be grouped into a number of broad categories: 

Human Resources:



Physical Resources:

  

the quality, skills and cost of personnel. land, water, mineral or timber deposit, hydro electric power sources, fishing grounds and other physical traits. Knowledge Resources: scientific, technical and market knowledge. Capital Resources: the amount and cost of capital available. Infrastructure: the transportation system, the communications system, mail and parcel delivery, payments or funds transfer, health care, and so on.

A nation‘s firms gain competitive advantage if they possess factors that are significant for competing in a particular industry. Basic factors are either unimportant to national competitive advantage or the advantage they provide for a nation‘s firms is unsustainable. Advanced factors are more significant for competitive advantage. They are scarcer because their development demands large and often sustained investments in both human and physical capital. Generalized factors, such as the highway system, a supply of debt capital, or a pool of well motivated employees with college education support only rudimentary types of competitive advantage. These are usually available in many nations and tend to be more easily nullified, circumvented, or sourced through global corporate networks. Specialized factors involve narrowly skilled personnel, infrastructure with specific properties, knowledge in particular fields, and other factors with relevance to a limited range of industries or even to just a single industry. Specialized factors which provide a more decisive and sustainable bases for competitive advantage require a more focused, and often riskier, private and social investment. The most significant and sustainable competitive advantage results when a nation possesses advanced and specialized factors needed for competing in a particular industry. Nations must also be good at upgrading the needed factors.

Diamond

81

Demand Conditions

The composition of home demand, the size and pattern of growth of home demand, and the mechanisms by which a nation‘s domestic preferences are transmitted to foreign markets shape the rate and character of improvement and innovation by a nation‘s firms. A nation‘s firms are likely to gain competitive advantage in global segments that represent a large or highly visible share of home demand but account for a less significant share in other nations. Small nations can be competitive in segments which represent an important share of local demand but a small share of demand elsewhere, even if the absolute size of the segment is greater in other nations. A nation‘s firms are likely to be globally competitive if domestic buyers are among the world‘s most sophisticated and demanding buyers for the product or service concerned. Such buyers put pressure on local firms to meet high standards in terms of product quality, features and service. A nation‘s firms gain a competitive advantage if the needs of home buyers anticipate those of other nations and become an early indicator of global buyer needs. Related and Supporting Industries

National advantage is also determined by the presence in the nation of supplier industries, or related industries, that are internationally competitive. For example, Japanese machine tool producers draw on the expertise of world-class suppliers of numerical control units, motors and other components. Sweden‘s fabricated steel products (like ball bearings and cutting tools) industry leveraged the country‘s strength in specialty steels. Japan‘s global competitiveness in facsimile machines owed much to the country‘s strength in copiers. The presence of globally competitive suppliers creates advantages in downstream industries in several ways — efficient, early, rapid and sometimes preferential access to the most cost-effective inputs, superior coordination, and faster innovation and upgrading. Competitive advantage emerges from close working relationships between world-class suppliers and the industry.

82

Differentiation

Firm Strategy, Structure and Rivalry

The way in which firms are created, organized and managed as well as the nature of domestic rivalry determine global competitiveness. Nations will tend to succeed globally in industries where management practices and modes of organization prevalent in the country are well suited for generating competitive advantage. Italian firms, for example, are world leaders in a range of fragmented industries, such as lighting, furniture, footwear, woolen fabrics and packaging machines, in which economies of scale are either modest or can be overcome through networks of loosely affiliated companies. Italian companies tend to pursue focus strategies, avoiding standardized products and operate in small niches with their own particular style or customized product variety. These firms do not have depth of management talent. Indeed, they are often dominated by a single individual. Yet these firms can take quick decisions, rapidly develop new products, and adapt to market changes with great flexibility. Competition is possibly the biggest driver of improvisation and innovation. Rivalry increases the pressure to lower costs, improve quality and service, and create new products and processes. Active pressure from rivals stimulates innovation as much from fear of falling behind as the inducement of getting ahead. Intense rivalry also puts pressure on domestic firms to sell abroad in order to grow. Particularly when there are economies of scale, rivalry increases the pressure to globalize. Toughened by intense rivalry, stronger domestic firms also become equipped to succeed abroad. (See also: CLUSTERS)

Differentiation A strategy that lays emphasis on offering a product that is superior, on some dimension(s), compared to what competitors are providing. Differentiation is possible along one or more of various dimensions — product features, quality, customer service, guarantee, distribution, delivery, product customization, etc.

Discovery DRIVEN PLANNING

83

A successful differentiation strategy emphasizes uniqueness in ways that are valued by buyers*. If buyers are willing to pay for these unique features and the firm‘s costs are under control, then the price premium will lead to higher profitability. The CRITICAL SUCCESS FACTOR in differentiation is sound understanding of the buyer‘s needs. A differentiator needs to know what buyers value, deliver that particular bundle of attributes, and charge accordingly. By effectively serving a sub-group of buyers who will not consider other firms‘ offerings as substitutes, the company can effectively lock up the segment. A successful differentiation strategy reduces the head-to-head rivalry witnessed in price based competition. If suppliers raise prices, loyal customers who are not price conscious are more likely to accept the higher price that the differentiator passes on. Customer loyalty also acts as a barrier to new entrants and as a hurdle that potential substitute products have to overcome. However, the differentiation strategy is not without its risks: 







If the basis for differentiation is easily imitated, it will not lead to a sustainable advantage. Rivalry within the industry is the likely to switch to price-based competition. Broad based differentiators may be outmaneuvered by specialist companies who target one particular segment. If the strategy is based on continual product innovation, the company runs the risk of exploiting risky territory merely for followers to exploit the benefits. If a firm ignores the costs of differentiating, the premium prices charged may not lead to superior profits. (See also: GENERIC STRATEGY)

Discovery Driven Planning A term coined by Rita Gunther McGrath and Ian C. MacMillan, it refers to planning in the case of highly uncertain ventures where new data and assumptions are incorporated on an ongoing basis and plans revised on the basis of new information flowing in from the market. This technique can be really useful for a multinational corporation entering an emerging *

Abstracted from The Essence of Strategic Management by Clief Bowman, Prentice Hall of India, 1990.

84

Diseconomies OF SCALE

market. It is also useful in the case of a new technology when it is difficult to make market forecasts based on the past. If past assumptions change, sales and cost projections and also investment plans need to be altered. (See also: STRATEGIC PLANNING)

Diseconomies of Scale Factors which increase unit costs with increasing scale of operations. For example, the costs of coordinating activities tend to be high when the scale of operations is unwieldy. Large firms have many layers of hierarchy. Communication can get distorted as it is typically done through memos, reports or written requests. Worse still, written messages are often impersonal and less motivating than conversation. In small firms, decisions are usually made by the proprietor, or a small group of people at the top. One person taking the decisions ensures coordination of the firm‘s strategy and actions. Large firms are typically organized as business units. Different units may head in different directions. So regular meetings involving senior managers are required to ensure coordination. This drives up costs significantly. While all these coordination and administration costs go up, the scale economies that come as a result of using large plant and equipment may disappear after a certain size. As a result of all these reasons, costs may actually go up as the scale of operations increases beyond a point. (See also: ECONOMIES OF SCALE)

Disruptive Technology A term coined by Clayton CHRISTENSEN to describe a technology that is not only quite different from an existing one but also offers a totally new price-value proposition. A disruptive technology may have fewer features but it may be cheaper and more user friendly. Such a technology tends to attract new customers for whom existing products are either too expensive or too sophisticated. It is often newcomers and not established players who succeed in developing disruptive technologies. For example, the PC was a disruptive technology in relation to mainframe and mini computers. Despite being inferior to a mainframe in terms of performance capabilities, the PC was cheaper and easier to use for most people and led to a

Diversification

85

revolution that put computers on every executive‘s desks and in millions of homes and schools. (See also: INNOVATOR’S DILEMMA, INNOVATION, TECHNOLOGY RISK)

Diversification A strategy that involves going beyond the current line of business into a new one for various reasons:  







Opportunities to grow may be limited in the existing business. What starts out as a technology for one product may soon become a whole family of technologies generating a range of products targeted at different markets. Tired of doing the same type of work, managers may think actively in terms of entering a new business. Diversification may be prompted by the need for vertical integration to get greater control over the value chain. Most tax legislation incorporate incentives for reinvestment of profits. Firms may find it tempting to invest the surplus capital in a taxadvantaged new business.

The strategic challenge in diversification is to determine whether there is a fit between the old and the new businesses. In general, the least risky form of diversification is offering a new product to existing customers. Then comes offering the existing product to a new market. The highest degree of risk is involved while introducing a new product in a new market. Companies which embark on diversification in response to the poor performance of their existing business usually fail. This is because such a diversification tends to be opportunistic rather than strategic and does not take into account the fundamental strengths of the organization. Moreover, if a business is not doing well, it makes more sense to first structure and streamline it rather than take on the added responsibility of a new business. There are numerous instances of both successful and unsuccessful diversification. Among the successful diversified conglomerates are General Electric, Siemens, Hoechst and ICI. On the other hand, there have been some classic failures, like the Ruias of the Essar group in India and Metal Box (India) Ltd.; the latter went into a terminal decline following its ill-advised diversification into bearings.

86

Diversification

In general, the less complex a business is the easier it is to manage it and lower the probability of things going wrong. Highly diversified businesses tend to have more layers of management and more complicated structures and control systems. The top management has to depend on reports, figures and other quantitative data rather than a fundamental understanding of the customers and technology. So before diversifying, a firm must critically examine whether the move can create value for its shareholders that they cannot create on their own by diversifying their investment portfolio. A small checklist is given below: 







 

Core Competencies:

These are the value creating skills which can be extended to new products or markets. A company can create value for its shareholders by leveraging its core competencies. Market Power: By becoming larger through diversification, a business might be able to gather extra market power vis-a-vis competition, buyers, suppliers and substitutes. Sharing of Infrastructure: Infrastructure represents tangible resources such as production facilities. There may be scope to leverage this infrastructure and enter a newer business. Financial Stability: A diversified business portfolio can balance cash flows across businesses effectively. For instance, businesses in growing markets may need more cash than they have while those in mature markets may have more cash than they need. Growth: Diversification can provide opportunities for fast growth. Risk: When different businesses respond differently to economic cycles, diversification can reduce business risk.

Peter Drucker‘s insights on diversification though articulated several years ago, are still useful. The diversified company must have a common core of unity to its businesses. The different businesses, technologies, products and activities could be united within a common market. Alternatively, the markets, products and activities must be linked together by a common technology. In general, market diversification based on common technology is more difficult than technological diversification based on a common market. Expertise in technology can be readily identified and acquired whereas expertise in markets is in the form of tacit knowledge which comes from experience and is rather more difficult to assimilate.

Diversification

87

Under what circumstances does diversification work? Milton Lauenstein* argues that well-managed conglomerates do not tolerate mediocre performance of unit managers. On the other hand, in focused firms the CEO is rarely sacked unless the performance is disastrous. Moreover, well managed conglomerates tend to have a corporate staff who go through the annual budgets and long range plans of the operating units with a microscope. In contrast, directors of a focused company often do not spend enough time going into details. If a conglomerate selects able unit managers, energizes them with a strong corporate purpose, monitors their progress and provides guidance and support when needed, it can outperform the boards of many independent companies. This is exactly what GE, the most successful large diversified company in corporate history, seems to have done under the leadership of Jack Welch. However, diversified corporations must avoid heavy bureaucracy. They must focus on basic governance using a small corporate staff. As Lauenstein puts it: ―If it begins trying to coordinate the activities of various units, it will be drawn into operating management functions. The corporate office will expand and begin making decisions which would be better made by executives in operating units. It then becomes an easy mark for a well managed independent competitor.‖ Lauenstein also points out that in focused firms, the top management‘s role is to understand the industry, make the key operating decisions and run the business. In a conglomerate, the top management must govern, not run operations. Its focus must be on selecting, motivating and mentoring the general managers of individual units. At GE, Jack Welch killed bureaucracy, encouraged innovation and selected extraordinarily talented managers to manage each of the company‘s diverse businesses. Welch was also ruthless with non-performers. In India, JRD Tata successfully built a portfolio of diverse businesses. Even though his management style was quite different, Tata like Welch had the extraordinary knack of selecting some truly outstanding managers to run the different companies. (See also: CONCENTRIC DIVERSIFICATION, CONGLOMERATE DIVERSIFICATION)

*

Lauenstein, Milton C., ―Diversification — The Hidden Explanation of Success,‖ Sloan Management Review, Fall 1985, pp. 49-55.

88

Divestiture

Divestiture A divestiture strategy involves the sale of a business or part of a business for various reasons. One could be its lack of fit with the core business. A second reason could be that the business has entered the decline phase of its life cycle. The third might be an urgent need for cash. A fourth could be government antitrust action when a corporation is perceived to monopolize or unfairly dominate a particular market.

Divisional Structure A type of ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE in which the grouping is done either on the basis of product or geographic segments. The famous Japanese company, Matsushita has been one of the pioneers in the use of the divisional structure, as was General Motors under Alfred Sloan. The idea is to empower managers who have an intimate understanding of the individual businesses. At the same time some functions, such as finance, are centralized and tightly controlled. The divisional structure creates a sharper focus on different market segments. But duplication of functions makes it less efficient, when compared to the functional structure. Moreover, when capabilities — especially knowledge — are spread across divisions, pooling them together for the benefit of the organization as a whole can be a major challenge. (See also: ORGANIZATIONAL DESIGN, ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE)

Downsizing In the face of slowing or declining sales, companies often reduce the size or scope of their business, usually accompanied by a cut in manpower strength. Downsizing can cut costs but it may also result in lower employee morale and a sense of uncertainty across the organization. Creative ways to avoid downsizing include hiring freezes, salary cuts, shortened work weeks, restricted overtime hours, unpaid vacations, and temporary plant closures. When downsizing becomes unavoidable, the aim should be to eliminate non-essential company resources while minimizing the negative impact on the remaining organization. This calls for a frank and free explanation of the circumstances and transparent communication with employees. Due to the negative connotation of the term, companies now often use the term rightsizing.

Drucker, PETER F.

89

Drucker, Peter F. Widely considered the father of modern management, Drucker was arguably the most popular and influential management philosopher of the 20th century. Writer, management consultant and teacher, Drucker highlighted the importance of the corporation as the defining social institution of our time before anyone else did so, and more clearly than anyone else. Drucker‘s contention that management was as decisive a factor in economic growth as capital and labor firmly placed the practice of management as a central factor of economic and growth. Equally, his prolific writings did yeoman service in laying the groundwork for codifying a body of knowledge about management. Drucker published his first book, The End of Economic Man, in 1939. He then joined New York University‘s Graduate Business School as Professor of Management in 1950. In 1971, he became Clarke Professor of Social Science and Management at the Claremont Graduate University in Claremont, California. In 1987 the university named its management school after him. Drucker wrote several books on management, including the landmark The Practice of Management and The Effective Executive. In the former, Drucker introduced the enduring concept of MANAGEMENT BY OBJECTIVES. His other books include Management Challenges for the 21st Century, Managing for Results, Management: Tasks, Responsibilities, Practices, Innovation and Entrepreneurship, The Age of Discontinuity, and The New Realities. Drucker also served as a regular columnist for The Wall Street Journal from 1975 to 1995 and contributed essays and articles to numerous publications, including the Harvard Business Review, The Atlantic Monthly, and The Economist. He served as a consultant to various organizations. Drucker‘s writings cover a wide range of areas. Drucker‘s great strength was his ability to absorb vast amounts of information, to see patterns in what would appear as a jumble of chaotic events, trends, and economic indicators, and to anticipate trends. Though some academics consider Drucker no more than a ―journalist‖, his admirers consider him to be one of the most perceptive observers of all time. Drucker‘s interest in nonprofit organizations was a logical evolution of both his commitment to the importance of organizations and his recognition that many corporations had failed to live up to expectations

90

Due DILIGENCE

in discharging social responsibility. Drucker‘s most compelling argument may be that for capitalism and democracy to survive, society must find a way to mitigate the social costs of a free market economy.

Due Diligence The examination of the books of accounts of a company which has been identified as a takeover target by the acquiring company. Due diligence is important because the financial statements may not tell the complete story. Many skeletons may be hidden in the cupboard by the company being acquired. If these are not taken into consideration, the bidder may end up paying an excessively high price. Due diligence can play an important role in identifying specific problem areas, such as overvalued assets, window dressed financial statements or wrong market projections.

Dynamic Capability Building Strengthening existing capabilities and building new ones smartly in a dynamic environment. John Hagel III and John Seely Brown in their book, The Only Sustainable Edge define capability as the recurring mobilization of tangible and intangible resources for the delivery of distinctive value in excess of cost. They emphasize that companies must take a more dynamic view of capabilities to stay ahead of competitors. Sustainable competitive advantage will ultimately come from a firm‘s institutional capacity to rapidly strengthen its distinctive capabilities and to accelerate learning across enterprise boundaries. As Hagel and Brown put it, ―. . . the primary role of the firm should be to accelerate the knowledge and capability building of its members so that all can create even more value. This perspective broadens managerial attention from the tasks of allocating existing resources to the tasks of deepening knowledge and capability in an increasingly uncertain environment.‖ Hagel and Brown suggest three mechanisms to accelerate capability building: 1. Processes can be outsourced or offshored to gain access to specialized capabilities. 2. Distributed networks of specialized companies can also help in mobilizing resources.

Dynamic SPECIALIZATION

91

3. People with diverse backgrounds and skills can be brought together to solve business problems. (See also: PROCESS NETWORKS, STRATEGIC ALLIANCES)

Dynamic Specialization A term introduced by John Hagel III and John Seely Brown in their book, The Only Sustainable Edge. It implies eliminating resources and activities that no longer act as differentiators and focusing on capabilities that can truly distinguish the firm in the market place. Such firms are more focused, have a greater sense of urgency and are more responsive to the potential threats and opportunities unfolding in their environment. Within the area they choose, firms with dynamic specialization can serve a broader range of customers. Senior executives in such companies have a deeper understanding of the operational details of their business and can therefore encourage and facilitate innovations more effectively. (See also: CORE COMPETENCE)

92

Earnings BEFORE INTEREST AND TAXES (EBIT)

E Earnings Before Interest and Taxes (EBIT) The profits earned by a company before deducting interest and taxes. It is a measure of how profitable the company is, without taking into account the impact of its capital structure and tax planning.

Economic Value Added (EVA) The excess of present value of future cash flows over what is required to service the cost of capital. EVA has become an increasingly popular way of financially evaluating both new and existing business strategies. It can also be used both to identify businesses for disposal and closure and any new acquisition or alliance. EVA is based on cash flows rather than conventional accounting method of profit measurement. Cash flows are a better indicator of the economic worth of a business than are accounting profits which are often distorted by many non-cash adjustments. EVA also takes into account longer-term cash flows whereas accounting profit is by and large shorter term oriented. Also, using EVA it is possible to trade off long and short term cash flows thereby avoiding short-termism in economic valuation of strategic decisions. EVA analysis helps firms to understand how best to increase shareholder value: reinvesting in existing businesses, investing in new businesses, or returning cash to stockholders. By making the cost of capital visible to executives, EVA encourages investment in projects that increase shareholder value. EVA analysis consists of three steps. The income generated by a business is first determined. Then the return required by investors, i.e. the cost of capital is estimated. For some businesses, one cost of capital is sufficient. However, if business units have vastly different situations or levels of risk, separate costs of capital may need to be calculated. The EVA of each business is determined by subtracting the expected return to shareholders from the value created by the firm or business unit.

Emotional INTELLIGENCE

93

Firms with positive EVA generate profits above that expected by shareholders.

Economies of Scale Cost savings that a company can achieve due to a larger scale of operations. When the volume of production increases, the average unit cost tends to decline. In other words, doubling the output results in a less than double the increase in costs, as factor inputs can be used more efficiently. The fixed costs can be spread over many units of output. A large scale of operations can also lead to job specialization and consequently higher labor productivity. Bulk buying may reduce input costs. Larger firms also enjoy a lower cost of capital. Banks may charge lower rates of interest and equity investors may be more willing to accept low dividend yields from bigger firms if they feel a large firm is less risky. (See also: DISECONOMIES OF SCALE)

Economies of Scope Economies of scope arise when a company can reduce the average unit cost for each product by widening the product range. It occurs when highly specialized inputs or expensive infrastructure such as a logistics / distribution network can be shared by different goods. For instance, firms can hire specialist computer programmers, designers and marketing experts, or leverage their skills across the product range, thereby spreading their costs and lowering the average total cost of production of each of the products. FMCG companies such as Unilever and ITC can generate economies of scope by pushing a wide range of products through the existing distribution network.

Emotional Intelligence An increasingly popular concept in leadership, pioneered by Daniel Goleman. There is growing evidence that emotional balance and maturity play a far more critical role than does intelligence per se in the success of professionals in their careers. There are five components of emotional intelligence — selfawareness, self-regulation, personal motivation, empathy, and social skills.

94

End-game STRATEGIES

Self-awareness means having a deep understanding of one‘s emotions, strengths, weaknesses, needs, and drives. Self-regulation means the ability to control one‘s feelings. A high level of personal motivation is another trait of emotionally intelligent leaders. Empathy means a thoughtful consideration of the feelings of employees along with other factors in the process of making intelligent decisions. Social skills imply the ability to develop relationships with people and get the work done. Stephen Covey* has explained the relationship between emotional intelligence and the seven habits of highly effective people as follows. 









Self-awareness:

An awareness of self, of the freedom and power to choose, is the core of Covey‘s habit labeled ―Be proactive”. Human beings are aware of the environmental forces around them and can make wise choices. Self-regulation: This is another way of expressing what Covey calls, ―Put first things first‖ and ―Sharpen the saw‖. People must decide what their priorities are and live by them. They must master what they intend to do, live by their values and constantly renew themselves. Personal Motivation: Personal motivation is the basis for choices. People must decide what their highest priorities, goals and values are. That‘s essentially what Covey‘s mantra ―Begin with the end in mind‖ is all about. Empathy: Empathy is the first half of ―Seek first to understand, then to be understood‖. It‘s learning to understand the viewpoints and emotions of other people and becoming socially sensitive and aware of the situation before attempting to influence others. Social Skills: Covey‘s ―Think win-win‖, ―Seek first to understand, then to be understood‖ help build social skills. (See also: LEADERSHIP, PERSONAL EFFECTIVENESS)

End-game Strategies Plans for dealing with the decline phase of a product or industry life cycle. It is wrongly believed that the only way to respond to declining sales is to cut prices or prune marketing spending. Other options may be *

Covey, Stephen R., The 8th Habit: From Effectiveness to Greatness, The Free Press, 2005.

Enterprise RISK MANAGEMENT (ERM)

95

available to reverse the decline phase and create a new growth trajectory. For example, products can be repositioned, or new market segments identified. (See also: PRODUCT LIFE CYCLE)

Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) Information systems that integrate and automate many of the business processes across the various functions of an organization, such as manufacturing, logistics, distribution, inventory, shipping, invoicing, and accounting. ERP facilitates better control of many business activities, like sales, delivery, billing, production, inventory management, quality management, and human resources management by providing real time information. ERP systems are often called back office systems indicating that customers and the general public are not directly involved, unlike front office systems, such as CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT (CRM) systems that deal directly with the customers.

Enterprise Risk Management (ERM) Enterprise risk management (ERM) involves the identification, measurement and control of various risks an organization faces, in a systematic and integrated manner. In a fast changing environment, business risks are many and diverse. So risk management is becoming an increasingly important discipline. By considering the interrelationships that exist among different risks and all the risk mitigation mechanisms available, risk can be managed more effectively. The essence of ERM is changing the way decisions are made by systematically collecting and processing information. ERM should not be viewed as a defensive tool. Rather, it is about creating conditions which encourage managers to achieve the right balance between minimizing risks and exploiting new opportunities. Indeed, the ultimate aim of ERM is to make available a steady stream of cash flows that can be utilized to maximize shareholders‘ wealth. (See also: RISK)

96

Entrepreneurship

Entrepreneurship Entrepreneurship is the practice of starting a new business. Since many new businesses fail, it is widely believed that entrepreneurship is risky. However, if the risks involved are carefully understood and managed well, there is no reason an entrepreneurial venture cannot succeed. Another point to be noted is that entrepreneurship can also be displayed by professional managers in the way they identify and pursue opportunities. Our understanding of entrepreneurship owes a lot to the work of the famous economist, Joseph Schumpeter. Schumpeter viewed an entrepreneur as a person, willing and able to convert a new idea or invention into a successful innovation. According to Schumpeter, entrepreneurship forces ―creative destruction‖ across markets and industries, creating new products and business models while eliminating inefficient ones. Creative destruction is largely responsible for the dynamism of industries and long-run economic growth. There are different views of entrepreneurship. Entrepreneurs are persons who are willing to put their career and financial security on the line for an idea, spending their time and capital, working on it in an uncertain venture. An entrepreneur can also be described as a person who excels in discovering, evaluating and exploiting opportunities. Another way of viewing an entrepreneur is as ―someone who acts without regard to the resources currently under his control in relentless pursuit of opportunity‖* (Robert Simons).

Environmental Scanning Systematic collection of information about various environmental factors that have an impact on business to identify threats and opportunities and formulate appropriate responses. These include: Political

Political parties in power, anti-trust legislation, regulatory framework, etc.

Economic

Availability of credit, interest rates, inflation, GNP growth rate, etc.

Social

*

Beliefs, attitudes, values, opinions, lifestyles of cus-

Simons, Robert, Leverages of Organization Design, Harvard Business School Press, 2005

Experience CURVE

97

tomers, etc. Technological

Degree of obsolescence, speed of innovation, etc.

Competitive

Market share, breadth of product line, distribution net-

position

work, raw material costs, operational efficiency, R & D capabilities, etc.

Customer

Geographic, demographic, psychographic segmenta-

profile

tion, consumer behavior, etc.

Understanding the environment is the starting point of strategic planning. There are three ways of scanning the business environment. Adhoc scanning involves short term, infrequent examinations, often in response to a crisis. Regular scanning involves studies done according to a regular schedule. Continuous scanning involves structured data collection on an ongoing basis and processing with respect to a wide range of environmental factors. In today‘s turbulent business environment, continuous scanning is necessary to enable firms to act quickly, take advantage of opportunities before competitors do, and respond to threats effectively. (See also: SWOT ANALYSIS)

Experience Curve As companies accumulate experience, people learn to do their jobs more efficiently and effectively because of accumulated learning. So costs come down significantly over time. That puts the firm in a position to cut price and further expand the market. One strategy which firms can pursue is to start with a relatively high price and bring down the price progressively over time. (See also: BARRIERS TO ENTRY)

98

Fayol, HENRI (1841-1925)

F Fayol, Henri (1841-1925) A French management pioneer who focused on the problems of organizational structure within large firms at the turn of the last century. Whereas his contemporary, F. W. Taylor, concentrated on efficiency of shop-floor labor, Fayol looked at senior management. Fayol played a key role in developing the concepts of CHAIN OF COMMAND, ORGANIZATIONAL CHART, and SPAN OF CONTROL.

First Mover Advantage The COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE realized by a company by entering a market first. First movers are usually better placed to reap economies of scale, to reduce costs through cumulative learning, to establish brand names and customer relationships, to control distribution channels and to obtain the best locations for facilities or the best sources of inputs. The danger with the first mover strategy is that the company may end up creating a market which may be better exploited by a later entrant offering a superior product. First mover strategies seem to work best when both technology and market conditions remain reasonably steady, economies of scale are significant and customers are conservative about switching suppliers. When both technology and market are changing rapidly, later entrants have ample opportunities to uproot the first mover. As Michael PORTER* has mentioned, to succeed first movers must correctly anticipate industry changes. American companies were early entrants into electronic watches. However, they bet heavily on light emitting diode (LED) displays. This technology proved inferior to liquid crystal displays (LCD) for less expensive watches and traditional (analog) displays combined with quartz movements for watches in higher price ranges. The introduction of LCD and quartz enabled Japanese firms to become industry leaders in watches targeted at the mass market. *

The Competitive Advantage of Nations, The Free Press, 1990.

Five FORCES MODEL

99

Often the wise strategy is to be an early mover, not necessarily the first mover. Just like in a marathon race, a company can be in the front but not necessarily at the top of the pack. That way it can learn from the first mover and yet move fast when necessary and reach the winning line. The global software giant Microsoft has succeeded by pursuing this kind of a strategy in many of its markets. (See also: FREE RIDER)

Five Forces Model Probably the most widely used tool in business strategy which helps analyze the attractiveness of an industry. It can be seen as one of two dimensions in maximizing corporate value creation. The other dimension, value creation is how well a company performs relative to its competitors. Here the VALUE CHAIN framework and the COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE concept, both developed by Porter come in handy. The five forces are: 









Barriers to Entry:

The barriers to entry are high or low, depending upon factors such as economies of scale, brand image, capital requirements, access to distribution channels, government policies, etc. Higher the barriers to entry, the more attractive the industry. Bargaining Power of Buyers: This is influenced by buyer volume, buyer information, buyer profits, substitute products available, etc. The lower the bargaining power of buyers, the more attractive the industry. Bargaining Power of Suppliers: This is affected by various factors such as switching costs, differentiation of inputs, supplier concentration, presence of substitute inputs, threat of forward / backward integration, etc. The lower the bargaining power of suppliers, the more attractive the industry. Threat of Substitutes: The threat of substitutes is high if there are alternative products with lower prices or better performance parameters for the same purpose. The lower the threat of substitutes, the more attractive the industry. Rivalry: This refers to the intensity of competition among existing players in an industry. Competition among existing players is likely to be high when there exists a large number of companies, slow market growth, high fixed costs, and high exit barriers. The lower the degree of rivalry, the more attractive the industry.

100

Flat ORGANIZATION

Some scholars argue that the model emphasizes an outside-in approach and underemphasizes the importance of the (existing) strengths of the organization (inside-out). That is the main argument behind a competing school of strategy, RESOURCE BASED THEORIES. Notwithstanding this criticism, the five forces model remains a conceptually elegant way of analyzing the structural attractiveness of an industry. (See: BARRIERS TO ENTRY, BARGAINING POWER OF BUYERS, BARGAINING POWER OF SUPPLIERS, INDUSTRY, THREAT OF SUBSTITUTES, RIVALRY)

Flat Organization An organization with only a few layers of management between the highest and the lowest levels. It presents a stark contrast to the classic hierarchical organization which has several layers of managers, each of whom supervises a lower layer. The basic premise behind the flat organization is that trained, empowered workers with assigned goals, who are encouraged to work innovatively, will be more productive than workers who are closely supervised by managers. A flat organization is more transparent, less bureaucratic and improves communication. One problem with a flat organization is that opportunities for career advancement may be limited. (See: ORGANIZATIONAL DESIGN, SPAN OF CONTROL)

Focus A strategy which believes in concentrating on a small segment defined either in terms of customer segment or geographical territory. A focus strategy means carefully choosing the arena to compete in and narrowing the competitive scope. By selecting carefully*a segment and meeting the needs of that segment better than can competitors who target more broadly defined segments, companies can gain competitive advantage. A focus strategy takes advantage of the differences between the target segments and other segments in the industry. It is these differences that result in a segment being poorly served by the broad-scope competitor. The firm that focuses on cost may be able to outperform the broad-based firm through its ability to strip out frills not valued by the segment. Al*

This term is taken from the book The Essence of Strategic Management by Cliff Bowman, Prentice Hall of India, 1990.

Force FIELD ANALYSIS

101

ternatively, the product or service itself can be differentiated taking into account the unique needs of a segment. The obvious danger with the focus strategy is that the target segment may shrink or disappear over time for some reason. A new player may ―outfocus‖ the firm. Alternatively, shifting from broad to narrow targeting usually means a dramatic reduction in volumes. This can raise unit costs if the overheads have not been trimmed to match the smaller outputs demanded by the narrower customer base. (See also: GENERIC STRATEGY)

Follett, Mary Parker One of the earliest and strongest advocates of collaborative, participative approaches to management and cross-functional problem solving. Follett argued that true authority and leadership were a function of the knowledge and experience of people, not their rank in a corporate hierarchy. If Taylor was the father of scientific management, Follett pioneered a behavioral, post-scientific approach to managing human organizations. She pioneered ideas such as constructive conflict resolution, participative management, and flatter organizations. According to Follett, the proper response to conflict was ―integration‖ of different points of view to reflect multiple viewpoints. Collaboration and cooperation with labor, she argued, were the only rational ways to run a business. Follett can be considered an early advocate of organizational learning through she never used those words explicitly.

Force Field Analysis Developed by Kurt Lewin, force field analysis is a useful technique for diagnosing situations, especially when planning and implementing a change management program. In any situation, both driving and restraining forces operate. Take the example of productivity. Driving forces include pressure from a supervisor, incentive earnings, and competition. Restraining forces may include apathy, hostility, and poor maintenance of equipment. Equilibrium is reached when the sum of the driving forces equals the sum of the restraining forces. The level of productivity can be raised, or lowered, by changing the balance between the driving and restraining forces. Suppose a new man-

102

Forward INTEGRATION

ager takes over a work group in which productivity is high but the maintenance of equipment has been ignored. The earlier manager had increased the driving forces to increase output in the short run. By doing this, however, new restraining forces developed, such as machine breakdown. When the new manager takes charge, the restraining forces may have begun to increase, resulting in repeated breakdowns and frequent maintenance. The new manager now faces a new equilibrium at a significantly lower productivity. The new manager may decide not to increase the driving forces but to reduce the restraining forces by spending more time on maintenance and modernization. In the short run, output will tend to come down still further. In the long run, however, the new driving forces will move the plant towards a higher level of output. Managers often have to strike the right balance between short term and long term goals to ensure sustained performance in the long run. The force field analysis is a useful framework for doing so.

Forward Integration Forward integration means moving into downstream activities, i.e. getting closer to customers. Such a strategy can help a firm to differentiate its product more effectively by controlling a larger number of elements of the value chain. For example, forward integration into retailing can allow the firm to control areas such as customer interactions, store ambience, etc. Forward integration can also solve the problem of access to distribution channels. Forward integration can help a company understand the market better. Since the forward stage determines the size and composition of demand for the upstream stages of production, the firm can determine the demand for its products quicker. The firm might also gain first hand information about market trends and competitive developments. This can be very useful in an environment of cyclical, erratic and changing demand. Forward integration may also allow prices to be better matched to market conditions. By setting different prices for different customers, forward integration may facilitate higher overall price realization. (See also: VERTICAL INTEGRATION)

Functional STRATEGY

103

Franchise A business in which one entity (the franchisee) operates a business in conformance to the name, logos and trading method of an existing, successful business (the franchiser). Various restrictions may be placed on the franchisee in terms of facility design, inputs used, processes and the training of manpower. A franchising arrangement enables the franchiser to avoid heavy investments and penetrate a new geographic region quickly. For the franchisee, the risks are limited. The trading strategy and methods have been tried and tested elsewhere. The franchiser‘s name and logos may have wide customer recognition and loyalty, ensuring adequate demand for the product or service from day one. (See also: LICENSING)

Free Rider A player who moves into an industry later, after learning from the experiences of the first mover and avoiding similar mistakes. Sometimes, it does not make sense to be the first mover. In the Internet browser market for instance, Netscape moved first but it was Microsoft which ultimately turned out to be the winner. (See also: FIRST MOVER ADVANTAGE).

Full Costing A budgeted method which attempts to allocate all costs incurred in an organization to various cost centers. Both direct and indirect costs are considered and the possibility of losses by under pricing is avoided. Direct labor and material costs can be easily allocated to an activity or a product. Some direct overheads may also be easy to allocate. But indirect overheads cannot be allocated easily. An example of full costing would be allocating 35 per cent of the overhead cost of rent to the machine shop if it occupies 35 per cent of the factory space. ACTIVITY BASED COSTING (ABC) is a better technique for allocating overheads. ABC would look at the actual pattern of usage of the machine shop, instead of just going by the space occupied.

Functional Strategy Strategies pursued by various individual functions such as marketing, finance, operations and human resources. Functional strategies facilitate

104

Functional STRUCTURE

the implementation of corporate strategy in the sub-units of a company and must be aligned with the long-term corporate strategy. Thus, functional strategies in marketing may deal with product, price, place and promotion. Those in finance may deal with capital mobilization, capital allocation, cash flow management, working capital management, etc. Those in operations may be concerned with facilities, purchasing, operations planning and control. Human resources strategies span employee recruitment, selection and orientation, career development and counseling, performance evaluation, compensation, labor relations, etc. (See also: OPERATING STRATEGIES)

Functional Structure A type of ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE wherein the managers of each major function — such as marketing, production, research and development, and finance — report to the chief executive, who provides overall direction and coordination. The same logic can be extended to sub functions. In a functionally organized marketing department, for example, the managers of various marketing functions, such as sales, advertising, marketing research, and product planning, report to the marketing manager. A functional structure emphasizes specialization and increases efficiency. But such a structure lacks the overall perspective and the sharper market focus which the divisional structure can bring. Functions often work in silos and do not leverage the knowledge and expertise available in the organization, creating serious problems in activities, such as new product development, which need excellent coordination across functions. Such problems have led to the concept of crossfunctional teams.

Generic STRATEGY

105

G Game Theory A branch of applied mathematics that is useful in analyzing situations where players choose different actions in an attempt to maximize their returns. First developed as a tool for understanding economic behavior, game theory is now used in many diverse fields, including biology, psychology, sociology and philosophy. Game theory is relevant in strategy formulation in that it studies decisions under circumstances where various players interact. In other words, game theory studies choice of optimal behavior when costs and benefits of each option are not fixed, but depend upon the choices exercised by other individuals. Porter‘s competitive strategy seems to draw heavily from game theory. (See also: COMPETITIVE STRATEGY, OLIGOPOLY)

Garbage In, Garbage Out A concept which holds that the quality of inputs into any process determines the quality of output. If incorrect data is entered for processing, the output will be garbled. Similarly, if incompetent people are recruited, the organization will under-perform.

Generic Strategy A concept associated with Michael Porter, which holds that a company must be committed to one of three generic strategies in order to compete effectively in the market place: 

Cost Leadership:

Here the firm lays great emphasis on improving its cost competitiveness. Cost leadership is facilitated by efficient-scale facilities, tight overhead control, careful selection of customers and standardization of activities. Gujarat Ambuja has pursued this strategy in the Indian cement industry. Maruti has done the same in the Indian car industry. The largest retail chain in the world, Wal-Mart is also a cost leader. So is Dell in the context of the global PC industry.

106

Ghoshal, SUMANTRA

Differentiation:

A business strategy which attaches more importance to providing value to customers in some unique way, that competitors cannot easily imitate. Different methods can be employed to achieve differentiation: design or brand image, technology, features, and customer service. In the process of differentiation, the firm cannot afford to ignore costs. But cost cutting is not the primary focus here. The emphasis is on creating unique value and charging a premium for it. A good example is Mercedes Benz.  Focus: A means of gaining competitive advantage by concentrating on one particular aspect of a product / service / market / geographic region that is important to a particular type of customer. In this way, a firm can be more effective than the other players in that chosen segment. (See also: COST LEADERSHIP, DIFFERENTIATION, FOCUS, COMPETITIVE STRATEGY) 

Ghoshal, Sumantra One of the best-known management gurus of our times, Ghoshal graduated from Delhi University and worked for Indian Oil Corporation, rising through the management ranks before moving to the United States on a Fulbright Fellowship in 1981. There, he produced simultaneously two Ph.D. dissertations at the MIT Sloan School of Management and then at Harvard Business School. He joined INSEAD Business School in France and later moved to the London Business School. His book, Managing Across Borders: The Transnational Solution, coauthored with Christopher Bartlett, is considered as one of the most influential management books ever written and has been translated into nine languages. Ghoshal‘s extensive research for the book led to the conclusion that global companies need to combine three capabilities — global standardization to cut costs, local customization where necessary to suit the needs of national markets, and knowledge sharing across business units. Ghoshal is also well known for his PURPOSE-PROCESS-PEOPLE DOCTRINE. Instead of concentrating on strategy, structure and systems, top management must articulate a purpose, redefine management processes and show a high degree of commitment to the development of people.

Global LEVERAGE

107

Global Corporations An organization with a global network of subsidiaries across the world. When used in the strict sense of the term, a global company is one which emphasizes uniform products and policies across the world. It does not take into account the need to customize its products and services to suit the needs of specific markets. In contrast, a multinational corporation (MNC) lays great emphasis on being sensitive and responsive to differences in national environments around the world. An MNC is organized as a portfolio of several national entities. Operations in different countries are managed on a stand-alone basis, without any serious attempts to integrate them. Till recently, the Dutch multinational, Philips, followed this model. Unilever is another good example. The problem in MNCs is that the firm may lose valuable opportunities for cutting costs, improving efficiency and leveraging organizational knowledge due to weak global integration. According to GHOSHAL and BARTLETT, today‘s business environment demands both global standardization and local customization, giving rise to a new breed of MNCs called the transnational corporation. Such a company strikes the right balance by standardizing those activities where scale and efficiency are important and customizing where responsiveness to customer needs is the priority. (See also: GLOBALIZATION)

Global Industry An industry in which strategic moves in one country have to be made after taking into account their global implications. Typically, these are industries where there are significant economies of scale and the need for local customization is minimal. In a global industry, the strategic positions of competitors in major markets are fundamentally affected by their overall global positions and firms have to coordinate their activities worldwide to emerge as global leaders. (See also: GLOBAL VALUE CHAIN CONFIGURATION, MULTI DOMESTIC INDUSTRY)

Global Leverage The advantage a global corporation is able to realize due to scale efficiencies, co-ordination and integration of worldwide operations, and the ability to transfer good ideas and best practices across the world. For

108

Global VALUE CHAIN CONFIGUR ATION

example, a GLOBAL CORPORATION can defend itself against an attack by a competitor in its home country with a counter attack in the competitor‘s home country. A global company can also leverage its world wide pool of talent and capabilities. Global leverage results when cost and strategic advantages are combined. (See also: COMPARATIVE ADVANTAGE, STRATEGIC ADVANTAGE)

Global Value Chain Configuration A highly sophisticated and well-coordinated approach to global value chain management. Firms can be in business only if the activities they perform add value for their customers. If they can add value efficiently and effectively and charge a price which is more than the total cost of the activities, they can make a profit. The value chain, a concept developed by Michael PORTER, is a useful tool for analyzing the value adding activities of a company. While the value chain is important for all companies, in the case of global companies it becomes critical. This is because global companies must carefully locate different activities in different countries to optimize the effectiveness of the value chain as a whole. Global value chain configuration increases competitive leverage by helping a company access global resources and capabilities. In a multi domestic company, each subsidiary‘s competitive position is determined locally. On the other hand, by taking an integrated view of their worldwide activities, global companies are better equipped not only to cut costs but also to generate value. At the same time, managing a network of activities spread across the world poses major challenges. (See also: COMPARATIVE ADVANTAGE, GLOBAL LEVERAGE, PROCESS NETWORKS, STRATEGIC ADVANTAGE, VALUE CHAIN)

Globalization A very commonly used term, globalization can mean different things to different people. At a broad level, globalization refers to the growing economic interdependence among countries, reflected in the increasing cross border flow of goods, services, capital and technical know how. The booming business process outsourcing (BPO) business in India is a reflection of this trend. At the level of a specific company, it refers to the degree to which competitive position is determined by the ability to lev-

Globalization

109

erage physical and intangible resources and market opportunities across countries. There are a number of factors driving globalization. More and more countries across the world are embracing free market philosophy and dismantling trade barriers. Better and cost effective ways of communication are making the world a smaller place. Due to the heavy R&D costs involved in developing new products, the pressure is increasing on companies to look for global markets to quickly recoup their investments. Satellite television is playing an important role in creating global markets by promoting uniform tastes among customers across the world. Globalization has created major opportunities for poor countries. In the past, poor countries remained poor and rich countries remained rich for generations. Now societies can develop skills and wealth in a much shorter time. In less than 40 years, Singapore went from developing country to developed country status. Taiwan and South Korea are also good examples. Globalization has leveled the playing ground for smaller companies. What matters in the global economy is not simply size; it is other intangible factors such as nimbleness, reputation and the ability to innovate. At the same time, the more global we become, the more tribal is our behavior. John Naisbitt, author of Global Paradox, has argued that the more we become economically interdependent, the more we become possessive about our core basic identity. Fearing globalization and, by implication, the imposition of a western (predominantly American) culture, many countries have become paranoid about preserving their distinctiveness and identity. Typically, in the process of globalization of companies evolves through distinct stages. In the first stage, companies normally tend to focus on their domestic markets. They develop and strengthen their capabilities in some core areas. In the second stage, companies begin to look at overseas markets more seriously but the orientation remains predominantly domestic. The various options a company has in this stage are exports, setting up warehouses abroad and establishing assembly lines in major markets. The company gets a better understanding of overseas markets at low risk, but without committing large amounts of resources.

110

Goals

In the third stage, the commitment to overseas markets increases. The company begins to take into account the differences across various markets to customize its products suitably. Different strategies are formed for different markets to maximize customer responsiveness. The company may set up overseas R&D centers and full-fledged country or region specific manufacturing facilities. This phase can be referred to as the multinational or multi-domestic phase. The different subsidiaries largely remain independent of each other and there is little coordination among the different units in the system. Finally, the transnational corporation emerges. Here, the company takes into account both similarities and differences across different markets. Some activities are standardized across the globe, while others are customized to suit the needs of individual markets. The firm attempts to combine global efficiencies, local responsiveness and sharing of knowledge across different subsidiaries. A seamless network of subsidiaries across the world emerges. It is very difficult to make out where the home country or headquarters is. (See also: COMPARATIVE ADVANTAGE, GLOBAL LEVERAGE, STRATEGIC ADVANTAGE)

Goals Goals represent desired future states of organizations. Goals should not be confused with objectives. Since goals represent the end state, they are more long term oriented. Objectives represent the building blocks of the goal and are more short term oriented. (See also: LONG TERM OBJECTIVES)

Golden Handcuffs Golden handcuffs refer to deferred compensation, incentives and attractive retirement plans to boost employee loyalty and motivation levels especially among senior level positions. Retaining good employees has become one of the major concerns of any organization and golden handcuffs is one way of doing so. A good example is employee stock options. (See also: GOLDEN HELLO, GOLDEN KEY)

Govindarajan, VIJAY

111

Golden Handshake Refers to a large cash sum, part of which may be tax free, paid to employees who are forced to leave before the end of a service contract. It is a method to reduce the number of employees in the organization and reduce salary expenses.

Golden Hello A payment made to a senior executive as an incentive to join a company. This payment is meant to compensate for the benefits forgone by leaving the previous employer and for the additional risks the executive is taking.

Golden Key The key, which unlocks golden handcuffs, in order to pay off people not thought to be worth keeping. (See also: GOLDEN HANDCUFFS)

Golden Parachute A provision that enables senior managers to exit from a company with handsome separation packages in case of events such as a hostile takeover.

Govindarajan, Vijay Well known for his pioneering book, Strategic Cost Management coauthored with John K Shank. Govindarajan has also done cutting-edge work in the areas of learning, innovation and globalization. His most recent book, Ten Rules for Strategic Innovators — From Idea to Execution co-authored with Chris Trimble in 2005, provides a blueprint for business innovation. (See also: STRATEGIC COST MANAGEMENT, STRATEGIC INNOVATION)

112

Handy, CHARLES

H Handy, Charles One of the most respected gurus in business history, Handy was one of the first to forecast the rise of outsourcing and a decline in the numbers of people employed as permanent workers. He is also the author of many business books, notably Understanding Organizations and Inside Organizations.

Hedgehog Principle A term coined by Jim Collins in his book, Good to Great. The fox knows many things, but the hedgehog knows only one big thing, namely survival. This principle avers that a company should be like a hedgehog, not like a fox. In this context, a company must answer three questions: (a) What can we be the best in the world at? (b) What can we be passionate about? (c) What is our one economic driver? Thinking like a hedgehog can help to bring a lot of focus into a company‘s plans and thinking.

Herfindahl Index A measure of how concentrated an industry is, or how intense is the rivalry within it. The Herfindahl index is calculated as:

where s is the market share of firm i in the market, and n is the number of firms. The Herfindahl Index (H) has a value that is always smaller than one. A small index value indicates intense competition with no dominant

Herzberg, FREDERICK

113

players. If all firms have an equal share, the reciprocal of the index shows the number of firms in the industry. When firms have unequal shares, the reciprocal of the index indicates the ―equivalent‖ number of firms in the industry. The major benefit of the Herfindahl index, compared to the CONCENTRATION RATIO is that it gives more weight to larger firms because of the squaring. Take, for instance, two cases in which the six largest firms produce 90% of the output: We will assume that the remaining 10% of output is divided among 10 equally sized producers. 

Case 1:



Case 2:

All six firms produce 15%. One firm produces 80% while the five others produce 2%

each. The six-firm CONCENTRATION RATIO would equal 90% in both cases, but in the first case competition would be fierce while in the second case we have a monopoly for all practical purposes. The Herfindahl index captures this important information. In case 1, H = 0.1350 and in case 2, H = 0.6420. (See also: OLIGOPOLY)

Herzberg, Frederick Well-known for his two-factor theory of job satisfaction. According to Herzberg, every organization has a set of hygiene factors like working conditions, salary, etc. The absence of hygiene factors creates employee dissatisfaction but their presence does not improve satisfaction. Herzberg found five factors in particular that were strong determinants of job satisfaction: achievement, recognition, the work itself, responsibility and advancement. Motivators (satisfiers) are associated with a long-term positive impact on job performance. In contrast, hygiene factors produce only short-term changes in job attitudes and performance which quickly fall back to their previous level. Although Herzberg has been criticized for drawing conclusions about workers as a whole based on a study of accountants and engineers, his theory has proved very robust. Many firms have successfully put his methods into practice. Part of the reason for the popularity of his theory is that Herzberg has offered a practical approach to improving motiva-

114

Hierarchical ORGANIZATION

tion through job enrichment by redesigning workplaces and work systems. (See also: MOTIVATION)

Hierarchical Organization A traditional organization in which authority flows from the person in charge through various levels of supervision, while information and requests for approval travel upward through the same channels. As the size of operations increases, top managers become the bottlenecks. Today, many business organizations are trying to become flat by delegating considerable decision making to lower levels of management. This delegation is facilitated by information technology and better methods of communication that make it possible to operate with much wider spans of control than was possible earlier. (See also: BUREAUCRACY, FLAT ORGANIZATION)

Hostile Bid A bid for taking over a company despite resistance by the takeover target. Hostile bids can lead to acrimony, a war of words and unpleasant situations where sentiments run high and unreasonably high bids often get made. Another problem with hostile bids is that key employees may feel unhappy. Hostile bids are particularly avoidable in high tech industries, where acquisitions are often made to get access to a ready pool of talent. (See also: ANTI-TAKEOVER STRATEGY)

Human Capital The degree of skill and training embodied in labor as a factor of production. The value of human capital can be increased by careful recruitment and investment, typically in education and training. Human capital is a major asset in knowledge based industries such as computer software and pharmaceuticals.

Hygiene Factors Elements of the work environment that have the potential to cause dissatisfaction, if not adequately provided. These include salary and working conditions. These aspects are taken for granted. By providing them,

Hygiene FACTORS

115

motivation levels will not increase. But if they are not provided, employees will be unhappy. (See also: HERZBERG, FREDERICK, MOTIVATION)

116

Independent DIRECTOR

I Independent Director An outside, or non-executive, director who does not have interests that affect the exercise of independent judgment while taking decisions on behalf of the company. A sufficiently large number of independent directors on the board is considered desirable from the point of view of corporate governance. In the US, institutions like New York Stock Exchange and the Securities and Exchange Commission have prescribed various tests of independence. But independence alone does not guarantee good corporate governance. Many of the American companies which collapsed at the turn of the 20th century, including Enron, had a large proportion of independent directors. The real issue is the willingness and ability of independent directors to impose checks and balances on a company‘s top managers. That calls for both competence and the right mental predisposition. (See also: CORPORATE GOVERNANCE)

Industry A collection of firms that offer similar products or services, namely products that customers perceive to be direct alternatives for one another*. A strategically distinct industry encompasses products where the sources of competitive advantage are similar. Many discussions of competition are based on very broad industry definitions, which are not meaningful definitions because the nature of competition and the sources of competitive advantage vary a great deal within them. Consider a firm in the PC industry. Does the industry include printers? Color monitors? Modems? These are the kinds of questions that executives face in defining industry boundaries.

*

Porter, Michael E., The Competitive Advantage of Nations, The Free Press, 1990.

Industry

117

Defining industry boundaries enables executives to determine the arena in which their firm is competing, and the key success factors — and address some important questions:   



Which part of the industry corresponds to the firm‘s goals? What are the key success factors in that part of the industry? Does the firm have the skills needed to compete effectively? If not, can it build those skills? Does the company have the skills to exploit emerging opportunities and counter future threats?

The industry structure may change over time because of the following reasons: 









 



Demand patterns may change due to demographic factors, changes in lifestyle, tastes, social conditions, substitutes, complementary products, market penetration, product innovation, etc. New buyer segments may emerge while existing segments may disappear. As buyers become more knowledgeable, the scope for differentiation reduces and products tend to become commodities. The uncertainties with regard to technology, buyer segments, industry growth and industry size may reduce over time. Simultaneously, there is a great degree of imitation as successful strategies are imitated and failed ones abandoned. Because of diffusion of knowledge, proprietary advantages tend to erode over time. The rate of diffusion of proprietary technology, however, depends on the particular industry. Accumulation of experience can often result in declining unit costs. An early mover may be able to reap significant benefits. Changes in cost or quality of inputs can affect industry structure. Product innovations can expand the market, promote industry growth and create opportunities for product differentiation. They can also create mobility barriers. Marketing innovations can influence industry structure. New advertising media and distribution channels can facilitate the targeting of new customers and increase the scope for differentiation. Sometimes, marketing innovations may also cut costs drastically.

118

Industry SHAKEOUT

Process innovations may influence the economies of scale, proportion of fixed costs and the degree of vertical integration. This can make the industry more or less capital intensive.  Changes in suppliers and customers‘ industries can result in changes in industry structure. (See also: BLUE OCEAN STRATEGY, FIVE FORCES MODEL, INDUSTRY SHAKEOUT, VALUE INNOVATION) 

Industry Shakeout A discontinuity or turning point, as the industry goes through a major upheaval. Some of the greatest risks which companies face are during times when an industry is witnessing a shakeout. George S Day* has provided some useful insights on industry shakeouts. Day refers to two kinds of shakeout: the boom-and-bust syndrome, and the seismic-shift syndrome. The boom-and-bust syndrome typically applies to emerging markets and cyclical businesses. The dot com industry in the late 1990s is a good example. During the boom, many companies entered the industry leading to excess capacity. As competition intensified and prices fell, many players found the going tough. The successful companies focused on operational excellence and cut costs ruthlessly. The seismic-shift syndrome is more applicable to mature industries. Such industries enjoy prosperity for years together in a protected environment, with minimal competition and decent margins. A seismic shift takes place when these factors disappear. Deregulation, globalization and technological discontinuities are some of the factors that can cause a seismic shift. A good example is the pharmaceutical industry before the emergence of managed health care. In a physician driven environment, price was not an important factor. Physicians did not hesitate to prescribe expensive medicines which drug companies gleefully marketed. The emergence of health maintenance organizations† (HMOs) has reduced the importance of physicians. HMOs recommend the use of ge*

Day, George S., ―Strategies for Surviving a Shakeout,‖ Harvard Business Review, March-April 1997, pp. 92-102. †

Health maintenance organizations provide health insurance coverage through hospitals, doctors, and other providers with which the HMO has a contract.

Industry SHAKEOUT

119

nerics wherever possible and control costs wherever they can. Drug companies are struggling to adjust to this new environment. Managers need to develop antennae that can sense a shakeout before their competitors do so. SCENARIO PLANNING can focus attention on change drivers and force the management team to imagine operating in markets which may bear little resemblance to the existing ones. Studying other markets which have already seen a shakeout, and which are similar in terms of structure and are susceptible to the same triggers, can also be of great help. Examining how the same industry is evolving in other countries and regions can also provide useful insights. Day refers to survivors from a boom and bust shakeout as adaptive survivors and those from a seismic shift syndrome as aggressive amalgamators. Adaptive survivors impose discipline in operations and respond efficiently to customer needs and competitor threats. Dell is a good example of an adaptive survivor. During the initial shakeout in the PC industry in the 1980s, Dell survived due to its lean build-to-order direct selling model. In the early 1990s, Dell stumbled when it entered the retail segment and its notebook computers failed to get customer acceptance. Founder Michael Dell did not hesitate to make sweeping changes in the organization. He put in place a team of senior industry executives to complement his intuitive and entrepreneurial style of management. Dell became the largest manufacturer of PCs in the world, emerging as an adaptive survivor in an industry, which saw the exit of several players. Aggressive amalgamators show an uncanny ability to develop the right business model for an evolving industry. They usually make one or more of the following moves: rapidly acquire and absorb smaller rivals, cut operating costs and invest in technologies that increase the minimum scale required for efficient operations. Mittal Steel is a good example. The company‘s appetite for acquisitions and global consolidation is legendary. For companies which find it difficult to become adaptive survivors or aggressive amalgamators, there are alternative strategies to survive a shakeout. These include becoming niche players, joining hands with other small players through strategic alliances, and, finally, selling out and getting the best price possible. (See also: STRATEGIC INFLECTION POINT)

120

Innovation

Innovation ―The effort to create purposeful focused change in an enterprise‘s economic or social potential‖ (Peter Drucker). The most effective way to compete in a changing environment is to churn out new products and services rapidly according to the needs of the market. Innovation helps a company to stay ahead of the pack and move into less crowded areas. No wonder increasing attention is now being paid to innovation in today‘s era of global competition. Very often innovation is misunderstood as invention. Invention is creating new things. But innovation is all about taking new ideas to the market place. History is full of examples of many companies that developed a new technology or product but failed to take it to the market. For example, Xerox developed many of the concepts associated with the modern day PC but failed to make a commercial proposition out of them. Innovation must begin with an analysis of opportunities in a systematic and organized way. The starting point in innovation is identifying the scope for improvement with respect to customers, suppliers, and internal processes. Innovations must be market focused. Opportunities to innovate are provided by:  

 

New customer segments which are just emerging; Customer segments that existing competitors are neglecting or not serving well; New customer needs which are emerging; and New ways of producing and delivering products to customers.

In his book Innovation and Entrepreneurship, Drucker has listed seven sources of opportunity for innovative organizations. Four are internal to the enterprise and three external. In order of increasing difficulty and uncertainty, they are as follows: Unexpected Success or Failure

Understanding the reasons for the unexpected success or failure of a product generates opportunities to innovate. Take the case of IBM which wanted to sell accounting machines to banks but discovered that it were libraries that wanted to buy them. IBM‘s Univac, designed for advanced scientific work, became popular in business applications such as payroll.

Innovation

121

Unexpected product failures can also give companies new ideas that may help them to come up with something that the market likes. Incongruity between What Actually Happens and What was Supposed to Happen

If things are not happening as they should, there is scope to innovate. For example, in industries which are growing but where margins are falling, there is tremendous potential for innovation. Similarly, when companies continue to work at improving something in order to reduce costs but fail to do so, an innovator can look at other options to cut costs. This is exactly how container ships emerged — by focusing on the ship‘s turnaround time rather than its fuel efficiency. Deficiencies in a Process That are Taken for Granted

If a process is inefficient or suffers from a big gap, there is scope to innovate. Sometimes a process that is widely used may have certain deficiencies. By thinking out of the box, an innovator may come up with a new idea that removes this deficiency. Pilkington‘s float glass manufacturing process, for example, paved the way for the development of glass with a smooth finish. Changes in Industry or Market Structure That Catch Everyone by Surprise

The emergence of new, fast-growing segments provides scope for innovators to serve their needs. The success of the small floppy disk drive manufacturers had much to do with the emergence of new customer segments who wanted smaller and lighter disk drives. According to Drucker*, ―New opportunities rarely fit the way the industry has always approached the market, defined it, or organized to serve it. Innovators therefore have a good chance of being left alone for a long time.‖ Demographic Changes

Demographic changes result in new wants and new lifestyles that call for new products. The Japanese pioneered robotics because they anticipated *

Drucker, Peter F., ―The Discipline of Innovation‖, Harvard Business Review, November-December 1998, pp. 149-157.

122

Innovator’s DILEMMA

the rising levels of education and the consequent shortage of blue-collar workers. In recent years, the ageing of Japan and Europe has put pressure on governments there to control health care expenses. This has fuelled the rise of generic drugs. Demographic changes provide innovation opportunities that are the most rewarding and the least risky, as such trends are easier to predict. Changes in Perception

New needs can be created by changing the common perception of people. For example, a booming industry has emerged for exercise and jogging equipment by capitalizing on people‘s concern for health and fitness. Changes Brought About by New Knowledge

New knowledge can be used to develop innovative products. Innovations of this sort usually combine many sorts of knowledge. The development of the computer, for example, was facilitated by a combination of binary arithmetic, calculating machine, punch card, audion tube, symbolic logic and programming. Such innovations are also risky because there is usually a gap between the emergence of new knowledge and its conversion into usable technology and another gap before the product is launched in the market. Drucker has underlined*, ―Contrary to almost universal belief, new knowledge is not the most reliable or most predictable source of successful innovations. For all the visibility, glamour and importance of science-based innovation, it is actually the least reliable and least predictable one.‖ (See also: INNOVATOR’S DILEMMA)

Innovator’s Dilemma A term coined by the innovation guru, Clayton Christensen. Many successful companies fail not because they neglect customers but because they take them too seriously and continue to pamper them by adding more features. An excessive focus on satisfying existing customers prevents the current market leaders from creating new markets and from *

Drucker, Peter F., Innovation and Entrepreneurship, Harper Business Publications, 1986.

Intrapreneurship

123

finding new customers for the products of the future. In the process of adding new features to please existing customers, the product or service becomes overpriced, going beyond the reach of customers who might be looking for a simpler, cheaper product. According to Christensen, many successful companies face the innovator‘s dilemma. Keeping close to existing customers may make sense in the short run. But long term growth and profitability need a totally different approach. When successful players are not prepared to embrace a new business model, they lose market share to more nimble or entrepreneurial companies, which are not encumbered by any baggage. For example, when PCs entered the market, they were not superior to minicomputers. But mini computer manufacturers like Digital Equipment lost market share rapidly when standalone workstations and networked desktop computers emerged and successfully targeted a totally new customer segment. (See also: CHRISTENSEN, CLAYTON M., INNOVATION)

Institutional Investor A financial institution with shareholdings in listed companies. Institutional investors include pension funds, investment trusts, mutual funds (or unit trusts), insurance companies and banks managing investment portfolios for clients. Institutional investors across the world play an increasingly important role in equity markets. Through the buying and selling decisions they make, institutional investors not only move markets but also have an impact on corporate governance. (See also: CORPORATE GOVERNANCE)

Intrapreneurship Intrapreneurship is the practice of developing entrepreneurial skills and approaches by or within a company. In companies which encourage intrapreneurship, employees are encouraged to behave as entrepreneurs by being given enough freedom and resources to experiment with new ideas. (See also: ENTREPRENEURSHIP)

124

Japanese STYLE OF MANAGEMENT

J Japanese Style of Management The success of Japanese companies in the 1970s and 1980s drew world‗s the attention towards their management practices. In many ways, the Japanese style of management is different from the western style. and has various distinctive elements: A long term perspective in which establishing a strong market position is more important than short-term profit.  A highly educated, highly trained workforce that is encouraged and empowered to improve production methods and quality.  Lean production, eliminating wastage of materials and time.  Continuous improvement.  Decision making by consensus. (See also: KAIZEN, KANBAN, LEAN THINKING, MCKINSEY 7-S FRAMEWORK) 

Joint Venture A joint venture involves two or more parties coming together to undertake an economic activity. The parties typically agree to create a new entity together by jointly contributing equity capital and share the revenues and expenses. The venture can be only for one specific project, or for a continuing business relationship. Multinationals often enter emerging markets by forming joint ventures. Such an arrangement not only helps them to benefit from the expertise of the local partner in managing the local environment but also minimizes risk, especially political risk. (See also: POLITICAL RISK, STRATEGIC ALLIANCE)

Judo Strategy A term coined by David Yoffie of Harvard Business School judo strategy effectively means avoiding direct confrontation and leveraging the strength of the opponent to create space for oneself. Judo strategy can help small companies enter new markets and defeat stronger rivals.

Just–IN-TIME

125

Through speed, flexibility, and leverage, new players can occupy uncontested ground and turn the strengths of dominant players against them. Consider Netscape, which was set up in 1994 and became the hottest company in the tech world. Netscape‘s flagship product, the Navigator Web browser, dominated its market from day one. And Netscape made a highly successful IPO in August 1995, just sixteen months after its founding. But Netscape‘s fall was equally spectacular and precipitous when it decided in favor of a head-to-head confrontation with Microsoft. In late 1995, Microsoft launched aggressive moves against Netscape. Under relentless attack, Navigator‘s market share soon began an irreversible decline. By the end of the decade, Microsoft had started to dominate the browser business and Netscape survived only as a division of AOL. In contrast, Palm Computing which first shipped the Pilot, a handheld electronic organizer in April 1996, succeeded for much longer by avoiding head-to-head battles with entrenched leaders. In many competitive battles the answer is not to oppose strength with strength, as Netscape ruinously chose to do. Instead, the challenger should study the competition carefully, avoid head-to-head battles and use the opponent‘s strength to its advantage. This is the essence of judo strategy. Challengers can be at a severe disadvantage when entering a market where a powerful incumbent holds sway. Judo strategy can come in handy in such circumstances.

Just–in-Time See LEAN MANUFACTURING.

126

Kaizen

K Kaizen A Japanese term meaning continuous improvement. In the 1960s, Japanese car makers were far behind their Western counterparts in quality. Through slow but ongoing improvements in their manufacturing techniques, the Japanese improved their quality and operational efficiency and became global leaders in various industries. The basic thinking behind Kaizen is that small, ongoing improvements over a period of time, can lead to a significant competitive advantage. (See also: JAPANESE STYLE OF MANAGEMENT, LEAN MANUFACTURING)

Kanban A technique for controlling the flow of inventory through a manufacturing system, which is closely linked to the just-in-time system. The term in Japanese means a card or signal. In its simplest form, the technique may be viewed as a card used by operators for instructing their suppliers to provide more material. Kanban ―pulls‖ inventory through the manufacturing process and forms the core of a just-in-time production system. (See also: JAPANESE STYLE OF MANAGEMENT)

Kaplan and Norton

Robert S. Kaplan* and David P. Norton† are famous for developing the ‡ BALANCED SCORECARD in 1992. They emphasize the importance of not focusing over much on financial measures of performance. Instead, the balanced score card has four perspectives:

*

Robert Kaplan is the Marvin Bower Professor of Leadership Development at Harvard Business School. † ‡

David Norton is a cofounder, president, and CEO of BSCol.

Kaplan, R. S. and Norton, D. P., Balanced Scorecard: Translating Strategy into Action, Harvard Business School Press, 1996.

Khanna, TARUN

   

127

Customer perspective; Process perspective; Innovation and learning perspective; Financial perspective.

The main idea of the balanced scorecard is that one needs to measure and manage all of these indicators in a balanced way instead of focusing solely on financial performance. Kaplan and Norton have also developed the concept of ACTIVITY BASED COSTING.

Keiretsu A form of organization in Japan in which a group of companies work closely together, effectively becoming a vertically integrated enterprise. The companies may be held together by cross-ownership, long term business dealings, directorship on each other‘s board, as well as social ties. These vertical ties improve trust and facilitate the smooth flow of goods and services across the different entities of a Keiretsu. In recent times, as companies have restructured themselves and tried to become leaner and more focused, Kirietsu ties in Japan have weakened, while arm‘s length market based relationships have become stronger. (See also: VERTICAL INTEGRATION)

Kepner-Tregoe* Matrix A structured methodology for identifying and ranking all factors critical to a decision. The aim is to minimize the influence of conscious and unconscious biases. This methodology can be applied to nearly all decisions, ranging from product marketing to selection of the site for a new plant. The analysis helps in evaluating alternative courses of action and optimizing the ultimate results based on explicit objectives.

Khanna, Tarun A professor at the Harvard Business School who has done extensive research in corporate strategy, focusing particularly on business houses *

Kepner-Tregoe provides consulting and training services to organizations throughout the world. Kepner-Tregoe specializes in using systematic process approaches to resolve business issues and achieve peak people and project performance.

128

Knowing -Doing GAP

and conglomerates in emerging markets. He seeks to understand how to build world-class companies from emerging markets worldwide. Much of his work is focused on China and India, and involves identifying best practices for local entrepreneurs and multinationals operating in each of these two countries. Khanna‘s work has been published extensively in academic journals, including the Journal of Finance, the European Economic Review, the Strategic Management Journal, the Academy of Management Journal, Organization Science and Management Science. He has also been profiled in newsmagazines around the world, including The Wall Street Journal, The Economist, the Far Eastern Economic Review, and numerous newspapers in China, India and elsewhere in Asia and Latin America. He has been a frequent commentator on China and India and has featured on several television programs. Khanna‘s two articles written jointly with another Harvard Business School professor, Krishna Palepu, ―The Right Way to Restructure Conglomerates in Emerging Markets‖ and ―Why Focused Strategies May Be Wrong for Emerging Markets‖ are widely cited in all strategy literature. (See also: PALEPU, KRISHNA G.)

Knowing-Doing Gap A concept which holds that knowing amounts to little without doing. According to Jeffrey Pfeffer and Robert Sutton, who teach at Stanford, the gap between knowing and doing is more important than the gap between ignorance and knowing. Today there are entities such as consulting firms who specialize in collecting and disseminating knowledge about management practices. Knowledge workers are also mobile and move from one organization to another. So better ways of doing things cannot remain secret for long. In most cases, however, the knowledge that is successfully transferred in various ways is not used for taking action. According to Pfeffer and Sutton, the ability to minimize the knowing-doing gap is the defining characteristic of well managed companies. (See also: WILLPOWER)

Knowledge MANAGEMENT (KM)

129

Knowledge Management (KM) A discipline which is becoming increasingly important in today‘s knowledge economy. It refers to the retention, exploitation and sharing of knowledge in an organization in order to generate sustainable competitive advantage. The crux of knowledge management is the leveraging of knowledge which resides in individuals for the benefit of the organization as a whole. The biggest challenges arise in the case of tacit knowledge which is often difficult to extract from individuals. KM has to strike the right balance between information technology and human intervention. The key to effective KM is to get into an action mode by actually using knowledge to create value. This calls for embedding knowledge into business processes wherever possible. KM really takes off when knowledge flows in as and when knowledge workers need it. While many sophisticated KM tools are available today, the key to successful KM is an enabling culture that encourages learning and knowledge sharing. (See also: BIAS FOR ACTION, KNOWING-DOING GAP)

130

Lateral THINKING

L Lateral Thinking Lateral thinking, a term coined by the Maltese psychologist Edward de Bono, effectively means solving problems by approaching them indirectly from diverse angles instead of concentrating on any one approach at length. Lateral thinking involves reasoning that is not immediately obvious and ideas that may not be obtainable by using only traditional step-by-step logic. Lateral thinking also implies shifting of thinking patterns away from entrenched or predictable thinking to new, or unexpected, ideas. (See also: BRAINSTORMING, INNOVATION)

Law of Conservation of Profits A principle coined by Clayton CHRISTENSEN of Harvard Business School which holds that the total profit along an industry value chain does not change. What happens is that profit moves along the value chain. Some parts of the value chain become more attractive and others less so over time as both technology and markets undergo a change. Smart companies understand the industry dynamics and occupy the sweet spot on the value chain. This is the place where there is still scope to improve the performance of the product or service, differentiate it from competitors, and charge a premium. In the PC industry, for example, Microsoft and Intel have occupied sweet spots on the value chain. They have kept coming up with improved versions of their products (software and chips, respectively) and the market buys them as they deliver enhanced features and better performance. (See also: VALUE MIGRATION)

Law of Unintended Consequences Things do not often happen the way we expect them to. Leaders frame policies with good intentions but at the end of the day, the consequences of these policies are very often unintended. Leaders should appreciate

Law OF UNINTENDED CONSEQ UENCES

131

this when they take a decision or frame a policy. A few examples will illustrate the point. One of the most important decisions in corporate finance relates to capital structure. Managers often prefer equity to debt as equity is perceived to be less risky. Debt involves mandatory principal and interest payments. In the case of equity, on the other hand, there is no compulsion to pay dividends. And rarely, if ever, is equity capital (except for small portions which are bought back) returned to investors. But as equity is less risky, managers tend to take things easy and do not use the capital efficiently, often landing the company in trouble. Indeed, this is why many dotcoms folded up in the early 2000s. On the other hand, because debt is more risky companies tend to be more careful with the debt they raise. Consequently, debt often brings in quite a bit of discipline and leads to better financial performance. Inventory is another good example. Managers routinely keep inventory as a buffer against uncertainty. Inventory comes in handy if a supplier is late in delivering parts or delivers defective parts, or if a machine in the plant breaks down. In just-in-time (JIT) production systems, very little inventory is maintained. The entire plant comes to a stand still if something goes wrong. So it is potentially risky. But companies like Toyota are aware of the possible consequences of things going wrong in a JIT system. So they make sure that suppliers always make delivery in time, always maintain quality and ensure all the machines are maintained well. On the other hand, in companies which hold a lot of inventory, quality control tends to be slack, vendor management highly ineffective and maintenance of machines very poor. In other words, holding inventory undermines the effectiveness of the plant. Instead of acting as a buffer, the inventory creates problems. In short, decisions have to be made after carefully considering various implications. Things give a certain appearance on the surface but, deep down, matters could be different. If the deeper issues are overlooked, the most logical decisions will lead to unintended consequences. (See also: DECISION MAKING)

132

Leadership

Leadership A much discussed and widely written about term. A good definition of leadership is offered by W. C. H. Prentice* in his 1961 article in Harvard Business Review: ―Leadership is the accomplishment of a goal through the direction of human assistants. The man who successfully marshals his human collaborators to achieve particular ends is a leader. A great leader is one who can do so day after day and year after year in a wide variety of circumstances.‖ According to Stephen COVEY, ―Leadership is communicating people‘s worth and potential so clearly that they come to see it in themselves. People must feel an intrinsic sense of worth — that is, that they have intrinsic value — totally apart from being compared to others and that they are worthy of unconditional love, regardless of behavior or performance. Then when you communicate their potential and create opportunities to develop and use it, you are building on a solid foundation.‖ † As Covey points out that various leadership theories emerged in the twentieth century. One of the early theories was the Great-Man theory of leadership which dominated any discussion of leadership prior to 1900. History and social institutions are shaped by the leadership of great men and women. Dowd (1936) maintained that there is nothing like leadership by the masses. Individuals in every society possess different degrees of intelligence, energy, and moral force. They are always led by the superior few. Leaders are endowed with superior traits and characteristics that differentiate them from followers. Research of trait theories addresses the following two questions: 1. What traits distinguish leaders from other people? 2. What is the extent of those differences? According to the situational theories, leadership is the product of situational demands. Situational factors rather than a person‘s heritage determine who will emerge as a leader. The emergence of a great leader is *

W.C.H. Prentice is a former president of Bryant and Stratton Business Institutes in Buffalo, New York, former president of Wheaton College in Norton, Massachusetts, and a former dean of Swarthmore College in Swarthmore, Pennsylvania. † Covey, Stephen R., The 8th Habit: From Effectiveness to Greatness, The Free Press, 2004.

Leadership

133

the result of time, place and circumstances. Later, theorists began to place a strong emphasis on situational and environmental factors. Subsequently, theories of integration have been developed around persons and situations, psychoanalysis, role attainment, change, goals and contingencies. Robert J. House* and Terence R. Mitchell† describe four styles of leadership‡: 







Supportive Leadership:

The leader believes in considering the needs of his followers, showing concern for their welfare and creating a friendly working environment. The leader focuses on increasing the self-esteem of people and making their jobs more interesting. This approach works best when the work is stressful, boring or hazardous. Directive Leadership: A directive leader tells followers what needs to be done and gives them appropriate guidance along the way, often including schedules of specific work to be done at specific times. Rewards may also be increased as needed and role ambiguity reduced. Such an approach may be used when the task is unstructured and complex, and the follower is inexperienced. Participative Leadership: Consulting with followers and taking their ideas into account when making decisions and taking particular actions. This approach works best when the followers are experts, their advice is needed and they want to give it. Achievement Oriented Leadership: Setting challenging goals, both in work and in self-improvement. High standards are demonstrated and expected. The leader shows faith in the capabilities of the follower. This approach works best when the task is complex.

*

Robert J. House is a professor of management at the Wharton School of the University of Pennsylvania, formerly of University of Toronto. His expertise lies in the area of leadership, †

Terence R. Mitchell is currently professor of Management & Organization in UW Business School. ‡

House, R.J., Mitchell, T.R., ―A Path-Goal Theory of Leadership‖, Journal of Contemporary Business, Vol. 3, 1974, pp. 81-97.

134

Leadership

According to Daniel Goleman*, executives use six leadership styles†. styles†. The most effective leaders switch flexibly from one style to another, depending on the circumstances. 1. Coercive leaders pursue a top down high handed approach and are the least effective in most situations. The extreme top down decision making kills new ideas. People don‗t feel respected. Their sense of responsibility evaporates. Unable to act on their own initiative, they lose their sense of ownership and feel little accountability for their performance. The coercive style should be used only with extreme caution and in the few situations when it is absolutely imperative, such as during a turnaround or when a hostile takeover is looming. 2. Authoritative leaders mobilize and motivate people by making it clear to them how their work fits into a larger vision for the organization. When the leader gives performance feedback, the main criterion is whether or not that performance furthers the vision. The standards for success are clear to all. Authoritative leaders give people the freedom to innovate, experiment, and take calculated risks. The authoritative style tends to work well in many business situations but fails when the team consists of experts or peers who are more experienced than the leader. 3. Affiliative leaders create emotional bonds and harmony, strive to keep employees happy and to increase loyalty by building strong emotional bonds. Affiliative leaders give people the freedom to do their job in the way they think is most effective. Affiliative leaders are likely to take the people who report to them out for a meal or a drink, to see how they‘re doing. They will take out the time to celebrate a group accomplishment. They are natural relationship builders. The affiliative style is effective in many situations but it is particularly suitable when trying to build team harmony, increase morale, improve communication, or repair broken trust. One problem with the affiliative style is that because of its exclusive focus on praise, employees may perceive that mediocrity is tolerated. And because affiliative leaders rarely offer constructive advice

*

A world renowned expert in the area of Emotional Intelligence. He has written the international best-seller book ―Emotional Intelligence‖. †

Goleman, Daniel., ―Leadership That Gets Results‖, Harvard Business Review, March-April 2000, pp. 78-90.

Leadership

135

on how to improve, employees must figure out how to do so on their own. 4. Democratic leaders build consensus through participation and increase flexibility and responsibility by letting workers themselves have a say in decisions that affect their goals and how they do their work. By listening to employee‘s concerns, the democratic leaders learn what to do to keep morale high. People have a say in setting their goals and performance evaluation criteria. So they tend to be very realistic about what can and cannot be accomplished. But the democratic style can lead to endless meetings and postponement of crucial decisions in the hope that sufficient discussion and debate will eventually yield a great outcome. The democratic style does not make sense when employees are neither competent nor informed enough to offer sound advice. Such an approach also does not make sense during a crisis. 5. Pace-setting leaders expect excellence and self-direction and set extremely high performance standards. They are obsessive about doing things better and faster, and demand the same from everyone around them. If poor performers don‘t rise to the occasion, these leaders do not hesitate to replace them with people who can. The pacesetter‘s demands for excellence can overwhelm employees and their morale drops. Such leaders also give no feedback on how people are doing. They jump in to take over when they think people are lagging. When they leave, people feel directionless as they‘re so used to ―the expert‖ setting the rules. 6. Coaching leaders develop people for the future. They help employees identify their unique strengths and weaknesses and consider their personal and career aspirations. They encourage employees to establish long-term development goals and help them conceptualize a plan for attaining them. Coaching leaders excel at delegating, give employees challenging assignments, are willing to put up with short-term failure, and focus primarily on personal development. When employees know their boss watches them and cares about what they do, they feel free to experiment. People know what is expected of them and how their work fits into a larger vision or strategy. The coaching style works particularly well when employees are already aware of their weaknesses and would like to improve their performance. By contrast, the coaching style makes little sense when employees, for whatever reason, are resistant to learning or changing their ways. And it fails if the leader is inept at coaching.

136

Lean MANUFACTURING

In his book Good to Great Jim Collins has introduced the concept of Level 5 leadership. This represents the highest level of leadership, and is exhibited by an individual who blends humility with intense professional will. Level 5 leaders are typically modest, talk little about themselves and like to talk more about the company and the contributions of other executives. The Level 5 leader sits on top of a hierarchy of capabilities. Four other layers lie below. Individuals do not need to proceed sequentially through each level of the hierarchy to reach the top, but to be a full-fledged Level 5 leader requires the capabilities of all the lower levels, plus the special characteristics of Level 5. Level 5 leaders are also good at changing their style of leadership from situation to situation. Thus, they can be extremely democratic at times. On other occasions, they can be authoritative. Level 5 leaders are very particular about the quality of people in their team. People in such organizations are selfdriven and the CEO does not have to spend much time trying to motivate them. (See also: EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE, PERSONAL EFFECTIVENESS)

Lean Manufacturing A management philosophy which focuses on reduction of the seven wastes (over-production, waiting time, transportation, processing, inventory, motion and scrap) in manufactured products. By eliminating waste (muda), quality is improved, production time is reduced and cost is lowered. Lean ―tools‖ include constant process analysis (KAIZEN), ―pull‖ production (KANBAN) and mistake-proofing (POKA YOKE). Lean manufacturing is relentlessly focused on eliminating inventory. The key lean manufacturing principles include:



— quest for zero defects, revealing and solving problems at the source. Waste Minimization — eliminating all activities that do not add value and safety nets, maximize use of scarce resources (capital, people and land).



Continuous Improvement



Pull Processing



Perfect First-time Quality

— reducing costs, improving quality, increasing productivity and information sharing. — pulling products from the consumer end, not pushing from the production end.

Lean THINKING

137

— producing different mixes or greater diversity of products quickly, without sacrificing efficiency at lower volumes of production.



Flexibility



Long Term Relationship with Suppliers

— building and maintaining a long term relationship with suppliers through collaborative risk sharing, cost sharing and information sharing arrangements.

Lean Thinking Lean thinking is a broader concept compared to lean manufacturing. It is basically about getting the right things, to the right place, at the right time, in the right quantity while minimizing waste and waiting time and being flexible and open to change. A term coined by James P. Womack and Daniel T. Jones, lean thinking provides a way to specify value, sequence value-creating actions in the best way, conducting such activities without interruption whenever someone requests them, and performing them more and more effectively. Lean thinking means doing more and more with fewer and fewer resources while providing customers with exactly what they want. Lean thinking is the antidote to muda. Muda means ―waste‖, specifically any human activity which absorbs resources but creates no value:    





Mistakes which require rectification; Production of items no one wants; Processing steps which aren‘t actually needed; Movement of employees and transport of goods from one place to another without any purpose; Groups of people remaining idle because an upstream activity has not delivered on time; Goods and services which don‘t meet the needs of the customer.

Lean thinking also improves job satisfaction by providing immediate feedback to employees on their efforts to convert muda into value. Unlike process reengineering, it provides a way of creating new work rather than simply downsizing in the name of efficiency.

138

Licensing

Licensing Licensing involves the transfer of some intellectual property right from the licensor to a licensee. The right could be a patent, trademark, or technical know-how for which the licensee pays a royalty. Multinational companies often use licensing to lower the risk of entry into foreign markets. Licensing is also a handy tool for companies which want to focus managerial efforts on intangible assets such as design and brands and outsource other non core activities. Two major problems exist with licensing. One is the possibility that the partner will gain experience and become a major competitor over time. The other is that the licensor may lose control on production, marketing and general distribution of its products. So a key success factor is how the licensing agreement should be structured and implemented carefully. A special form of licensing is franchising, which allows the franchisee to sell a product or service using the principal‘s brand name or trademark in conformance with policies and guidelines laid down by the franchiser. The franchisee pays a fee to the parent company, typically based on the volume of sales of a defined market area. (See also: FRANCHISE)

Long Term Objectives These are the objectives a firm would like to achieve in the long run in terms of profitability, productivity, competitive position, employee development, employee relations, technological leadership and public responsibility. Long term objectives should be carefully framed, consistent with the company‘s mission, understandable to employees and acceptable to them, flexible enough to be modified in the light of changes in the environment and measurable. To be able to motivate employees, these objectives should be challenging but not impossible to achieve. The performance evaluation criteria should be made clear. (See also: GOALS, STRATEGIC PLANNING)

Loss Leader A product sold at or below cost in the hope of generating sales of other profitable items. The method is most commonly used in retailing. Thus, a store may heavily advertise a loss leader in order to entice customers.

Loss LEADER

139

The hope is that customers will probably buy other, full-priced items as well. The term loss leader can also be used to describe a manufacturer who prices a lead item low, knowing that the usage of the item requires further, full-priced purchases.

140

MBO (MANAGEMENT BY OBJEC TIVES)

M MBO (Management By Objectives) Peter Drucker first started popularizing the term management by objectives in 1954, in his book, The Practice of Management. It involves setting objectives and then breaking them down into more specific goals, or key result areas. MBO is a systematic and organized approach that allows management to focus on achievable goals and to attain the best possible results from available resources. The principle behind MBO is to make sure that employees have a clear understanding of the aims, or objectives, of the organization, as well as awareness of their own roles and responsibilities in achieving those objectives. But in recent years, this style of management has been receiving some criticism. It has been reported that MBO triggers unethical employee behavior of distorting the system or financial figures to achieve the targets set by their short-term, narrow bottom-line, and completely self-centered thinking*.

Managerial Grid Model Managerial grid is a management and leadership tool introduced in 1964 by Robert R. Blake and Jane S. Mouton. The grid evaluates managers on two dimensions: 1. The task function, or concern for production. 2. The relation function, or Concern for People.

*

Castellano, Joseph F.; Kenneth Rosenzweig, and Harper A. Roehm (Summer, 2004). How corporate culture impacts unethical distortion of financial numbers: managing by Objectives and Results could be counterproductive and contribute to a climate that may lead to distortion of the system, manipulation of accounting figures, and, ultimately, unethical behavior, Management Accounting Quarterly. Retrieved on 13 November 2006. ** Blake, R. and Mouton, J., The Managerial Grid: The Key to Leadership Excellence. Houston: Gulf Publishing Co., 1964.

Market DEFENSE

141

As shown in the figure, the model is represented as a grid with concern for production as the X-axis and concern for people as the Y-axis. Each axis ranges from 1 (Low) to 9 (High). The grid comprises a 9 x 9 matrix, capturing 81 different leadership styles, e.g. country club management, team management, organizational management, impoverished management, and authority-obedience management, etc. The five major leadership styles are:  The impoverished style (1.1)  The country club style (1.9)  The produce or perish style (9.1)  The middle-of-the-road style (5.5)  The team style (9.9). (See also: LEADERSHIP)

Market Defense Strategic moves that attempt to minimize or deter threatening actions by existing or potential competitors.

142

Market FOR CORPORATE CONTROL

Deterrence strategies include: 

Signaling intentions to defend;



Building barriers to entry or mobility; and



Reducing market attractiveness by lowering prices.

If challengers cannot be deterred, then market defense moves can attempt to contain them and minimize the damage. (See also: MARKET SIGNALS)

Market for Corporate Control This refers to the market where mergers and acquisitions take place. A well functioning market for corporate control puts pressure on managements to perform since failure to perform results in takeover bids. In countries like USA, where the financial system and legal framework are well developed, this market functions very effectively. Hostile takeovers are quite common. But in many parts of the world, including Europe, due to the intervention of the government / regulatory authorities, the market for corporate control does not function very efficiently.

Marketing Mix How a firm implements its marketing strategy. Also known as the four Ps:   



Product (including range of pack sizes and / or flavors or colors); Price (long-term pricing strategy and pricing method); Place (choosing distribution channels and seeking shop distribution); and Promotion (branding, advertising, packing and sales promotions).

The relative importance of the different Ps is highly contextual. A company must arrive at the optimum marketing mix to strengthen its competitive position. In the case of services, three more Ps can be added — people, process, physical evidence. This leads to the 7 Ps of marketing.

Market Power The degree to which a firm exercises control over its market. Wal-Mart, for instance, has considerable market power which it leverages while

Market SIGNALS

143

negotiating with suppliers. In India, Hindustan Lever has a similar advantage while dealing with distributors and dealers.

Market Signals Market signal refers to an action by a competitor that provides an indication of its intentions, motives, goals or internal situation. Market signals may be a bluff, or warning, or an expression of earnest commitment. Correct interpretation of market signals is important to compete effectively. Michael PORTER has given an excellent account of market signals in his book, Competitive Strategy: 

A player can make a prior announcement of its moves to preempt competition, to threaten a competitor who is going ahead with an earlier planned move, or to elicit competitor reaction.



A firm can announce sales figures, addition to plant capacity, etc., to influence the behavior of other firms. Often misleading data may also be announced as part of a preemptive strategy.



A firm may openly discuss the industry, demand and price forecasts, future capacity projection, estimates of future raw material prices, etc. Through such announcements, a firm can try to influence the assumptions of its competitors.



A firm may discuss / explain the logic of a move to its competitors. It may also communicate its seriousness and earnestness about what it is doing and what it is planning to do. This way the firm may be able to preempt competition, or prevent retaliation.

It is often useful to examine the historical relationship between a firm‘s announcements and its actual moves to understand whether the firm is a serious player or is only trying to bluff its way. Among the other issues which need careful examination are competitors‘ tactics relative to what they could have done, the divergence from past goals, industry precedent, etc. Strategy formulation is usually based on implicit and explicit assumptions about competitors. Market signals can add greatly to a firm‘s knowledge of its competitors. (See also: COMPETITIVE MOVES, GAME THEORY, MARKET DEFENSE)

144

Maslow, ABRAHAM

Maslow, Abraham Well-known for his needs hierarchy theory of motivation. Unlike many other behavioral scientists of his time, Maslow did not analyze and study mental dysfunction. Instead, he tried to seek out and probe the healthiest minds and best-balanced personalities he could find. Maslow believed in the innate potential of human beings for goodness and recognized the importance of developing the human capacity for compassion, creativity, ethics, love, and spirituality. All people are born with such basic needs as food and shelter, as well as the emotional yearnings for safety, love, and self-esteem. But these needs are only the foundation of a pyramid of higher aspirations. Man yearns for bread when there is no bread. But when there is plenty of bread and the stomach is full, higher needs emerge. And when these in turn are satisfied, new and still ―higher‖ needs emerge, and so on. Maslow believed altruism resulted when lower order needs have been largely fulfilled in childhood, leading to the development of a healthy character. (See also: MOTIVATION)

Matrix Structure A type of organizational structure which attempts to combine the best of functional and divisional structures. The main advantages of a FUNCTIONAL STRUCTURE are technical specialization and efficiency. The main advantage of a DIVISIONAL STRUCTURE is sharp business focus. A matrix structure creates dual reporting relationships. Subordinates are assigned both to a functional area and a project or product group. Some matrix structures can be more complicated. For example, in a global corporation a three dimensional matrix structure might involve a functional manager reporting to the business unit head, country head and the global head of the function simultaneously. Because of multiple reporting relationships, the matrix structure is inherently more difficult for managers to handle. So in recent times, companies like ABB have considerably simplified the complex matrix structures they followed earlier. (See also: DIVISIONAL STRUCTURE, FUNCTIONAL STRUCTURE, ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE)

Mayo, ELTON AND ROETHLIS BERGER, FRITZ

Mayo, Elton and Roethlisberger, Fritz

145

*

Best-known for suggesting that psychological techniques and social interaction hold the key to managing the relationships within social systems and to improve employee morale and productivity. Roethlisberger and Mayo insisted that behavior of employees was influenced as much by their role in a work group and their relationship to their colleagues as by the promise of economic gain. They were among the first to draw attention to the power of the informal organization. Mayo traced the root of many problems in the work place to the shift from the skilled trades of the nineteenth century with their strong community ties, to the rise of unskilled, migrant laborers. Industry had effectively destroyed the self-esteem of skilled tradesmen and was illequipped to deal with the alienation and disaffection of blue-collar workers, most of whom had been uprooted from their communities. Together, Mayo and Roethlisberger conducted the famous Hawthorne experiments to study human motivation. The experiments exposed the inadequacy of the piecework system and challenged the assumption that there was a neat correlation between pay levels and productivity. The experiments also exposed the complex way in which the relationships between supervisors and workers could affect output. In the first set of tests, known as the ―illustration experiments‖, workers were divided into two groups — a test group in which the workers were submitted to increasing amounts of light and a control group, which worked under a constant light intensity. Contrary to expectations, productivity increased in both groups. The workers seemed to be responding more to the attention they were receiving from management than to any actual change in working conditions. This response of the workers was called ―the Hawthorne Effect‖. In the last set of investigations, known as the Bank Wiring Observation Room experiments, the room was staffed with 14 workmen, paid according to a group piecework system. The more components they turned out, the more money they made. So it was logical to expect that the most efficient workers would put pressure on the slower workers to

*

From the book The Essence of Competitive Strategy by David Faulkner and Cliff Bowman, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.

146

McGregor, DOUGLAS

maintain a high level of output. This did not prove to be the case. Instead, the group established an unofficial output norm based on what was considered a ―fair‖ production quota. Workers who violated the norm, by producing either too much or too little, were looked down upon by their coworkers. The informal organization dictated the output of each worker based on its own standards of fairness and the position each worker occupied within the work group. In many smaller organizations, many of the rules of the work place remained implicit, not only the operating rules and standards of performance, but also the rules of communication, that is, to whom one was supposed to go for help. People were bound together by relations that had nothing to do with what they were supposed to be doing. These relations seemed to be important, not only for achieving the objectives of the organization but also for obtaining the cooperation of people. (See also: MOTIVATION)

McGregor, Douglas An American psychologist whose book The Human Side of Enterprise categorized managers into two types: Theory X and Theory Y. Many managers assume people to be work-shy and motivated primarily by money. These are Theory X managers. In contrast, Theory Y managers assume that workers look to gain satisfaction from employment. If achievement levels are low, managers must ask whether they are providing the right work environment. In other words, the Theory Y manager assumes that the blame for poor workforce performance lies with the management rather than the workers themselves. The Theory X manager assumes the following:    

Workers are motivated by money. Unless supervised closely, workers will under-perform. Workers will only respect a tough, decisive boss. Workers have no wish or ability to help make decisions. The Theory Y manager assumes the following:

   

Workers seek job satisfaction no less than managers. If trusted, workers will behave responsibly. Low performance is due to dull work or poor management. People have the desire and right to take part in decision making.

McKinsey 7-S FRAMEWORK

147

McGegor was also against the traditional pay-for-performance concept. He was convinced that money could not substitute an environment that was conducive to motivation. McGregor recognized the tremendous improvements in working conditions since the turn of the century at all levels of the corporation. Drawing on Maslow‘s hierarchy of needs, he argued that by satisfying the safety and security needs of its employees, companies had created higher-order needs. The focus had to shift to satisfying those higher needs. McGregor‘s work is not completely original. Theory X is derived from the work of F. W. Taylor and from Adam Smith‘s notion of ―economic man‖. Theory Y stems clearly from Mayo‘s human relations approach and Maslow‘s work on human needs. (See also: MOTIVATION, MAYO, ELTON AND ROETHLISBERGER, FRITZ)

McKinsey 7-S Framework

*

An analytical framework developed by Mckinsey consultants, Richard Tanner Pascale and Anthony G Athos based on their study of well managed Japanese companies, which looks at seven key aspects of an organization: 1. 2.

3. 4.

5.

*

Strategy:

The path chosen by a company to achieve its goals. How the organization allocates its resources to achieve its aims. Structure: Describes the hierarchy of authority and accountability in an organization. These relationships are frequently indicated in organizational charts and include organization structure, level of centralization, authority and responsibility arrangements. Skills: The core competences and capabilities of the firms that allow them to compete in the market. Systems: Processes used to manage the organization, such as customer satisfaction monitoring system, management information systems, budgetary and other control mechanisms. Staff: The quality of a firm‘s human resources. It refers to how people are developed, trained and motivated.

Tanner Pascale, Richard; and Athos, Anthony G., The Art of Japanese Management: Applications for American Executives, Warner Books, 1982.

148

6.

McNamara, ROBERT S.

Style:

The leadership and operational approach adopted by the management. It also refers to the way in which a company projects itself to the outside world. 7. Shared Values: Also known as super-ordinate goals. The fundamental ideas around which a business is built and the things that influence a group to work together towards a common goal. (See also: PURPOSE-PROCESS-PRINCIPLE DOCTRINE)

McNamara, Robert S. Presided over the restructuring of Ford, the US defense department, and World Bank, and championed a new approach to management that emphasized sophisticated quantitative skills and financial controls. McNamara did more to advocate a rationalist, quantitative approach to management than perhaps any single individual since Taylor. McNamara‘s vision encompassed both the need for financial discipline and a belief in the corporate social contract. He was an earnest advocate of safety, environmental responsibility, utility, function, cooperation with government, and accountability to labor. Thanks to McNamara, systems analysis became a popular latetwentieth century tool of scientific management. It aimed at providing transparency by making both the analysis, and the underlying assumptions and calculations, available to all interested parties. Yet, as applied by McNamara, it concentrated power in the hands of a few analytical experts. McNamara‘s bean counters wrested control of planning from operating executives in both auto manufacturing and the armed forces. As time passed, it became clear that tools and techniques could not make up for poor human judgment. Long after the Vietnam War had ended, McNamara admitted: ―We failed to recognize that in international affairs, as in other aspects of life, there may be problems for which there are no immediate solutions.‖

Merger Refers to the combination of two companies into one larger company. Some mergers involve a cash deal while others involve exchange of shares. A combination of the two is also possible. In many instances a merger resembles a takeover but results in a new company name

Mintzberg, HENRY

149

(often combining the names of the original companies) and in new branding. There can be various types of mergers: 





Horizontal Mergers

take place where the two merging companies both produce similar products in the same industry. Vertical Mergers occur when two firms, each working at different stages in the production of the same product, combine together. This is some kind of a vertical integration. Conglomerate Mergers take place when the two firms operate in different industries.

Mergers must be carefully planned and implemented. Many mergers fail to create value for shareholders because synergies identified before the merger fail to materialize. (See also: ANTI-TAKEOVER STRATEGY, VALUATION)

Mintzberg, Henry A leading researcher in the area of strategy, Mintzberg is a professor of strategic management at McGill University, Canada, and also holds a chair at INSEAD. His philosophy is based on how managers actually create and implement strategy, rather than how they should supposedly do so. Mintzberg‘s first major input came from studying managers at an everyday level. He found that whilst the theory was that managers should be reflective thinkers, the reality was that they were caught up in action most of the time. Mintzberg has been a prolific writer with more than 140 articles and 13 books to his name. His seminal book, The Rise and Fall of Strategic Planning, criticized some contemporary practices of strategic planning and is recommended reading for anyone who seriously wants to consider taking on a strategy-making role within an organization. Mintzberg argues that conventional planning processes are inappropriate to the more fluid decision-making processes characteristic of most organizations. Along with Joseph Lampel and Bruce Ahlstrand, Mintzberg coauthored Strategy Safari, which likens the various schools of strategy to the different kinds of animals which one would literally see, if one were on a safari.

150

Mission

Mintzberg‘s recently published book, Managers Not MBAs, outlines what he believes to be wrong with management education today and how obsession with numbers and viewing management as a science actually can damage the discipline of management.

Mission The fundamental purpose that sets a firm apart from other firms of its type and identifies the scope of its operations in product and market terms. Mission embodies the business philosophy of the firm, conveys its corporate image, indicates the firm‘s principal product or service areas, and the primary customer needs the firm will attempt to satisfy. In short, the mission statement describes the firm‘s business in product, market, and technological terms. According to King & Cleland*, a well-designed company mission must accomplish the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Ensure unanimity of purpose within the organization. Provide a basis for using the organization‘s resources. Establish a general tone or organizational climate. Serve as a focal point for those who can identify with the organization‘s purpose and direction and weed out people who cannot do so. 5. Facilitate the translation of objectives and goals into a work structure involving the assignment of tasks to responsible people within the organization. 6. Specify the organizational purpose, and the translation of this purpose into goals in such a way that cost, time and performance parameters can be assessed and controlled. A mission statement ensures that all employees are working towards a common purpose, enables employees to identify better with the organization, and serves to state explicitly or implicitly the organization‘s beliefs, values and aspirations. In contrast, a VISION is a broad indication of the organization‘s intentions. The ideas and ideals embodied in the vision are often too lofty.

*

See John A. Pearce and Richard Robinson Jr., Strategic Management — Formulation, Implementation and Control, McGraw-Hill International Edition, 2002.

Motivation

151

Vision is also often unwritten. A vision becomes tangible when it is expressed in the form of a mission statement. (See also: CORPORATE PURPOSE)

Motivation Defined variously as the will to work due to enjoyment of the work itself or anything that leads people to achieve more than they would otherwise do. Motivation theories hold that a motivated workforce is the key to any organization‘s success. Probably the best known theory of motivation is the one developed by Abraham MASLOW, a behavioral scientist who proposed the Hierarchy of Needs theory in 1954. According to Maslow, human beings are motivated by unsatisfied needs. Lower needs need to be satisfied before the higher ones become important. When ―deficiency needs‖ are met, other higher needs emerge and when these in turn are satisfied, new (and still higher) needs emerge, and so on. 









Physiological Needs:

Physiological needs are basic needs such as air, water, food, and sex. When these are not satisfied, we feel pain and discomfort. Safety Needs: Comfort and security come next. After the basic requirements of survival are met, we naturally want to preserve and enhance what we have. We think of the security of home and family. Social Needs: Love and belongingness follow. All of us have a desire to belong to groups; clubs, work groups, religious groups, family, etc. We want to be loved and accepted by others. Esteem Needs: There are two types of esteem needs. First is selfesteem, which results from competence or mastery of a task. Second is the need for attention and recognition from others. Holding senior posts in organizations and an opportunity to lead initiatives are some sources of self-esteem for most people. Self Actualization: In this stage, people seek knowledge, peace, selffulfillment and salvation.

The basic problem with Maslow‘s model is that people may simultaneously have different kinds of needs, instead of moving sequentially from one to the next. Moreover for many people caught in poverty, especially in third world countries, lower order needs may not be satisfied during an entire lifetime. So the question of self-actualization simp-

152

Multi DOMESTIC INDUSTRY

lydoes not arise. Then there are people who are always greedy for more money, despite being very wealthy! In 1969, Clayton Alderfer improvised on Maslow‘s hierarchy of needs, with his ERG theory (Existence, Relatedness and Growth). Alderfer put the lower order needs, physiological and safety, into the existence category. He fit Maslow‘s interpersonal love and esteem needs into the relatedness category. The growth category contained the self actualization and self esteem needs. According to the ERG theory, more than one need may be operational at the same time. People can move on to a higher order need even without substantially satisfying their lower order needs. For instance, an artist may want to satisfy his basic needs like hunger and shelter, but may be simultaneously interested in his growth as an artist. If a higher-order need is frustrated, an individual may regress towards a lower-order need which appears easier to satisfy. This is known as the frustration-regression principle. Thus if social needs are not satisfied, an employee might start concentrating on making more money. This might happen, for example, if a deserving middle manager is denied a promotion for a long time. Another landmark in the body of knowledge about motivation is Herzberg‘s two-factor theory of job satisfaction. Every organization has a set of HYGIENE FACTORS like working conditions, salary, etc. The absence of hygiene factors creates employee dissatisfaction but their presence does not improve satisfaction. HERZBERG found five factors in particular that were strong determinants of job satisfaction: achievement, recognition, the work itself, responsibility, and advancement. Motivators have a long-term positive impact on job performance. In contrast, hygiene factors produce only short-term changes in job attitudes and performance. Another theory proposed by Vroom is that motivation depends on employee expectations about the outcome of their efforts. If people know what they want from an outcome, and believe they can achieve it, they will be highly motivated to work towards the goal. This theory contrasts with Maslow and Herzberg‘s emphasis on people‘s needs.

Multi Domestic Industry An industry in which the competition within the industry is essentially segmented from country to country. Competitive strategies in one country are largely independent of those in other countries. Typically, these

Murphy’s LAW

153

are industries where economies of scale are less important and the need for local customization is more critical, or where freight costs are significant. The cement industry is a good example. (See also: GLOBAL INDUSTRY)

Murphy’s Law A popular maxim most commonly formulated as ―Anything that can go wrong will go wrong‖. The law is named after Major Edward A. Murphy, Jr., a development engineer who worked for a brief period of time on rocket sled experiments conducted by the United States Air Force in 1949.

154

Nearshoring

N Nearshoring The practice of outsourcing activities to locations which may not be the cheapest but are reasonably close so that coordination is easier. Eastern Europe is a nearshoring destination for many companies in the US. (See also: OFFSHORING, OUTSOURCING)

Net Present Value (NPV) A standard tool used in capital budgeting. According to the NPV method, a potential investment project should be undertaken if the present value of all cash inflows minus the present value of all cash outflows (which equals the net present value) is greater than zero. The discount rate used is the shareholder‘s required rate of return. Managers should undertake only those projects that have an NPV greater than zero. If two projects are mutually exclusive, they should choose the one with the higher NPV. (See also: ADJUSTED PRESENT VALUE)

Nine-Cell Planning Grid A planning framework developed by General Electric (GE), the ninecell planning grid to some extent, overcomes the limitations of the BCG GROWTH-SHARE MATRIX. In the GE grid, each business is rated low, medium or high on two major dimensions — market attractiveness and business strength. There are nine cells into which businesses can be grouped based on these two dimensions.

Not-Invented -Here

155

Not-Invented-Here A phrase used to describe the difficulties managers have in accepting an idea or a concept or a product developed by another department or organization. It is a term used to describe a culture that finds it difficult to accept that outsiders can either be better or know more.

156

Offshoring

O Offshoring The increasing trend towards locating non-core activities in distant locations to take advantage of lower costs and skilled manpower. This theme has been well covered in Thomas Friedman‘s much talked-about book, The Earth is Flat. John Hagel III* and John Seely Brown† have identified four broad waves in the evolution of offshoring:   



Locating operations offshore to facilitate cost arbitrage. Locating operations offshore to gain access to distinctive skills. Locating operations offshore to target the unique and demanding needs of emerging markets. Using emerging markets as a base from which innovative products and services can be developed for the global markets.

Two strategic challenges are involved in offshoring. The company must be able to define clearly the scope and contours of its business. The company must also develop the capabilities and master the techniques needed to access and leverage the expertise of partners. (See also: NEARSHORING, OUTSOURCING)

Ohmae, Kenichi A former Mckinsey consultant, well known for his work on strategy in general, and globalization in particular. Ohmae‘s famous books include Mind of the Strategist, Borderless World, End of the Nation State, and The Next Global Stage: Challenges and Opportunities in Our Borderless World. Ohmae has also published several thought provoking articles in leading journals, such as Harvard Business Review. *

John Hagel III is an independent Management consultant and an author. He has written several famous management books. †

John Seely Brown was formerly the Chief Scientist of Xerox Corporation and the director of its Palo Alto Research Center (PARC).

Oligopoly

157

Oligopoly A market which is dominated by a small number of sellers. The word is derived from the Greek for few sellers. As there are few participants, each seller is aware of the actions of others. The decisions of one seller influence, and are influenced by, the decisions of other sellers. Strategic planning by oligopolists must take into account the likely responses of the other market participants. An oligopoly can be quantified using the four-firm concentration ratio which calculates the percentage of market share accounted for by the four largest firms in an industry. Using this measure, an oligopoly may be defined as a market in which the four-firm concentration ratio is above, say, 40%. The HERFINDAL INDEX is another useful measure. In industrialized countries, oligopolies are found in many sectors of the economy such as cars, consumer goods and steel. In regulated markets such as wireless communications, the state often licenses only two or three providers of cellular phone services, effectively creating an oligopoly. The well-known marketing scholar, Jagdish Sheth* has coined the rule of three which holds that in many industries, equilibrium is reached when there are three main players. Oligopolistic competition can result in various outcomes. Firms may collude to raise prices and restrict production in the same way as a monopoly. In some industries, there may be an acknowledged market leader who informally sets prices to which other producers respond. In other situations, competition between sellers can be fierce, with relatively low prices and high production. This can lead to an efficient outcome approaching perfect competition. Competition would be less if the firms are regional and do not compete directly with each other. Oligopsony by contrast is a type of market in which the number of buyers are small while the number of sellers is large. A small number of firms compete to control the inputs of production. (See also: GAME THEORY)

*

Sheth, Jagdish and Sisodia, Rajendra, The Rule of Three: Surviving and Thriving in Competitive Markets, The Free Press, 2002.

158

Operating STRATEGIES

Operating Strategies Day to day actions that need to be aligned with the firm‘s long term objectives. These may include sales planning, production scheduling, working capital management, inventory management, etc. (See also: FUNCTIONAL STRATEGY)

Opportunity Cost Cost of the opportunity foregone. Most decisions involve an opportunity cost. When resources are committed somewhere, some other area is starved of them. Opportunity costs must be considered while taking decisions.

Optimizing Planning An approach which believes in achieving the best possible outcome, using mathematical models. An optimizer tries to either minimize the resources required for a given level of performance or to maximize the performance given a certain level of resources, or to obtain the best balance between resources consumed and performance. (See also: ACKOFF, RUSSELL)

Organic Growth Expansion from within the firm, i.e. not as a result of acquisitions. Organic growth is likely to be steady, even slow, but very secure. That is why some CEOs consider it the most ―precious‖ form of growth. In contrast, growth by acquisitions tends to be risky and often fails to add value for shareholders.

Organizational Behavior Organizational behavior is the study of what people think, feel and do in and around organizations. It explores individual emotions and behavior, team dynamics and the systems and structures of organizations. Organizational behavior attempts to provide an understanding of the factors necessary for managers to create an organization that is more effective than its competitors. (See also: ORGANIZATIONAL DEVELOPMENT)

Organizational CULTURE

159

Organizational Chart A visual representation of an organization structure. It identifies the organizational unit and indicates each position in relation to others. Positions are usually represented by squares or rectangles (although circles or ovals are sometimes used) that contain the position title. They may show the name of the incumbent as well. Each position is connected by a solid line running to the immediate supervisor and to positions supervised, if any. Broken or dotted lines may be used to show other than reporting relationships, e.g. advisory or functional.

(See also: ORGANIZATIONAL DESIGN, ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE)

Organizational Culture Accepted and important beliefs and values of people within an organization. Culture tells employees what is accepted and what is not, what is important and what is not. Culture implicitly makes employees set priorities. Culture develops over time, as people get exposed to problems and

160

Organizational CULTURE

find ways to solve them. Leadership plays an important role in shaping culture. Culture is the knowledge used by people to interpret experiences, set priorities and guide their behavior. The beliefs and values of employees form the core of organizational culture. Culture is acquired by learning and experience and is shaped by various organizational influences. For example, in some companies employees are encouraged to take risk, while playing safe is the accepted norm in others. In some companies, the work environment may be very informal with people operating on a first name basis, while in others it can be very formal with great importance being attached to seniority, designation, etc. Some cultures lay a premium on getting the work done while others attach equal, if not more, importance to how the work is done. For example, giving bribes to government officials, something very common in a country like India to get work done, is strictly prohibited in India‘s Tata group. Geert Hofstede, the famous Dutch scholar has identified four wellknown dimensions of culture: 1.

Power Distance:

2.

Uncertainty Avoidance:

The extent to which employees feel that power is unevenly distributed across various levels of the organization from the top to the bottom. Power distance tends to be less in knowledge intensive industries such as computer software. In such industries, individual expertise is as important as seniority and designation. The extent to which people feel threatened by

uncertainty. 3.

Individualism:

4.

Masculinity:

The tendency of people to be self-centered as opposed to collectivism where people care for each other. Individualism is a typical cultural trait found in investment banks. Americans are considered to be more individualistic as compared to the Japanese. Refers to a strong emphasis on success, money and material objects as opposed to femininity, which emphasizes caring for others and quality of life. For example, academic institutions have a feminine culture. Scandinavian countries in general have a feminine culture. Japan has a masculine culture where the desire to be a high performer in the work place often leads to burn out, or Karoshi.

Organizational DESIGN

161

Organizational Design How individuals are grouped and their tasks structured within the organization. Designing organizations is a complex exercise. According to Harvard Business School professor Robert Simons*, organization design must take into account the company‘s strategy, its competitive environment, stage of the lifecycle and various other factors. In short, it is a fine balancing act. Organizational design receives little attention in the early days of a firm. But over time, problems emerge as the charisma of the founders becomes insufficient to manage a larger enterprise. Systems and processes become important. This is when a functional structure is typically chosen. When the functional structure becomes inadequate to respond to needs of the market place because of centralized decision making, a divisional structure becomes necessary. But with time, a divisional structure leads to fiefdoms. Coordination becomes difficult, resources are wasted, knowledge sharing does not happen effectively and profitability declines. Often at such a juncture, headquarters may take control. But this leads to red tape, decision making slows down and pressure builds for simplifying the organization, divesting non-core businesses and removing red tape. In short, organizational design is a dynamic concept. The design should change in line with the company‘s circumstances. Designing organizations that can adapt over time effectively means learning to reconcile the tensions between:    

Strategy and structure; Accountability and adaptability; Ladders and rings; and Self-interest and mission success.

Managers must design organizations to implement the current strategy and also allow new ideas to flow that will feed into tomorrow‘s strategies. Structure determines how information from the market is processed and acted upon. Thus structure determines strategy and strategy determines structure in an interdependent fashion. Accountability is at the heart of organization design. While people must be answerable for performance on some measured dimension, they should not be discouraged from experimenting and working on new ideas. An effective organ*

Simons, Robert, ―How Risky is Your Company?‖, Harvard Business Review, May-June 1999, pp. 85-94.

162

Organizational DEVELOPMENT (OD)

ization structure must not only take into account the ladders (vertical hierarchy) but also the rings (horizontal networks). Human behavior is a critical design variable. Organization design must promote the kind of behavior that strikes the right balance between aspirations of employees and organizational needs. The basic building blocks of any organization structure are market facing units and core operating units. Market facing units gather market data about customers, competitors, opportunities and threats. Responsiveness must drive the design of market facing units. This responsiveness must be balanced by efficiency elsewhere. It is the job of the back office functions to do just that. Managers of these functions are responsible for standardizing work processes, applying best practices to the firm‘s internal operations and ensuring efficiency through economies of scale and scope. Scarce resources must be distributed optimally between the market facing and operating core units. Till recently, organization design essentially amounted to a trade-off between responsiveness and efficiency. Information technology (IT) is facilitating higher efficiency with an acceptable level of responsiveness as IT can forge very close links with customers. Dell is a good example of this. (See also: ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE)

Organizational Development (OD) The field of organizational development (OD) is concerned with the performance, development, and effectiveness of human organizations. According to Warren Bennis, OD aims at changing the beliefs, attitudes, values, and structure of organizations so that they can better adapt to new technologies, markets, and challenges. OD involves organizational reflection, system improvement, planning, and self-analysis. OD helps an organization to develop its internal capacity to be the most effective with respect to its chosen line of business and to sustain itself over the long term. (See also: ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOR)

Organizational Inertia Inability to change and adapt to the external business environment is called organizational inertia. Many organizations struggle to cope with

Organizational MAPPING

163

the pace of change. They do not recognize that competition has increased, or that the company‘s products are no longer as distinctive or superior or as much in demand as in the past. Inertia is dangerous under the following circumstances.    



 

 



Competing or substitute products have come onto the market. Technology is changing rapidly. Customer preferences are undergoing a major change. Substitute products are driving down prices and threatening to take current and potential customers. Products are maturing, resulting in reduced prices, market saturation and risk to brand reputation. Social upheavals are taking place. Political developments are leading to regulatory changes, lowering the barriers to entry. A significant new competitor has arrived. Rising exit barriers have resulted in intensifying competition, in the face of falling sales. The company is no longer strong either in product differentiation or cost leadership. (See also: CHANGE MANAGEMENT)

Organizational Learning Continuous modification of behavior by an organization in line with changes in its environment. Learning begins with observation, reflecting on the observation and assessing the underlying factors that drive behavior. Learning is a continuous process. Reflection and action combine to produce learning. A learning organization is good at creating and acquiring knowledge, and at modifying its behavior to reflect new knowledge and insights. Learning organizations make conscious attempts to improve productivity, effectiveness and performance on an ongoing basis. The greater the uncertainties in the external environment, the greater the need for learning.

Organizational Mapping A well-known technique for understanding how people, departments, customers and other functions in the organization interact. Mapping allows us to examine a business process clearly. It uncovers weaknesses in

164

Organizational STRUCTURE

structure that may need to be resolved. It identifies bottlenecks, barriers and errors and creates a map of the ideal process to put in place and implement improvement plans. Process mapping is particularly effective in determining breakdowns in communication and information sharing. Process mapping helps in improving existing processes and identifying new processes that will increase efficiency and effectiveness. (See also: BUSINESS PROCESS REENGINEERING)

Organizational Structure The way activities are grouped in an organization. Structure promotes specialization, defines roles more clearly, and facilitates efficient execution of day-to-day tasks. However, a rigid structure may reduce flexibility and create watertight compartments that stand in the way of knowledge sharing and innovation. The organizational structure should be sufficiently flexible so that people from different departments can come together to discuss new ideas and solve complex problems. Indeed, the ability to form and dismantle cross-functional task forces at short notice can be a key competitive advantage in a dynamic environment. (See also: ORGANIZATIONAL DESIGN)

Outsourcing Essentially the delegation of non-core operations or jobs to an external entity, such as a subcontractor, that specializes in that operation. Outsourcing often aims at lowering costs or sharpening the focus on competencies. A related term, OFFSHORING, means transferring work to another country. Outsourcing has taken off in a big way in recent times thanks to the availability of information and communications technology that facilitates effective coordination of geographically dispersed activities. (See also: DYNAMIC SPECIALIZATION, NEARSHORING, PROCESS NETWORKS)

Overheads The costs incurred in addition to the direct costs of manufacturing or of providing services. As organizations grow in size, overheads tend to increase. Attacking overheads is usually an integral part of most corporate restructuring activities.

Overheads

(See also: ACTIVITY BASED COSTING)

165

166

Palepu, KRISHNA G.

P Palepu, Krishna G. A well-known faculty at the Harvard Business School, Palepu‘s research and teaching activities have focused on strategy and governance. He has published numerous academic- and practitioner-oriented articles and case studies on these issues. His recent focus has been on the globalization of emerging markets, particularly India and China. In the area of corporate governance, Palepu‘s work focuses on how to make corporate boards more effective, and on improving corporate disclosure. Palepu has been on the editorial boards of leading academic journals, and has served as a consultant to a wide variety of businesses. Two articles written jointly with Tarun Khanna, ―The Right Way to Restructure Conglomerates in Emerging Markets,‖ and ―Why Focused Strategies May be Wrong for Emerging Markets‖ are widely cited in the literature. (See also: KHANNA, TARUN)

Pareto’s Principle The Pareto principle (also known as the 80-20 rule, the law of the vital few and the principle of factor sparsity) states that for many phenomena, 80% of the consequences stem from 20% of the causes. What Pareto‘s Principle tells us is that we must focus on the right areas to get results. The principle is named after Italian economist Vilfredo Pareto who observed that 80% of income in Italy was received by 20% of the Italian population. In marketing, 20% of clients are responsible for 80% of sales volume. In many processes, 80% of the resources are typically used by 20% of the operations. Sometimes, 80-20 may even become 90-10. Thus, in software engineering, 90% of the execution time of a computer program is spent executing 10% of the code. Pareto‘s Principle helps focus management attention on critical areas. It is the basis for the Pareto chart, one of the key tools used in TOTAL QUALITY CONTROL and SIX SIGMA. The Pareto Principle serves as a base-

Personal EFFECTIVENESS

167

line for ABC-analysis and XYZ-analysis, widely used in logistics and procurement for the purpose of optimizing inventory and order quantity. The principle of TIPPING POINT, coined by Malcolm Gladwell can be considered to be an extreme version of the 80-20 principle.

Parkinson’s Law A startlingly insightful formulation which states that ―work expands so as to fill the time available for its completion‖. A more succinct phrasing also commonly used is that ―work expands to fill the time available‖. First articulated by C. Northcote Parkinson in an article published in The Economist in 1955 and later reprinted together with other essays in his book Parkinson’s Law: The Pursuit of Progress, it was based on the author‘s extensive experience in the British Civil Service. In many offices, work expands and fills up the time available for its completion. Thus, people look busy even when they are not doing any useful work. Parkinson‘s Law could be even more generalized as: ―The demand upon a resource always expands to match its available supply.‖

Personal Effectiveness Not just a measure of practical knowledge or skills in a functional area such as human relations, marketing, or information and communications technologies. Personal effectiveness is also about soft issues such as time management, stress management and inter personal skills. Personal effectiveness separates the men from the boys in the workplace. Stephen Covey‘s seven habits provide a simple-easy-to-understand-anduse framework of personal effectiveness. 





Be Proactive:

People are responsible for their own choices and have the freedom to make decisions based on principles and values rather than on moods or conditions. Begin with the End in Mind: Individuals, families, teams and organizations must have a clear purpose in mind. They must identify and commit themselves to the principles, relationships and purposes that matter most to them. Put First Things First: Putting first things first means focusing on the most important priorities. Whatever the circumstances, living and being driven by values and key principles is important.

168









PEST ANALYSIS

Think Win-win:

Thinking win-win is a frame of mind and heart that seeks mutual benefit and mutual respect in all interactions. Instead of thinking selfishly or like a loser, people should learn to think in terms of ―we‖, not ―me‖. Seek First to Understand, then to be Understood: Listening with the intent to understand others is the essence of communication and relationship building. Opportunities to speak openly and to be understood come much more naturally and easily. Seeking to understand takes consideration; seeking to be understood takes courage. Both consideration and courage are important. Synergize: Synergize means realizing that a third way is better than what each party can come up with individually. It‘s the fruit of respecting, valuing and even celebrating one another‘s differences. It‘s about solving problems, seizing opportunities and working out differences. Synergy is also the key to any effective team or relationship. Sharpen the Saw: Sharpening the saw means constant renewal in the four basic areas of life: physical, social / emotional, mental and spiritual.

PEST Analysis A framework, introduced by Steiner and Andrews, for analyzing an organization‘s external environment. Various political, economic, social and technological trends are identified to formulate and implement strategies: 







Political factors include government regulations and legal issues pertaining to tax, employment, environment, trade, etc. Economic factors include economic growth, interest rates, exchange rates, inflation rates, etc. Social factors include health consciousness, population growth rate, age distribution, career attitudes, emphasis on safety, attitudes to foreign products and services and average life of human beings. Technological factors include R&D activity, automation, rate of technological change, etc. (See also: ENVIRONMENTAL SCANNING)

Platform LEADERSHIP

169

Peter PrincipleAccording to Dr. Laurence J Peter*, in any hierarchy employees tend to rise to their level of incompetence. Thus, excellent motor mechanics after being promoted become second-rate foremen and fine teachers become incompetent school heads. Peter pointed out that the main criterion for gaining promotion is success. So competence is rewarded with promotion until the individuals rise to a hierarchy level where they can no longer cope. On arriving at this level of incompetence, the employees become frustrated, stressed and ineffective. The key message is that promotions should not only take into account current performance but also the potential for performance in a future role.

Platform Leadership

†

A strategic concept introduced by Annabelle Gower and Michael Cusumano‡. In the initial phase of many industries, the early movers tend to develop most of the components necessary to make the products. But later, specialized firms typically emerge to develop different components. Along with components, evolve platforms, which consist of various components made by different companies. Some companies become platform leaders. They ensure the integrity of the platform by working closely with other firms to create initial applications and then new generations of complementary products. Platform leaders create interfaces to entice other firms to use them to build products that conform to the defined standards and therefore work efficiently with the platform. It is in the interest of a platform leader to stimulate innovation on complementary products. The more people who use these complements, the more incentives there are for producers of complements to introduce such products. This in turn motivates more

*

Laurence Peter (1919 - 1990) was an educator and ―hierarchiologist‖, best known to the general public for the formulation of the Peter Principle. †

Cusumano, Michael A. and Gawer, Annabelle, Platform Leadership: How Intel, Microsoft, and Cisco Drive Industry Innovation, HBS Press, 2002. ‡

Michael A. Cusumano is the Sloan Management Review Distinguished Professor at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology's Sloan School of Management. He specializes in strategy, product development, and entrepreneurship in the computer software industry, as well as automobiles and consumer electronics.

170

Platform LEADERSHIP

people to buy or use the core product, stimulating more innovation, and so on. Wars about standards are an integral part of platform strategies. What matters is overall performance. The platform need not be superior to the competition in all product features. Windows, particularly the early versions, wasn‘t technically superior to the Macintosh, nor were Matsushita‘s VHS video recorders superior to Sony‘s Betamax. But in each case the network as a whole delivered more. Defining the architecture of a system product is a powerful way of raising entry barriers for potential competitors. A potential competitor to Intel not only has to invent a microprocessor with a better priceperformance ratio but also rally complementors and original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) to adapt their designs to this component. This would obviously involve huge switching costs. Platform leaders must also be able to maintain architectural control over its platform, by making an ongoing assessment of their existing capabilities and the direction in which the industry or technology is evolving. Platform leaders need to pursue at least two objectives simultaneously: 



First, they must try to obtain consensus among key complementors with regard to the technical specifications and standards that make their platforms work with other products. Second, they must control critical design decisions at other firms that affect how well the platform and complements continue to work together through new product generations.

A platform leader must play the role of industry enabler by encouraging innovations that improve the platform. The platform leader sometimes has to make decisions that might hurt some partners, even if they have been complementors in the past. To gain the trust of third parties, platform leaders must act and be seen to act fairly. They need to establish credibility in technical areas where they want to influence future designs or standards. They must make potential complementors feel comfortable that the decisions are being taken in the interest of the whole industry. Platform leaders usually emerge through the mechanisms of the marketplace, rather than through some magical process. A high market share

Porter, MICHAEL E.

171

and a high degree of innovative capabilities alone do not suffice. A platform leader must have the vision and the organizational capabilities to engage complementors to innovate and improve the platform. Such a vision is grounded in the belief that the power of a system is greater than the sum of its parts.

Poison Pill An ANTI-TAKEOVER STRATEGY in which the threatened company does things that would represent a long-term drain on the resources of the bidder. As a consequence, the bidder may decide against swallowing up the poisoned pill (company), and give up the bid. An example of a poison pill is giving staff employment contracts with a three-year notice of termination clause. This would significantly increase the cost of taking over and restructuring the firm for a bidder.

Policies Rules and guidelines to supplement functional strategies. Policies guide the thinking and decisions of managers while implementing the firm‘s strategies. Policies serve as specific guides for lower level managers in taking operating decisions. (See also: FUNCTIONAL STRATEGY)

Political Risk A term typically used to describe the possibility of loss when investing in a foreign country, because of various factors — changes in the country‘s political structure or policies, such as tax laws, tariffs, expropriation of assets, restrictions imposed on repatriation of profits, tightened foreign exchange repatriation rules, or increased credit risk due to changes in government policies. (See also: COUNTRY RISK)

Porter, Michael E. Arguably the most famous contemporary strategy guru in the world. Porter‘s FIVE FORCES MODEL and GENERIC STRATEGIES, COST LEADERSHIP DIFFERENTIATION and FOCUS have become the standard reference point for management students, research scholars and practitioners world wide.

172

Porter, MICHAEL E.

Porter‘s approach to STRATEGIC PLANNING has been referred to as the positioning school which holds that a firm‘s performance is largely determined by how it is positioned vis-à-vis various forces in the external environment. Porter has also written about the competitive advantage of nations and the linkages between corporate strategy and corporate philanthrophy. Porter‘s writings carry deep insights. Though researchers have pointed out the limitations of Porter‘s work from time to time, many of the principles developed by Porter remain as relevant as ever. In terms of ability to put together a body of knowledge based on a conceptually elegant framework, few scholars in the area of strategy have been able to rival Porter so far. Porter‘s five forces model addresses the question of why some industries are more attractive than others. The five forces identified by Porter are: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

The bargaining power of the buyers. Entry barriers. Competitive rivalry. Substitutes. The bargaining power of the sellers. The model guides companies in:

  



Prioritizing markets according to their inherent attractiveness. Understanding the critical success factors in the market. Providing insights for the criteria by which a company can judge itself against competitors. Generating ideas for changing the rules of the game. Porter has also developed the concept of value chain. The into various components:

VALUE

CHAIN splits a company operations      

In-bound logistics. Manufacturing. Service. Sales and marketing. Administration. Out-bound logistics.

Essentially, the value chain concept explains how value is created in a business. It draws attention to the internal choices which a company

Positioning

173

makes in determining how it is going to compete. In recent years this has begun to be called ―the business model‖ — to indicate that it is specific to a particular business. According to Porter, companies must compete on one of three planks: differentiation, cost leadership, and focus. Porter calls these generic strategies. DIFFERENTIATION means a company sets out to add more value to target customers (perceived and real) than competitors do. COST LEADERSHIP means a company achieves parity of value with competitors, but at a lower cost. A FOCUS strategy involves concentrating only on a small segment of target customers and their specific needs. Such a strategy aims at leveraging the advantage of specialization, either through cost control or superior customization while serving a narrowly defined customer segment. A company must choose one generic strategy, otherwise it will get stuck in the middle. (See also: COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE, COMPETITIVE STRATEGY, VALUE CHAIN)

Positioning The process of creating and maintaining a distinctive place in the market for an organization and / or its individual brands. The aim is to steal a march on competitors by offering something different. This is also often called unique selling proposition. To be effective, the differences must be important, relevant, noticed and understood by consumers. The perceptions of consumers play a key role in the positioning process. Positioning may erode over time as competitors copy or improve upon the points of difference, or as the needs of the target audience change. In such circumstances, an organization may have to reposition itself. Positioning is all too often defined very narrowly, with a sole focus on distinctive product attributes that offer benefits to consumers. What is forgotten is that many organizations and / or brands succeed in the market place because of advantages other than those based on product differences, such as supply chain and organizational capabilities. Repositioning can be done on these planks as well.

174

Price / EARNINGS RATIO (P / E)

Price / Earnings Ratio (P / E) The ratio of the market price of a company‘s share to its earnings per share. It is an indication of how the market expects the company to perform in the future. A high P / E generally implies the company is expected to do well.

Process Innovation A process can be viewed as a set of activities designed to produce a specified output for a particular customer or market. Thus a manufacturing firm has various processes such as product development, customer acquisition, procurement, manufacturing, logistics, after sales service, information management, human resources management and planning. Process innovation implies creating a significant improvement in one or more of these processes. Process innovation begins with a good understanding of who the customers are and what they expect from it. Process innovation must not be confused with process improvement which is incremental in nature. Process improvements take the existing process as given, but process innovations question its basic assumptions. Michael Hammer* uses the term operational innovation which for all practical purposes refers to process innovation. As he puts it, ―Operational innovation should not be confused with operational improvement or operational excellence. These terms refer to achieving high performance via existing modes of operation ensuring that work is done as it ought to be to reduce errors, costs and delays but without fundamentally changing how that work gets accomplished. Operational innovation means coming up with entirely new ways of filling orders, developing products, providing customer service or doing any other activity that an enterprise performs.‖ Successful process innovations typically demand technological and organizational enablers. While information technology has driven many process innovations in recent times, there are various other drivers that must not be ignored. For example, the concept of LEAN MANUFACTURING pioneered by Toyota, is driven more by common sense and a new mindset than by technology. *

Hammer, Michael. ―Deep Change‖, Harvard Business Review, April 2004, pp. 84-93.

Process INNOVATION

175

Process innovation must begin with the identification of processes that are ripe candidates for innovation. Focusing on those processes which require immediate improvement makes sense because, as in any other change initiative, quick results will build the momentum. If the company is striving for incremental improvement, it is sufficient to work with many narrowly defined processes. But when the objective is radical process change, a process must be defined as broadly as possible. A company like Toyota has been able to get well ahead of competitors by ongoing improvements in all aspects of operations including procurement, manufacturing, vendor management and logistics. According to Davenport*, four criteria can be used to guide process selection: 1.

Centrality of the Process:

The processes that are most central to accomplishing the organization‘s goals must be selected. 2. Process Health: Processes that are currently problematic and in obvious need of improvement must be chosen. 3. Process Qualification: The cultural and political climate of a target process must be guaged. Only processes that have a committed sponsor and exhibit a pressing business need for improvement must be selected. 4. Manageable Project Scope: The process must be defined in such a way that the project scope is manageable. Information can play a number of supporting roles in a company‘s efforts to make processes more efficient and effective. Just the addition of information to a process can sometimes lead to radical performance improvements. Information can also be used to measure and monitor process performance, integrate activities within and across processes, customize processes for particular customers, and facilitate longer-term planning and process optimization. Information can also be used to better integrate process activities both within a process and across multiple processes. Davenport has listed nine different ways of supporting process innovation with information technology (IT): *

Devenpart, Thoms H., Process Innovation — Reengineering Work through Information Technology, Harvard Business School Press, 1993.

176

1. 2. 3. 4.

5.

6. 7.

8. 9.

Process LIFE CYCLE

Automational:

IT can be used to automate several processes. IT can be used within a process to capture information about process performance and to improve it. Analytical: In processes that involve analysis of information, IT can make the decision-making process more efficient and effective. Sequential: IT can enable changes in the sequence of processes or transform a process from sequential to parallel in order to reduce process cycle-time. Tracking: Effective execution of some process designs, notably those employed by firms in the transportation and logistics industries, requires a high degree of monitoring and tracking. IT can play a key role here. Geographical: A key benefit of IT is the ability to overcome geographical barriers. Integrative: More and more companies are finding it difficult to radically improve process performance for highly segmented tasks split across many jobs. IT can help integrate various aspects of a product or service delivery process. Intellectual: Many companies are increasingly using IT to capture and disseminate knowledge. Disintermediating: In some industries, human intermediaries are inefficient for passing information between parties. This is particularly so in case of transactions such as stock brokerage or parts location. IT can play a key role here. (See also: INNOVATION, PRODUCT INNOVATION) Informational:

Process Life Cycle Just like the product life cycle, there is also a process life cycle. During the formative period of a new product, the manufacturing processes are usually crude and inefficient. Typically, such processes employ skilled labor working with general-purpose machinery and tools. There are no specialized tools or machines. It is the product itself at this point that matters. But processes tend to improve as the rate of product innovation decreases. Finally, when an industry standard is determined, products are likely to become similar in terms of functions and features. Incremental changes in products made by competitors will tend to be copied rapidly. Under these circumstances, processes hold the key to stealing a march on competitors.

Product INNOVATION

177

(See also: PRODUCT LIFE CYCLE)

Process Networks A useful mechanism for facilitating knowledge transfer across organizations. According to John Hagel III and John Seely Brown*, world class companies leverage such networks to gain more flexible access to specialized capabilities on a global scale. Process networks seek to coordinate activities across multiple tiers of enterprises within a business process. These networks attempt to ensure that resources are flexibly provided in response to specific market demand. Such networks are characterized by loose coupling and require formal orchestrators to function effectively. Relatively independent modules of activity are designated, with clear ownership and accountability for each module. The performance levels that each module must meet at the interfaces connecting it with other modules are defined. Module owners can make improvements so long as they comply with the performance requirements. Process networks are not only more scalable but are also more effective in tapping the knowledge of a large number of specialized participants in a flexible way to provide more value to customers. (See also: DYNAMIC CAPABILITY BUILDING, OFFSHORING, OUTSOURCING)

Product Innovation Developing and launching new products that appeal to customers. It involves:    

Finding out and anticipating what customers might need or want; Generating ideas; Developing and launching a product; Providing various support services to keep customers happy.

A stream of successful product introductions can generate rapid sales and profit growth. A good example is Sony which came out with 170 new models of the original Walkman during the period, 1981-89. Similarly, Intel‘s market leadership has been facilitated by the launch of a *

The Only Sustainable Edge: Why Business Strategy Depends on Productive Friction and Dynamic Specialization, Harvard Business School Press, 2005.

178

Product INNOVATION

series of microprocessors, each with greater capabilities. Microsoft, which has introduced several versions of its PC operating systems and applications software, is another good example. Companies which are good at product innovation have some common attributes: 



 

 

An intuitive understanding of what customers need and want. They do not depend excessively on formal market research. The discipline, skills, methods and processes to optimize product design and manufacturing. Effective and optimal use of resources. Short lead times to out-innovate competitors. They renew and expand product lines faster. Willingness to cannibalize their own products. Leaving people free and encouraging creativity by eliminating bureaucratic procedures.

In short, product innovation calls for a culture that encourages individual initiative, a good understanding of the market, and disciplined execution. Product innovation is all about generating new ideas, developing products and selling it in the market. So the biggest challenge in product innovation is often not technology, but marketing. According to Deschamps and Nayak*, a well-designed product development process is made up of six interlocking and mutually reinforcing sub processes:      

*

Idea management; Intelligence development; Technology and resource development; Product / Technology strategy development and planning; Project and program management; Product support.

Deschamps, Jean-Philippe and Nayak, Ranganath, Product Juggernauts: How Companies Mobilize to Generate a Stream of Market Winners, Harvard Business School Press, 1995.

Product INNOVATION

179

Ideas are important for any business. But they need to be tapped efficiently. High performance businesses develop a structured process for idea management. They continually generate, collect, evaluate, screen, and rank ideas. They also have mechanisms to explore and validate ideas in the market and in the labs before they are commercialized and scaled up. The intelligence development process facilitates the collection of relevant data and trends on customers, competitors, and technologies. This process transforms such data into information and insights and uses that intelligence to seed other processes. Most successful companies cultivate intelligence development as their secret competitive weapon. Technology and resource development facilitate the development within the company of a range of new technologies, skills, and competencies for future product generations. Not all resources, however, have to be internal to the corporation. Establishing strategic alliances and close relationships with suppliers is also a part of this process. Product and technology strategy development and planning determine where, how, and with what frequency the company intends to launch new products. It is an integrative process, combining product plans and technological development plans. It should lead to plans determining which new products will be introduced, and when and how the company‘s developmental capacity will meet the new demands of products. Project and program management is where unresolved problems such as deficiencies in market insight, know-how, strategies, and plans show up. Product support starts at the launch of the product and typically ends only when the product is withdrawn. In industries that depend on technical service or applications engineering to add value to customers, this process is vital to success. Application-intensive industries such as performance chemicals, resins and polymers devote a significant portion of their total technical resources to supporting their products. Product development demands major resource commitments. So resources must be managed carefully. If too few new products are being developed, the solution is not necessarily increased spending. Companies that are committed to innovation must employ an investment portfolio approach, with the right mix of incremental improvements, and breakthrough ideas that will deliver consistent returns in the long run.

180

Product LIFE CYCLE (PLC)

They should also pursue a disciplined approach. Only products with real potential for specific markets should make it to the launch stage. And once they have reached that stage, they need marketing campaigns that are aligned with their sales potential. Companies must aim at getting the right product to the right consumer at a cost that is in line with the product‘s sales potential. Keeping the breakeven point low is crucial to the success of most innovation. Well-managed companies have a disciplined approach to dealing with new ideas*. Great ideas are often hard to sell early on, and premature demand for numbers and analysis can kill creativity. Nevertheless, an explicit process of business justification is desirable. The key lies in identifying specific points in the concept-to-launch process, where a project that is not showing promise can be stopped. Perhaps the quickest way to avoid the problem is to call for a ―go-no-go‖ decision at three specific stages in the product launch process. The first stage must appear early on after concept development. At this time, the target market for the product should be clearly identified, along with a realistic marketing plan and a rough estimate of marketing costs for different scenarios. The next stage can come after the commercialization model has been developed. The product manager must demonstrate that the product can realistically deliver on its claim. The company should be confident about creating sufficient excitement among the customers. The last vetting can come at the time of largescale commercial launch, when it should be clear that there is a compelling marketing plan in place to reach targeted sub-segments, a plan for meeting all channel requirements, and if it is a consumer product, a plan for merchandizing the product (if it is a consumer product) so that it stands out among competing brands in the store. (See also: INNOVATION, PROCESS INNOVATION)

Product Life Cycle (PLC) A theory that describes the four stages that a new product goes through from birth to death. These four stages are:

*

Dalens Francois, Gell Jeff, Rutstein Carl and Birge, Robert, Winning The New Product War, www.bcg.com

Product PLATFORM

1.

181

Introduction:

The slow sales growth that follows the introduction of a new product; 2. Growth: The rapid sales growth that accompanies product acceptance; 3. Maturity: The plateauing of sales growth when the product has been accepted by most potential buyers; and 4. Decline: The decline of sales that results as the product is replaced (by a substitute) or becomes increasingly unappealing to customers. Different strategies are required at different stages of the life cycle. An important implication of the product life cycle (PLC) theory is that every product eventually declines and dies. So it is necessary for firms to launch new products from time to time. Ideally, new products should be financed from the cash flows generated by mature brands, and should be launched before maturity turns to decline. During the development phase, there is substantial negative cash flow on account of R&D, market research, and setting up a production line. As demand grows, more cash must be ploughed into expanding factory capacity. Once sales have stabilized, the firm can reap the cash rewards from their success in the decline phase. Brands with a high market share can provide the cash for developing replacement products. Whether products do indeed go through these stages in any systematic, predictable way is still debated. The PLC concept is primarily applicable to product forms, less to product classes, and even less to individual brands. If the item need be bought only once then market saturation can hit demand. If the item‘s sales have grown because of fashion, it is likely that they will die quite quickly for the same reason. A product may also go out of existence quickly because of rapid technological obsolescence. (See also: BCG GROWTH-SHARE MATRIX, PROCESS LIFE CYCLE)

Product Platform Building blocks that form the foundation for a series of closely related products. Product platforms generate ECONOMIES OF SCOPE by reuse of components and knowledge. In the automobile Industry, several individual car models may share the same basic frame, suspension and trans-

182

Prospect THEORY

mission even if the shape, look and feel are important. The Sony Walkman had 160 variations and four major technical innovations between 1980 and 1990, all of which were based on the initial platform. Black & Decker rationalized its hundreds of products into a set of product families, using a platform approach. The platform approach may not be effective when rapid changes in technology, customer needs or competitors‘ offerings can demand discontinuous new products rather than incremental change. (See also: PLATFORM LEADERSHIP, PRODUCT INNOVATION)

Prospect Theory Developed in 1979 by Daniel Kahneman and Amos Tversky, prospect theory helps to describe how people make choices in situations where they have to decide between alternatives that involve risk. It is a more realistic alternative to the well-known expected utility theory. Starting from empirical evidence, prospect theory describes how individuals evaluate potential losses and gains. Kahneman and Tversky found that behavioral issues significantly influence decision making. Their research indicates that people do not always follow the rules of rational choice. Examples of such behavior include: 1.

The Certainty Effect:

People over-weight outcomes that are certain, relative to outcomes that are merely probable. Thus, there is a preference for a sure gain over a larger gain that is merely probable. ―A bird in hand is worth two in the bush.‖ 2. The Reflection Effect: There is a risk-seeking preference for a loss that is merely probable, compared to a smaller loss that is certain. This can be seen in the way people buy insurance packages or in the way they respond to product pricing and promotions. 3. The Isolation Effect: People simplify problems by disregarding the components that are common to alternatives and focus only on the differences. So inconsistent preferences are obtained when choices are presented in different ways. This can be seen in the ways consumers make decisions. Functionally similar products might have the same price, but if one brand presents the price in a distinctive way, it may be seen very differently. (See also: DECISION MAKING)

Pygmalion EFFECT

183

Purpose-Process-People Doctrine A doctrine which holds that the main task of top management is to shape the behavior of people and create an environment that enables them to take initiative, cooperate and learn. This is unlike the traditional STRATEGY-STRUCTURE-SYSTEM doctrine in which senior managers concentrate on allocating resources, assigning responsibilities and controlling efficient execution. The purpose-process-people doctrine, on the other hand, holds that the top management must change its role from being the designer of corporate strategy to being the shaper of a broader institutional purpose, from being the architect of a formal structure to being the builder of organizational processes and from managing systems to developing and molding people. Top management must infuse the company with an energizing purpose — a sense of ambition, a set of values, an overall identity. Rather than trying to formulate strategy, top management must attempt to shape the organizational context. Structure is the framework within which companies can develop the organizational processes, and management roles and relationships that support their competitive capability. But structure is only the organization‘s anatomy. A thorough understanding of the organization‘s physiology, the processes and relationships that are the company‘s lifeblood and its psychology, the culture and values of employees, is also vital. Instead of regularly intervening with corrective action, top executives need to find ways to encourage self monitoring, self correcting behavior. According to Sumantra GHOSHAL and Christopher BARTLETT, the strategy paradigm is shifting away from strategy-structure-systems to purpose-process-people. (See also: BARTLETT, CHRISTOPHER; CORPORATE PURPOSE; GHOSHAL, SUMANTRA)

Pygmalion Effect Postulate which holds that if people start believing in themselves, they prove to be effective. Constant praise by the superior makes subordinates start believing they are good. Soon they become highly productive. On the other hand, if they are regularly reminded about their shortcomings, they become de-motivated and ineffective.

184

Pygmalion EFFECT

(See also: MOTIVATION)

Quinn, JAMES BRIAN

185

Q q-theory A theory of investment behavior which suggests that firms tend to invest so long as the value of their shares exceeds the replacement cost of the firm‘s physical. Developed by economist James Tobin, q-theory encompasses other theories of investment in a simple framework. q is the ratio of the value of a firm to the replacement cost of the assets of the firm, including machines, buildings, etc. If q is greater than 1, the firm should expand. If q is less than 1, it will make sense to sell off the assets rather than try to use them.

Quinn, James Brian A well known scholar in the area of strategic management, Quinn has suggested that strategic management is not primarily an analytical or rational activity. Strategic decisions typically evolve in part random — or erratic — and part logical way. In 1980, Quinn coined the expression ―logical incrementalism‖ to capture this idea. Quinn‘s view is that managers tend to make strategic decisions according to perceptions of incremental opportunities which appear to add to what they already have. (See also: STRATEGIC PLANNING)

186

Real OPTIONS

R Real Options Real options build on the basic theory of financial options, by putting a value on the various options available in a new project subjected to various uncertainties. Thus, a timing option, in the form of a delayed expansion in capacity can create value in a situation of uncertain demand. Putting up a plant in an overseas market currently fed by exports may generate new growth options. An exit option in the form of a plant closure increases the value of the investment decision. Viewing strategic decisions as options and then using information from financial markets to value these options can greatly enhance the quality of strategic planning. Traditional valuation tools like NET PRESENT VALUE have limited flexibility. This is a handicap in an uncertain environment in which various outcomes which demand a range of strategic responses are possible. Thinking of an investment in terms of options allows uncertainty to be taken into account. Managers can identify the embedded options, evaluate the conditions under which they may be exercised, and finally judge whether the aggregate value of the options compensates for any shortfall in the present value of the project‘s cash flows. This ensures that good projects are not rejected because of excessive caution on the part of managers.

Regulatory Capture A situation where a regulator sometimes might support the interests of the industry it is supposed to be regulating. This may be so because the regulator recognizes that its own self-interest requires a healthy industry to regulate, or because the social context within which the regulator operates is highly supportive of the industry. Or, because the regulator does not want to become controversial by raising tough questions.

Resource-based THEORIES

187

Resource-based Theories Focus on the resources of the firm, unlike Michael Porter‘s positioning school that looks at how the firm is placed vis-à-vis other players in the industry. During the 1980s and early 1990s, numerous writers were critical of the market-based view of strategy. If a firm‘s position in an industry was the key determining criterion for success, why did firms in the same industry with similar market positions differ considerably in their performance? The resource-based view of strategy suggests that a firm‘s competitive advantage is dependent on its ability to develop and acquire competencies. Assets and capabilities are the building blocks for distinctive competencies. Tangible assets include production facilities, raw materials, financial resources, real estate, and computers. Intangible assets include brand names, company reputation, technical knowledge, patents and trademarks and accumulated experience within an organization. Organizational capabilities are the skills needed to transform inputs into output. Once managers identify their firm‘s resources, they must examine which of those resources represent real strengths. Resources must be broken down into more specific competencies. Organizational processes and combinations of resources must be considered, not only isolated assets or capabilities. The VALUE CHAIN must be analyzed to uncover organizational capabilities, activities, and processes that are valuable, potential sources of competitive advantage. Some guidelines can be useful here: 

   

Does the resource help fulfill a customer‘s need better than those of the firm‘s competitors? Resource Scarcity: Is the resource in short supply? Replication: Is the resource easily copied or acquired? Value Capture: Who actually gets the profit created by a resource? Durability: How rapidly will the resource depreciate? Competitive Superiority:

Following a systematic assessment of internal resources, these resources can be deployed in an optimal way. (See also: CORE COMPETENCE)

188

Responsiveness PLANNING

Responsiveness Planning A term coined by Russell ACKOFF to describe the designing of an organization so that deviations from the expected can be quickly detected and suitable responses can be made. Obviously, some future events are difficult to anticipate. Examples include catastrophes and technological breakthroughs. Here, companies can use responsiveness planning. Responsiveness planning, a conceptually elegant way of identifying and managing risks, essentially consists of building responsiveness and flexibility into the organization.

Reverse Engineering A process of disassembling a product of another company to find out how it works, with the intention of replicating some or all of its functions in another product. Some tinkering is done with the design to avoid violation of intellectual property rights. India‘s leading pharma companies like Ranbaxy and Dr. Reddy‘s have been masters of reverse engineering, as indeed were the Japanese in the 1960s. The practice for a while won them the dubious reputation of being cheap imitators. The Japanese, however, built on what they learnt from reverse engineering to gradually build global leadership in consumer electronics, automobiles, etc.

Risk Threat to a firm‘s survival, stability or profitability. Risks have multiplied in today‘s fast changing environment. Risks can be broadly divided into two categories: business and financial: 



Business Risk

is the uncertainty associated with the ability to sell the company‘s product(s) at an appropriate price. Financial Risk arises from the use of debt in the capital. The higher the debt component in the capital structure, more the risk.

The Economist Intelligence Unit divides risks into four broad categories: 1.

Hazard Risk

is related to natural hazards, accidents, fire, etc. that can

be insured. 2.

Financial Risk

has to do with volatility in interest rates and exchange rates, defaults on loans, asset-liability mismatch, etc.

Rivalry

3.

189

Operational Risk

is associated with systems, processes and people and deals with succession planning, human resources, information technology, control systems and compliance with regulations. 4. Strategic Risk stems from an inability to adjust to changes in the environment, such as changes in customer priorities, competitive conditions and geopolitical developments. From the perspective of corporate strategy, Peter DRUCKER probably offers the best risk management perspective. In his book, Managing for Results, Drucker identified four types of risk at a macro level: 1. The risk that is built into the very nature of the business and which cannot be avoided. 2. The risk one can afford to take. 3. The risk one cannot afford to take. 4. The risk one cannot afford not to take. (See also: ENTERPRISE RISK MANAGEMENT)

Rivalry The term refers to the intensity of competitive behavior within an industry. The degree of rivalry determines the attractiveness of the industry. In general, the higher the rivalry, the lower the profit margins. Rivalry generally increases when there are many competitors who are more or less equally strong. In an industry dominated by one or a few firms, rivalry tends to be less.* Rivalry is high when firms are continuously trying to outsmart their rivals, especially through price cuts. Rivalry is low when firms are content with the status quo, happy with their market shares, and are unwilling to upset the balance of the industry by instigating a price war. Various factors influence the intensity of rivalry: 

*

When an industry is growing slowly, the intensity of competition increases. On the other hand when an industry is growing fast, just keeping up with the industry increases the sales volume. Further, in a growing industry the focus is on exploiting growth opportunities rather than countering competitors.

From the book The Essence of Competitive Strategy by David Faulkner and Cliff Bowman, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.

190















Rivalry

When fixed costs are high relative to value added, there is tremendous pressure to utilize capacity. This can lead to price cutting and, consequently, intense rivalry. When a product is perishable or difficult to store, price cutting may be necessary to reduce stocks. This can intensify competition. Product differentiation builds customer loyalty and tends to reduce the intensity of competition. Where scope for differentiation is minimal, rivalry tends to be intense. SWITCHING COSTS are costs incurred by the buyer in moving from one supplier to another. If switching costs are low, buyers are able to switch between suppliers without any penalty. This increases rivalry. When capacity can be added only in large increments, there are frequent situations of overcapacity, leading to intense rivalry. When firms consider the industry to be strategically important for them, they may be prepared to give up profits and compete vigorously. This intensifies competition. High exit barriers can increase rivalry. (See also: FIVE FORCES MODEL)

Scenario PLANNING

191

S Satisficing Concept which holds that managers do not take optimal decisions after considering all relevant factors. Instead, they tend to take what they consider to be the most sensible decision under the circumstances, based on the information available. Herbert A. SIMON coined the term ―satisficing planning‖ to describe efforts to attain some level of satisfaction, not necessarily the maximum level. Satisficing means doing well enough, which may not necessarily be the best. Satisficers argue that it is better to produce a feasible plan than an optimal plan that is not feasible. But as ACKOFF has pointed out, this is based on a wrong belief that consideration of feasibility cannot be incorporated into the consideration of optimality. It is always possible to seek the best feasible plan.

Scenario Planning The construction of a number of scenarios, each describing a possible future state. Scenario planning enables firms to plan for the future by visualizing different ways in which the external environment may evolve. It can help organizations deal with uncertainty more effectively. Scenario building stimulates creative thinking and helps identify major opportunities and threats in the future by taking into account various political, social, economic and technological factors. By contemplating a range of possible futures, better informed decisions can be taken and linkages between apparently unrelated factors identified. Scenarios allow discussions to be more uninhibited, help challenge established views and enable new ideas to be tested. Seeing reality from different perspectives reduces the risk of increasing commitment to failing strategies. Formal scenario planning emerged during the Second World War when it was used as a part of military strategy as countries prepared themselves for different contingencies. Since then the use of scenario

192

S-Curve

planning has become increasingly popular. One company which has used scenario planning very effectively is Royal Dutch Shell. The basic premise behind scenario planning is that reacting in ad hoc fashion to external events is not desirable. Understanding long-term trends enables companies to prepare for different future scenarios. It also helps a company to identify the scenarios for which its strengths and competencies are particularly suited. At the same time, by identifying the scenarios for which it is least prepared, a company can invest in building the required competencies. In extreme cases, it can even divest businesses, which do not look promising in the long run. (See also: DISCOVERY DRIVEN PLANNING, STRATEGIC PLANNING)

S-Curve Commonly used to describe the product life cycle in technology evolution, S-curve also a useful tool for managing TECHNOLOGY RISK. Foster* describes the S curve as the relationship between the effort put into improving a product or process, and the results one gets back for that investment. As technological limits are reached, the cost of making progress accelerates dramatically. Eventually, a point is reached beyond which no meaningful gains in performance can be achieved by improving technology. Thereafter, other factors — such as the efficiency of marketing, purchasing and manufacturing — begin to determine the success of the business. (See also: TECHNOLOGY RISK)

Senge, Peter Famous for the concept of the learning organization, which effectively implies a shift from thinking about strategic issues as part of a formal, bureaucratic process to its being completely infused with organizational learning throughout the organization. In his bestseller, The Fifth Discipline (1990), Senge explains how organizations can achieve success by mastering five disciplines: 1. 2. *

Personal Mastery

or self-discipline on the part of all members; of stereotypical mental models;

Continual Challenge

Foster R., The S-Curve: A New Forecasting Tool, Innovation: The Attacker’s Advantage, Summit Books, Simon and Schuster, 1996.

Simple STRUCTURE

193

3. The creation of a shared vision; 4. Commitment to team learning rather than conflict; and 5. Systems thinking, a holistic way of looking at problems. Systems thinking is a philosophy which realizes it is not possible to understand complexity by breaking the whole down into parts. The dynamic system has to be understood as a whole. Senge identifies a number of systems archetypes to illustrate this. For example, if a successful group is given more resources at the expense of other, less successful groups, the latter are even less likely to succeed. (See also: INNOVATOR’S DILEMMA, ORGANIZATIONAL LEARNING)

Service Level Agreement (SLA) Agreements that establish the dimensions of service and relationship between two or more departments of an organization. Some organizations formalize the internal customer concept by insisting on service level agreements (SLAs), considering these useful in establishing boundaries of responsibility and facilitating inter departmental collaboration, especially if there have been coordination problems or inter departmental conflicts in the past.

Shareholder Value The primary goal of any listed company is to increase the wealth of its shareholders. For this to happen, the returns to shareholders should outperform certain benchmarks such as the cost of capital. In essence, shareholders‘ money should be used to earn a higher return than they could earn themselves, for example by investing in risk free bonds.

Simple Structure A structure used by organizations in their early days. When the organization is small and activities are easy to track and monitor, all functions can report directly to the CEO or the business owner. Such a structure, however, becomes increasingly inappropriate as the size of an organization increases. (See also: ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE)

194

Simon, HERBERT A.

Simon, Herbert A. One of the few Nobel Prize winners till date in the field of management. Simon‘s insights about how the limitations of the human brain affect the functioning of organizations are truly landmark. Managers are bombarded with choices and decisions but they possess only finite information storage and processing capabilities. They tend to compensate for the inability to consider and evaluate all the available choices by selecting ―good enough‖ options, rather than the ―optimal‖ solutions. Simon‘s theory of the firm is based on four main ideas:  First, organizations are not the abstract, one-dimensional entities often depicted by economists. They are complex entities, made up of diverse individuals and interests, all of which are held together by a variety of ―deals‖ and coalitions, ranging from explicit contracts to implicit agreements.  Second, organizations do not have a complete list of alternatives. Nor do they have complete knowledge about the consequences of their decisions and actions.  Third, rather than searching for optimal solutions, organizations distinguish between outcomes that are ―good enough‖ and those that are not.  Fourth, much human behavior involves following rules, rather than rationally evaluating the expected consequences of a given action. (See also: DECISION MAKING, SATISFICING)

Six Sigma A disciplined, data driven approach that eliminates waste, improves productivity and helps to develop and deliver products and services of high quality. The word sigma is a statistical term that measures how far a given process deviates from perfection. The central idea behind six sigma is to measure how many defects there are in a process, and systematically figure out how to eliminate them and get as close to zero defects as possible. A six sigma quality level means only 3.4 defects per million opportunities. Six sigma tries to analyze the root cause of business problems and solve them. The methodology used in six sigma is popularly called DMAIC.

Sloan, ALFRED P.

D— M— A— I— C—

195

Define the goals and customer (internal and external) requirements. Measure the current performance. Analyze the performance and determine the root causes of defects. Improve the process by eliminating the root causes of defects Control the vital factors and implement process control systems.

The six sigma concept was developed by Motorola in 1979. Within 15 years, Motorola was operating at Six Sigma in many of its manufacturing units. Motorola saved billions of dollars earlier spent correcting defects on the production line and recalling products from the market. Since then many other companies, such as GE, have embarked a Six Sigma. Many of India‘s leading software companies have also enthusiastically embraced six sigma.

Skimming A strategy for pricing a new product at such a high level that it is only purchased by a small segment consisting of trend-setters, enthusiasts, or the very rich. High pricing helps in establishing an up-market image for the product and ensures that the initial buyers are charged the high price they are willing to pay. The price is later lowered to attract the mass market. But the risk is that a high price may make it easy for a competitor to launch a successful, lower priced imitation. By failing to maximize sales at the start, the firm may not be able to hold on to a viable market share when competitors arrive. (See also: STRATEGIC PRICING)

Skunk Work A covert research project undertaken by a small, independent group, away from the mainstream operations of an organization. Increasingly, companies are realizing that the key to attracting and retaining the best scientists lies in offering freedom to experiment. The idea of skunk works is to allow initiative to blossom by shielding it from the bureaucracy of the mainstream organization.

Sloan, Alfred P. One of the greatest management practitioners in business history. Sloan led General Motors in its formative years, pioneered the DIVISIONAL STRUCTURE of a business organization. He set up a number of centralized

196

Slywotzky, ADRIAN J.

functions and framed policies to help rationalize the work of the various divisions and to achieve synergy within the corporation. Sloan attempted to create a deliberate tension between ―maximized decentralization‖ and ―proper control‖. The new structure left the broad strategic decisions as to the allocation of existing resources and the acquisition of new ones in the hands of a top team of generalists. Divisional executives could run the business, while general officers set the goals and policies and provided overall appraisal. Sloan‘s book, My Years at General Motors is a business classic, and a must read for any practicing manager. (See also: ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE)

Slywotzky, Adrian J. Famous for the idea of value migration, which means that businesses often need to reinvent how they add value as industries and their markets change. This might, for example, involve: 

 

Getting rid of activities which add little value, dilute value, or destroy value; Exploiting new ways of distribution; and Rebundling or unbundling existing products or services.

In a sense, Slywotzky emphasizes the importance of business model innovation, i.e. changing the very rules of the game by coming up with a new way of doing business. (See also: BUSINESS MODEL, INNOVATION)

Span of Control The range of resources for which a manager is given decision rights and held accountable for performance. In more simple terms, it is the number of subordinates answerable directly to a manager. The span of control is ―wide‖ if the manager has many direct subordinates and ―narrow‖ if there are few. A wide span of control has several advantages. The boss has less time for each subordinate and is effectively forced to delegate. Fewer layers of hierarchy are needed, thereby improving vertical communication. On the other hand, a narrow span of control is useful when tighter management supervision may be necessary. There is less stress involved

Stakeholders

197

for each employee as the scope of each job is limited. Moreover, as there are more layers of hierarchy, there are more frequent promotion opportunities, i.e. the career ladder has more rungs. The actual span of control chosen depends on what is more important, customer responsiveness or cost control. For example, when customers are price sensitive, the span of control must be wide for managers of internal operating functions to supply inputs to market facing units efficiently and cost effectively. Market facing managers usually want a wide span of control to maximize customer responsiveness. When the basis for competing is tailoring products and services to suit the tastes and needs of customers in particular geographic regions, a significant portion of value creation must be located close to the customer. So regional managers have a wide span of control. (See also: ORGANIZATIONAL DESIGN)

Spender, J. C. Famous for his concept of ―strategic recipes‖, the taken-for-granted rules of strategic decision making. Strategic recipes are founded on things that have worked, or not worked, in the past. These recipes relate back to a past group, or individual, strategic situations. When a new leader is appointed, particularly from the outside, these are likely to change or be challenged.

Stakeholders Groups including shareholders, employees, managers, creditors, suppliers, contractors, agents, distributors, customers and the local community whose interests are directly or indirectly impacted by the company‘s activities. Different stakeholders wish to influence the decision making within the organization to serve their own interests. For example, customers will want lower prices, suppliers will want prompt payments, employees will want higher wages, shareholders will want a return from their investment of capital and the society will expect the environment to be protected. Corporations have to try and balance these different expectations. (See also: CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY)

198

Strategic ADVANTAGE

Strategic Advantage A term popularly used in the context of globalization. Global companies try to leverage two kinds of advantage while competing — comparative and strategic. COMPARATIVE ADVANTAGE results when VALUE CHAIN activities are performed in cheaper locations. Beyond a point, however, an obsession with comparative advantage may be counter productive. Strategic advantages must not be overlooked. Any advantage which will accrue in the long run, but which cannot be easily quantified in monetary terms immediately can be considered a strategic advantage. In other words, if comparative advantages help in cutting costs in the short run, strategic advantages help in adding value in the long run. The US is a strategically important market for products such as investment banking, computer software, pharmaceuticals and automobiles. France is an important country for cosmetics and perfumes, while Japan is the world leader in consumer electronics. These are not the cheapest locations in the world but a presence in these markets is important to keep in touch with highly sophisticated customers and leverage the innovations that are going on. In some cases, while generating strategic advantages, comparative disadvantages such as expensive labor can be circumvented through ingenuity and meticulous planning. Nicholas Hayek*, CEO of Switzerland based SMH which makes the world famous Swatch watches, once argued that if a company is determined to develop low cost methods of manufacturing, it can do so no matter what the location. Hayek‘s contention was that in watch manufacturing, as long as direct labor accounts for less than 10% of the total costs, Switzerland would remain an attractive place for manufacturing. (See also: GLOBAL LEVERAGE)

Strategic Alliance An agreement between two or more organizations to do business together in a mutually beneficial way. Through a strategic alliance, the companies involved can gain access to each other‘s resources, including markets, technologies, capital and people. Alliances can facilitate geograph*

Taylor, William, ―An interview with Swatch Titan, Nicolas Hayek,‖ Harvard Business Review, March-April 1993, pp. 99-110.

Strategic CHOICE

199

ic expansion, cost reduction and generation of manufacturing and other supply chain synergies. Alliances can also accelerate learning and increase market power. There are some general criteria that differentiate strategic alliances from conventional alliances. An alliance can be considered strategic if it is critical to the success of a core business goal or objective, blocks a competitive threat, or mitigates a significant risk to the business. Strategic alliances usually succeed when the partners involved see a mutual benefit and trust each other. In any alliance, mechanisms must be put in place to resolve tensions as and when they surface. Top management commitment and selection of capable executives to manage the alliance are key success factors. (See also: JOINT VENTURES)

Strategic Architecture A top management action plan which indicates the new competencies which will be needed in the coming years, how existing competencies have to be strengthened, how business processes have to be reoriented and relationships with external entities, especially customers have to be reconfigured.

Strategic Business Unit (SBU) A variation of the DIVISIONAL STRUCTURE, an SBU is an operating unit or division of a corporate group that determines its own strategy largely independent of the corporate center. Usually, the SBU will have its own distinct set of products and services, either for a customer segment or a geographical region. The terms SBU and profit center are often used interchangeably. In general, SBUs in Indian companies are far less empowered than the term would suggest. They are heavily dependent on headquarters for key resources and approval of important decisions. (See also: ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE)

Strategic Choice Strategy is all about making trade offs. A company must avoid competing in some segments while strengthening its presence in others in line with its strategic vision. The choices which the company makes must address three questions:

200

Strategic CONTROL

1. Who are the customers? 2. What are they looking for? 3. How can these products / services be offered most efficiently? These questions look simple but have profound implications for the viability of a strategy.

Strategic Control Linking operations to strategic goods. A strategic control system does so by using appropriate financial and non-financial information. It is concerned with tracking the strategy as it is being implemented, identifying problems or changes in underlying assumptions and making necessary adjustments. It involves controlling and guiding efforts as the action is taking place. To be effective, a strategic control system needs to be broken down into operational control systems which evaluate the progress in meeting annual objectives. For example, the company can identify key success factors like improved productivity, high employee morale, high product quality, increased EPS, growth in market share, etc. Performance standards can be established and deviations from standards evaluated as the strategy is implemented and the causes identified. Corrective action can then be taken. (See also: STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION)

Strategic Cost Management A holistic approach to managing costs, using a cross-functional perspective. A systematic approach to understanding cost drivers can create various benefits. Companies must have a good understanding of what activities add value and what do not. Accordingly, they must cut costs in some areas while increasing spending in others. (See also: ACTIVITY BASED COSTING)

Strategic Fit A term, which is commonly used in the context of diversification and mergers and acquisitions. Strategic fit refers to the extent to which the activities of two units of a business or two organizations complement each other. A good strategic fit exists when there is scope for cost reduction due to rationalization of activities or economies of scale. Strategic fit may also exist if there are cross selling opportunities, or if market

Strategic INFLECTION POINT

201

power can be increased. In general, it is easier to quantify the impact on costs, compared to that on the bottom line.

Strategic Groups* Groups of companies within an industry that have similar business models or similar strategies. Strategic groups is a concept that helps to bring sharper focus into strategy formulation. Strategic groups† are essentially companies who are aware of each other as competitors in a particular market, and who are collectively separated from other such groups by mobility barriers, such as scale economies, proprietary technology, possession of government licences, control over distribution, marketing power, and so forth. Such barriers vary widely in nature from group to group. Different companies within a group may relate to them to varying degrees. The number of groups within an industry and their composition depends on the dimensions used to define the groups. Strategists often use a two dimensional grid to display the position of each company along the two most important dimensions. The term was coined by Hunt (1972). Michael Porter (1980) developed the concept and explained strategic groups in terms of ―mobility barriers‖ or entry barriers. (See also: BARRIERS TO ENTRY, INDUSTRY)

Strategic Inflection Point A term coined by Andrew Grove, a former CEO of Intel to describe a dramatic change in competitive forces. At such times, the leaders must give up the past, see closely how the industry is evolving and find new ways of competing. Such a point of dramatic change in the industry is known as strategic inflection point. For example, the arrival of containers marked a strategic inflection point in the shipping industry. The introduction of the IBM PC was a strategic inflection point in the computer industry. The emergence of large discount store chains such as Giant and Big Bazaar may well turn out to be a strategic inflection point in the Indian retailing industry. The rise of virtual book stores like Amazon has also marked a point of severe * 

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Strategic_group

From the book, The Essence of Competitive Strategy by David Faulkner and Cliff Bowman, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.

202

Strategic INFLECTION POINT

discontinuity. The entry of low cost airlines like Air Deccan represents a strategic inflection point in the airline industry in India. In his fascinating book, Only the Paranoid Survive, Grove calls a very large change in one of the competitive forces in an industry, a ―10X‖ change, suggesting a sudden tenfold increase in the force. The business no longer responds to the company‘s actions as it used to in the past. Put another way, a strategic inflection point marks a shift from the old ways of doing business to new ones. Grove offers some useful insights to cope with such situations. When a technology break or other fundamental change comes their way, companies must grab it. Only the first mover has a true opportunity to gain time over its competitors. Companies must also show discipline by setting a price that the market will bear and then work hard to cut costs so that they can make money at that price. Cost plus pricing will not work in such cases. When is a change really a strategic inflection point? Most strategic inflection points, instead of coming with a bang, appear slowly. They are often not clear until we can look at the events in retrospect. So how do we know whether a change signals a strategic inflection point? Grove suggests managers must ask a few basic questions. Are we no longer clear about who the key competitors are? Does the company that in past years mattered the most to us and our business seem less important today? Does it look like another company is about to eclipse them? Are people, who for years have been very competent, suddenly becoming ineffective? The best way of identifying a strategic inflection point is to engage in a broad and intensive debate involving employees, people outside the company, customers and partners who not only have different areas of expertise but also have different interests. Such a debate can consume a lot of time and intellectual energy. It also takes courage to enter a debate the top management may lose, and which may expose weaknesses and encounter the disapproval of people. (See also: DISRUPTIVE TECHNOLOGY)

Strategic INNOVATION

203

Strategic Innovation A term introduced by Vijay GOVINDARAJAN and Chris TRIMBLE* to differentiate innovation which goes beyond process or product innovation. Strategic innovation addresses three fundamental questions:   

Who is the customer? What is the value the company offers to the customer? How does the company deliver that value?

Strategic innovation must not be left to chance. It must be viewed as the outcome of strategic experiments. These are deliberately planned strategic moves, which have ten common characteristics: 1. They have high revenue growth potential. 2. Typically, they target emerging or poorly defined industries. 3. Such experiments are launched before any other competitor and before any profit making formula has been established. 4. They depart from the company‘s proven business definition and its assumptions about how the business will succeed. 5. These experiments leverage some of the corporation‘s existing capabilities and assets in addition to capital. 6. They need some new knowledge and capabilities. 7. They involve discontinuous rather than incremental value creation. 8. They involve greater uncertainty across multiple functions. 9. They may remain unprofitable for several quarters or more. 10. Such experiments give no clear picture of performance early on. Strategic innovations involve unproven business models. Companies that are good at strategic innovation change the rules of the game and delight investors with sustained growth. Their business models are difficult to imitate. Govindarajan and Trimble have explained in great detail the challenges involved in implementing innovations. Typically, three stages are involved in any innovation. Creativity dominates the beginning of the innovation process. Efficiency is important towards the end of the innovation process. The middle involves unique challenges — a forgetting challenge, a borrowing challenge and a learning challenge. *

From the book, Ten Rules for Strategic Innovators: From Idea to Execution by Vijay Govindarajan, Chris Trimble, Harvard Business School Press, 2005.

204

Strategic INTENT

It is in the middle where companies often stumble. The new initiative must forget the parent company‘s business definition, assumptions, mindsets and biases to develop new competencies in order to exploit new business possibilities. The new initiative must learn how to borrow assets from the parent company. These may include manufacturing capacity, expertise, sales relationships, distribution channels, etc. The new initiative must learn and constantly improve its predictions of business performance. It must be able to resolve various critical unknowns in its business plan and put in place a working business model as quickly as possible. (See also: INNOVATION, PROCESS INNOVATION, PRODUCT INNOVATION, VALUE INNOVATION)

Strategic Intent An ambitious organizational goal that is disproportional to existing resources and capabilities. The top management articulates a desired leadership position and then establishes the criteria that the organization will use to chart its progress. The management must motivate people by communicating the value of the target, sustain enthusiasm by providing new operational definitions as circumstances change, and make the intent the basis for resource allocations. Strategic intent can be viewed as an animating dream that energizes a company by setting STRETCH targets, providing a sense of direction and conveying a sense of destiny to the company‘s employees. For example, Dabur‘s intent states: ―We intend to significantly accelerate profitable growth. To do this, we will*: ―Focus on growing our core brands across categories, reaching out to new geographies, within and outside India, and improve operational efficiencies by leveraging technology. ―Be the preferred company to meet the health and personal grooming needs of our target consumers with safe, efficacious, natural solutions by synthesizing our deep knowledge of ayurveda and herbs with modern science. ―Provide our consumers with innovative products within easy reach.

*

www.dabur.com

Strategic MANAGEMENT

205

―Build a platform to enable Dabur to become a global ayurvedic leader. ―Be a professionally managed employer of choice, attracting, developing and retaining quality personnel. ―Be responsible citizens with a commitment to environmental protection. ―Provide superior returns, relative to our peer group, to our shareholders.‖ (See also: BHAG)

Strategic Management Strategic management is concerned with the formulation and implementation of strategies to achieve the objectives of an organization. The major areas of strategic management are: 1. Articulating the corporate mission. 2. SWOT analysis. 3. Identifying various strategic options like capacity expansion, vertical integration and diversification. 4. Selecting the desired option(s). 5. Formulation of long term objectives and strategies consistent with the desired options. 6. Formulation of short term objectives and strategies consistent with the long term objectives and strategies. 7. Implementation. 8. Control. The term strategic implies heavy, irreversible resource commitments, long term implications and organization wide consequences. But strategic management is not only about the long term. Short term strategies and objectives must be aligned with the long term objectives to facilitate effective implementation. Strategic management leads to those crucial decisions which effectively determine the future of the firm. Indeed, the outcome of strategic management can make or break a firm. Consider the examples of Metal Box (India) Ltd, Asian Paints and Microsoft. Metal Box diversified into bearings manufacture with disastrous consequences. Asian Paints, on the other hand, successfully pursued a strategy of backward integration to

206

Strategic MARKET

become self sufficient in critical raw materials such as pentaerythrytol. Today, Asian Paints is far ahead of other leading paint manufacturers in the country including the MNCs. In the early days of the global computer industry, Microsoft decided to bet on software unlike many other companies which emphasized hardware or a combination of hardware and software. Microsoft also decided to focus on capturing the desktop. By setting its targets right, Microsoft went on to become one of the most successful companies in business history. In contrast, others like Apple struggled. (See also: MISSION, ENVIRONMENTAL SCANNING, STRATEGIC PLANNING, SWOT ANALYSIS, VISION)

Strategic Market A market, which scores high on either market potential or learning potential, or both, for a global company. By competing in such a market, a company can gain strategic advantages. The US is a strategic market for a wide range of goods and services, especially for information technology, pharmaceuticals and biotech. So, most European and Japanese MNCs have a major presence there. A strategic market demands significant commitment of human and material resources. Usually, such a market calls for a long-term orientation, i.e. making necessary investments and waiting patiently for results to come. The Japanese car makers like Toyota have succeeded globally by targeting the strategic US market. (See also: GLOBALIZATION, STRATEGIC ADVANTAGES)

Strategic Options

*

Based on a careful analysis of the external environment and the company‘s profile, various strategic options are available for a company. The company must choose one or more of these and commit resources accordingly. A few are listed below: 

Concentration:

The firm can continue to allocate resources for making more of the current products with the existing technology.

* For more detailed account refer to Strategic Management: Formulation, Implementation & Control by John A. Pearce and Richard B. Robinson, Irwin, 1995.

Strategic OPTIONS























207

Market Development:

Existing products can be modified slightly and sold to customers in related market areas. Alternatively, sales can be boosted by adding new distribution channels or by changing the promotion mix. Product Development: Existing products can be modified significantly and new related products created. They can then be sold to current customers through established channels. Innovation: A firm may decide to keep launching new products. Even if new players enter the market and increase rivalry, the firm can stay ahead by moving on to a new product. Horizontal Integration: The company can acquire one or more similar businesses which are operating at the same stage of production / marketing. Vertical Integration: The firm can enter businesses that either provide inputs or that serve as consumers for the firm‘s output. Joint Ventures: Two or more business partners may get together if each of them is lacking in some competencies or resources which are necessary for the success of the project. Concentric Diversification: Entry into a new business which is related to the existing business in terms of technology, markets or products is called concentric diversification. Conglomerate Diversification: The firm can enter an unrelated business based primarily on profit or growth considerations. Turnaround: By cutting costs, divesting assets and improving asset utilization, the firm tries to strengthen itself and restore profitability. Divestiture: The firm can sell the business or a major chunk of the business. This is the last resort, often considered after the failure of a turnaround strategy. Liquidation: The business may be sold (in parts or as a whole) for its tangible asset value and not as a going concern.

The above options need not be mutually exclusive. Based on the company MISSION and the SWOT ANALYSIS, one or more of the above options may be selected. Techniques which help in arriving at a desirable option include the BCG matrix and the GE 9 cell planning grid. (See also: BCG GROWTH-SHARE MATRIX, NINE-CELL PLANNING GRID, SWOT ANALYSIS)

208

Strategic PLANNING

Strategic Planning

*

The determination of the basic long-term goals and objectives of an organization, the adoption of courses of action, and the allocation of resources necessary to achieve these goals. Strategic planning involves several steps. 



The first step is to establish objectives, the results expected, what is to be done and where the primary emphasis is to be placed. The second step is to establish planning premises, i.e. assumptions about the anticipated environment.

These premises can be classified as external and internal, quatative and quantitative, controllable, and non-controllable. External premises can be classified into: general environment, (economic, technological, political, social and ethical conditions); the product market; and the factor market, (location of factory, labor, and materials, etc). Internal premises include capital investment, sales forecast and organization structure. Some premises can be quantified while others may be qualitative. Some premises are controllable, such as expansion into a new market, adoption of a research program or a new site for the headquarters. Non-controllable premises include population growth, price levels, tax rates, business cycles, etc. The semi controllable premises are the firm‘s assumptions about its share of the market, labor turnover, labor efficiency, and the company‘s pricing policy.  

 

The third step in planning is to identify alternative courses of action. The fourth step is to evaluate them by weighing the various factors in the light of premises and goals. The fifth step is adopting the plan. The final step is to give meaning to plans by putting in numbers and preparing budgets.

* See Mintzberg, Henry., The Rise and Fall of Strategic Planning: Reconceiving Roles for Planning, Plans, Planners, Simon & Schuster, 1993 and Mintzberg, Henry. ―The Fall and Rise of Strategic Planning‖, Harvard Business Review, January-February 1994, pp. 107-114.

Strategic PLANNING

209

Henry MINTZBERG has identified ten schools of strategic planning*: 











 





The Design School:

Aims at creating a fit between internal strengths and weaknesses and external threats and opportunities. The Planning School: Strategic planning is viewed as an intellectual, formal exercise using various techniques. The Positioning School: The company selects its strategic position after thoroughly analyzing the industry. Entrepreneurial School: The focus here shifts to the chief executive who largely relies on intuition to formulate strategy. The emphasis moves away from precise designs, plans or positions to vague visions or broad perspectives. Cognitive School: The focus here is on cognition and cognitive biases. Learning School: Strategies evolve as the organization learns more about the environment and the business. Power School: Strategy making is rooted in power. Cultural School: Views strategy formulation as a process rooted in culture. Environment School: The focus here is on coping with the environment. Configuration School: Integrates the claims of other schools.

The three broad approaches to strategic planning can be summarized as follows: 



*

Rational Planning

involves identifying and understanding gaps between previously established goals and past performance, identifying the resources needed to close these gaps, distributing those resources, and monitoring their use in moving the organization closer towards its goals. This approach assumes the environment is predictable and the organization can be effectively controlled. Clearly, such an approach is not advisable if the business environment is complex and unpredictable. Incrementalism means moving from one strategy to the next, depending on the unfolding of events beyond the control of managers.

From the book, Strategy Safari: A Guided Tour through The Wilds of Strategic Management by Henry Mintzberg, Joseph Lampel, and Bruce Ahlstrand, The Free Press, 2005.

210

Strategic PRICING

Incrementalism assumes that managers cannot forecast or enforce the developments essential to developing a pre-ordained strategy and therefore must continually adjust. Future developments are likely to be random so that there is little scope to learn from past experiences. Thus, in contrast to rational planning which emphasizes intended strategies, incrementalism is based on emergent strategies.  Organizational Learning also emphasizes the need for making continuous adjustments. However, these adjustments need not be random. Rather, managers must keep making incremental adjustments to rational plans as they attempt to move the organization toward its goals. Though they may be unable to foresee the future, managers must not allow their organization to drift aimlessly. The role of top management is to encourage all employees to continuously challenge the status quo, generate ideas for improving the status quo, conduct experiments to see which of these ideas are most fruitful and then try to disseminate knowledge gained from these experiments throughout the organization. (See also: DISCOVERY DRIVEN PLANNING, ENVIRONMENTAL SCANNING, SCENARIO PLANNING, STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT)

Strategic Pricing Aligning the pricing strategy with corporate strategy. Pricing is a key factor in business innovation and the price must be chosen carefully after considering various scenarios and possible implications. Is the price attractive enough to capture the mass of target buyers? Can the company make the offering at the target cost and still earn a healthy profit margin? Can the company profit at a price that is affordable to the target buyers? Strategic pricing is a key component of BLUE OCEAN STRATEGY pioneered by Chan Kim and Renee Mauborgne. In a competitive market, cost plus pricing does not work. Costs must be controlled so that profits can be generated at the price the market can take. At the same time, in the process of cost cutting the company should not reduce utility, i.e. the value customers perceive in its product or service. To hit the cost target, companies can look at various options. They can streamline operations and introduce cost innovations from manufacturing to distribution by addressing relevant questions such as:

Strategic PRICING











211

Can the currently used raw materials be replaced by unconventional, less expensive ones? Can high-cost, low-value added activities in the value chain be reduced or outsourced? Can the physical location of the product or service be shifted from prime real estate locations to lower-cost locations? Can the number of parts or steps used in production be truncated by changing the way things are made? Can activities be digitized or automated?

As goods become more knowledge intensive, product development costs rather than manufacturing costs start becoming dominant. So achieving high volumes quickly becomes the need of the hour. Moreover, to a buyer, the value of a product or service increases as more people start using it. As a result of this phenomenon, called network externalities, either millions of units are sold at once, or nothing at all. So it is increasingly important to know from the start what price will quickly capture the mass market. That is why STRATEGIC PLANNING is gaining in importance. The main challenge in strategic pricing is to understand the price sensitivity of people who will be comparing the new product or service with a host of products which on the surface look different, but offer the same benefits to the customers. So companies must list competing products and services that fall into two categories: those that take different forms but perform the same function, and those that take different forms and functions but fulfill the broad objective. The exact price will be guided by two principal factors — the extent of patents or copyrights protection, and the ease of imitation. Sometimes there may be little scope to cut costs but there could be scope to come up with an innovative pricing model. Take telecom. In developing countries, public call offices in rural areas, by eliminating fixed monthly rentals, significantly reduce the price of the service. Another pricing innovation is small packs. Offering products or services in small quantities makes them more affordable to the masses. (See also: VALUE INNOVATION)

212

Strategy EVALUATION

Strategy Evaluation Assessing whether the strategy is working. Since results are not usually available for considerably long periods of time, other indicators become necessary. The degree of consensus which exists among executives regarding corporate goals and policies, the extent to which major areas of managerial choice are identified, and the degree to which resource requirements are anticipated well in advance, are all pointers to the workability of the strategy. To ensure that it is workable, any strategy needs to be evaluated carefully with respect to the following: 









Internal Consistency:

A corporation may have many policies. If the strategy is sound, the policies should mesh well with each other. External Consistency: The strategy must make sense with respect to events in the external environment, both current and anticipated. Availability of Resources: It is resources taken together which represent the capacity of an organization to respond to environmental opportunities and threats. Resources include cash, competence, facilities, etc. A key issue in strategy formulation is achieving a balance between strategic goals and available resources. The company must decide how much resources to commit to opportunities currently available and how much to keep in reserve to take care of unanticipated demands. Degree of Risk Involved: The degree of risk inherent in a strategy depends on the uncertainty about the availability of resources, the duration for which resources are committed, and the proportion of resources committed to a single venture. Time Horizon: A viable strategy has to indicate the time frame in which goals are to be achieved. The greater the time horizon, the wider the range of STRATEGIC CHOICES available. The larger the organization, the longer the time horizon, since adjustment time is larger. Large organizations change slowly and need time to make significant modifications in their strategy. While it is useful to have a certain consistency of strategy over long periods of time, flexibility is important in a rapidly changing environment.

Strategy IMPLEMENTATION

213

Strategy Implementation The ability to execute strategy. This is often the difference between market leaders and other players in any industry is Effective strategy implementation involves getting people‘s buy-in, choosing the right metrics and tracking performance on an ongoing basis. Much of strategy implementation involves managing change. So the behavioral issues involved can hardly be overlooked. The following are useful guidelines for strategy implementation. 

Unlearning the Past:

Often past strategies stand in the way. So un-

learning is important. 







Increasing Commitment

at lower levels: People at lower levels in an organization are often skeptical about the practical utility of a strategic plan. Strategy implementation is difficult without taking lower level employees along. Avoiding over Ambitious Strategies: Functional managers are used to a way of working. They may not be able to adjust suddenly to a new strategy. Identify Responsibilities and Milestones: The list of specific tasks each function must perform, specific milestones and the names of the individuals who accept responsibility for each major functional program, must be identified. Communicating Downward is as Important as Communicating Upward:

It is the functional and lower level operating managers who hold the key to the successful implementation of a strategy. Halfhearted commitment from functional managers can thwart the goals set for the business. ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE, LEADERSHIP and culture play an important role in ensuring that strategy percolates into the day-to-day activities of the company. Structure divides tasks so that they can be performed efficiently. Leadership must send out the right signals to facilitate smooth implementation. Culture is the set of important, often unstated assumptions that influence the opinions and actions of employees. Culture becomes a weakness when the assumptions of employees interfere with the needs of the business and its strategy. The key to execution is shaping the attitudes and behavior of people. A culture of trust and commitment motivates people to execute the agreed strategy. People‘s minds and hearts must align with the new

214

Stretch

strategy so that they embrace it willingly, going beyond compulsory execution to voluntary cooperation. To build people‘s trust and commitment, Chan Kim and Renee Mauborgne* emphasize the importance of getting people‘s buy-in, building trust and creating a perception that a level playing field exists. Only then will people cooperate voluntarily in implementing strategic decisions. This approach, called fair process, has three main components: engagement, explanation and expectation clarity. 





Engagement

means involving individuals in strategic decisions by asking for their inputs and encouraging them to critically examine the merits of the ideas and assumptions of different people. Explanation means that everyone involved and affected should understand why important decisions are made as they are. An explanation of the thinking that underlies decisions makes people confident that managers have considered their opinions and have made objective decisions in the overall interest of the company. Expectation clarity requires that managers state clearly the new rules of the game. Although the expectations may be demanding, employees should know up front what standards they will be judged by as well as the penalties for failure. When expectations are clearly defined, political jockeying and favoritism are minimized, and the focus shifts to execution.

By organizing strategic planning around the principles of fair process, execution can be built into strategy making from the start. People will realize that compromises and sacrifices are necessary to achieve organizational goals. The ensuing discipline and increased collaboration levels will facilitate strategy execution. (See also: CHANGE MANAGEMENT, POLICIES, STRATEGIC CONTROL)

Stretch A concept introduced by Sumantra GHOSHAL and Christopher BARTLETT in their book, The Individualized Corporation which holds that employees must be given challenging goals to motivate them and exploit their *

Kim, W. Chan and Mauborgne, Renée. ―Fair Process: Managing in the Knowledge Economy‖, Harvard Business Review, January 2003, pp. 127-136.

Succession PLANNING

215

full potential. Stretch helps in moving people from satisfactory underperformance to high performance. Stretch encourages managers to see themselves not in terms of the past but in terms of the future. (See also: BHAG, PURPOSE-PROCESS-PEOPLE-DOCTRINE)

Stuck in the Middle

*

A term which describes a firm that is not clear about the way it is going to do business. Michael PORTER suggests that a firm that has not made a choice about pursuing cost leadership or differentiation runs the risk of being ―stuck in the middle‖. Such a firm tries to achieve the advantages of low cost and differentiation but in fact achieves neither. Poor performance results because the cost leader, differentiator or focuser will be better positioned to compete in their respective segments. (See also: COST LEADERSHIP, DIFFERENTIATION, GENERIC STRATEGY)

Succession Planning The process of identifying and preparing people for assuming greater responsibility, in order to ensure that positions likely to become vacant are filled smoothly. While the human resources department can take care of succession planning at lower levels, succession planning at higher levels has strategic implications, often involving the CEOs themselves. CEO-level succession planning is a challenging task that involves active collaboration between the Board and the incumbent CEO. In companies like GE and Unilever, succession planning is taken very seriously and implemented with the help of elaborate mechanisms and processes. In India, companies like Hindustan Lever Limited (HLL) have mastered the art of succession planning. The biggest succession planning problems in India seem to be in the case of public sector enterprises because of political interference, and in family owned businesses due to a lack of professionalism.

*

From the book, The Essence of Strategic Management by Clief Bowman, Prentice Hall of India, 1990.

216

Supply CHAIN MANAGEMENT (SCM)

*

Supply Chain Management (SCM) Managing the various parties who come together to fulfill a customer request. Manufacturers, suppliers, transporters, warehouses, distributors, wholesalers, retailers and customers together make up the supply chain. These entities are supported by various functions such as sales, product development, operations, logistics, after sales service and finance. At the heart of the supply chain lies the flow of information, products and cash flows. Some of these flow towards and others away from the customer. The main objective of any supply chain is to deliver value to customers in optimal fashion. In simple terms, Value can be understood as the difference between the price the end customers are prepared to pay and the costs incurred in meeting their needs. Complicated outsourcing arrangements backed by information technology mean that supply chains are no longer linear but quite intricate, taking the shape of a network. Several suppliers, factories and logistics providers may be involved, making supply chain management (SCM) a fairly challenging task. SCM must be treated as an integral part of COMPETITIVE STRATEGY. Indeed, SCM drives corporate strategy in the case of companies like Dell. There must be a strategic fit between competitive strategy and SCM, i.e. consistency between the customer needs that competitive strategy focuses on and the capabilities that SCM is building. A company must have a broad vision of how the supply chain will function and evolve over time. Investment decisions must be made accordingly. These include manufacturing facilities, warehouses, transportation infrastructure and information technology. Supply chain design decisions typically have long term implications, so they must be made carefully, taking into account uncertainty and anticipated market conditions over the next few years. These strategic design decisions must be backed by appropriate medium term planning decisions and short term operational decisions. Planning may involve making forecasts typically for a year and breaking it down into quarterly figures. Supply chain operations are more focused on handling incoming customer orders in the best possible manner. The

*

From the book, Supply Chain Management: Strategy, Planning and Operations by Sunil Chopra and Peter Meindl, Prentice Hall, 2006.

Supply CHAIN MANAGEMENT (SCM)

217

design, planning and operation of a supply chain can have a major impact on a company‘s overall success in many industries. The computer manufacturer Dell, the Spanish retailer, Zara and the Hong Kong trader, Li & Fung are good examples. Efficiency and responsiveness make up the two conflicting demands of a supply chain. Depending on the market realities, SCM must arrive at a suitable trade-off. Usually costs tend to go up as investments are made to improve responsiveness to market needs. Similarly, as efforts are made to cut costs, responsiveness often suffers. Of course, there are situations where intelligent supply chain configuration can simultaneously improve responsiveness and lower costs. Thus, in the computer industry. Dell builds-to-order thereby cutting the costs associated with inventory obsolescence. But Dell has also cut down response time and increased the opportunities to customize so that responsiveness to customer needs has not been compromised. The effectiveness of a supply chain depends critically on how different activities are coordinated. Coordination problems arise because of conflicting objectives or poor information flows. These challenges have increased in recent times on account of both multiple ownership of the supply chain and increased product variety. One manifestation of this problem is the bullwhip effect. Fluctuations in orders get amplified as they move backwards along the supply chain from retailers to wholesalers to manufacturers to suppliers. Suppose there is a random increase in customer demand at the retailer level. Interpreting this rise in demand as a growth trend, retailers may order more than the observed increase in demand to cover anticipated future growth. Similarly, wholesalers may, in turn, also up their orders. This phenomenon extends right down to the suppliers. The bullwhip effect can be minimized by greater coordination across the supply chain by streamlining information flows, by aligning incentives, and by improving trust. Another challenge today in SCM is mass customization, the ability to execute small customized orders without sacrificing the cost advantages of a mass production system. A key tool here is the principle of postponement, which holds that companies must delay the final configuration of a product till an order is received. In general, the demand for intermediate products and components is more stable than that for finished goods. Take the example of paints. The only difference between two

218

Switching COSTS

shades of a paint could be the addition of a small quantity of pigment. This can always be done at the retail outlet. By only keeping a few primary colors as the core inventory and generating new shades based on actual customer demand, there is scope to simultaneously reduce inventory and improve customer responsiveness. The demand for primary colors fluctuates less than that for individual shades. Information technology (IT) has a key role to play in SCM. Inventory is nothing but a hedge against uncertainty. Uncertainty arises due to poor information flows. So by streamlining the flow of information, IT can significantly improve the functioning of a supply chain. However, it is wrong to equate SCM with IT as many computer software companies do. The essence of SCM is managing relationships among the different entities involved both within and outside the organization, including customers, suppliers and third party logistics providers. Trust and fair play are the key ingredients for good relationships. (See also: VALUE CHAIN, VALUE SYSTEM)

Switching Costs Costs incurred by buyers in changing products, services or suppliers due to various factors. A buyer‘s product specification may tie it to particular suppliers. The buyer may have invested heavily in specialist ancillary equipment. The new product may require new learning or its production lines may be connected to the supplier‘s manufacturing facilities. In addition, the buyer may have developed routines and procedures for dealing with a specific vendor. These routines will need to be modified if a new relationship is established. All else being equal, a buyer will be motivated to continue existing relationships in order to minimize switching costs. (See also: BARGAINING POWER OF BUYERS, BARGAINING POWER OF SELLERS, BARRIERS TO ENTRY)

SWOT Analysis A strategic planning tool used to evaluate the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats to a company. The technique is credited to Albert Humphrey, who led a research project at Stanford University in the 1960s and 1970s using data from Fortune 500 companies. Essentially, SWOT analysis is a methodology for identifying areas where an or-

SWOT ANALYSIS

219

ganization is strong, where it is weak, the major opportunities the company can explore, and the threats it faces. SWOT analysis helps a company to know where it stands by exploring key issues: Strengths:  

What do we do well? How are we better than our competitors?

Weaknesses:  

What could be done better? What is being done badly?

Opportunities:  

What are the opportunities that can be exploited? What are the interesting trends?

Threats:

What obstacles do we face? What is the competition doing?  Are the specifications for our products or services changing?  Is changing technology threatening our business? (See also: COMPANY PROFILE, ENVIRONMENTAL ANALYSIS, STRATEGIC PLANNING)  

220

Taylor, FREDERICK W. (1856-1915)

T Taylor, Frederick W. (1856-1915) An American engineer who invented work study and developed the scientific approach to management. Taylor advocated division of labor, specialized tools, piece-rate payments and tighter management control for improving productivity. Taylor‘s management principles had considerable impact in America, the most visible being the mass production system at Ford. While Taylor‘s system began as an attempt to develop the perfect pay-for-performance formula, it quickly came to encompass broader issues of ―work‖ and ―control‖. Taylor realized the need for standardizing work, tools, and maintenance techniques to improve productivity. Standardization, in turn, demanded a level of control over work that had never been attempted before. Taylor began by examining not just how long a particular task took to complete but how long it should take. Taylor used a stopwatch and recorded his observations in a notebook. He broke each job and work process down into discrete parts, studying and timing the movements of men and machines. Taylor realized that while two machinists might be working on entirely different products, such as a railroad tire and an engine part, the ―elementary‖ steps in the job were the same. The secret of improving productivity was to improve and standardize the elementary steps and apply them to a wide range of tasks. By breaking each job down into its component parts, Taylor determined how production machinery could be modified and individual operations improved or eliminated. Taylor was eager to learn from the best of skilled workmen, especially machinists, and was prepared to promote them. But those who were left to operate on the factory floor were stripped of their individual artistry. By deskilling the foremen‘s jobs, no single foreman needed to understand the entire range of supervisory work. Taylor also introduced an elaborate planning department that was responsible for coordinating the

Technology RISK

221

work of the foreman, designing work flow and conducting costaccounting reviews. The main limitation of Taylorism was that it failed to see a factory as a social system. Today, Taylorism has fallen out of fashion. Knowledge workers like to be left free and do not want to be micro managed as Taylorism would advocate.

Technology Risk The vulnerability of a business to sudden or unanticipated changes in technology. Technological changes can have a dramatic impact on industries. In making decisions regarding technological changes, companies err in two ways. They either commit themselves to a new technology too fast and burn their fingers — or wait and watch while another company comes up with a new technology that puts them out of business. The issue of when and how to react to the emergence of a new technology is a matter of judgment. However, this judgment need not be based purely on intuition. By doing a systematic structured analysis of developments in the technological environment and putting in place the necessary organizational mechanisms, technology risk can be considerably reduced. How can managers identify the emergence of a disruptive technology? Clayton Christensen‘s research reveals that disruptive technologies are often developed privately by engineers working for established firms. When such technologies are presented to customers, they get a lukewarm response. So established companies do not give much importance to these technologies. The frustrated engineers consequently join start-ups, which are prepared to look for new customers. Companies must, thus, take note when talented scientists and researchers leave them to join start-ups. Often they do so in order to work in an environment where their innovative ideas are taken more seriously. Companies must also learn to assess the impact of a new technology*. The steam engine was developed for pumping water out of flooded mines. It was years before a range of applications was developed in industries and for transportation. Marconi, the inventor of the radio, felt *

Read Nathan Rosenberg‘s insightful article, ―Why Technology Forecasts Often Fail,‖ The Futurist, July-August, 1995.

222

Technology RISK

that it would mainly be used between two points where communication by wire was impossible. So he targeted shipping companies, the navy and newspapers. Marconi did not even consider the possibility of communicating to several people at the same time. It was left to David Sarnoff, an uneducated Russian who migrated to the US to understand the technology‘s potential in broadcasting news and entertainment programs. Bell Labs did not think it necessary to apply for a patent covering the use of laser in telecommunications. Only later did it realize what a powerful combination laser and fiber optics made. Thomas Watson Sr. looked at the computer as a tool for only rapid scientific and data processing calculations. Computers are today mostly used in commercial applications. Very often new technologies tend to be primitive when first developed. The full potential of a new technology is sometimes recognized only decades later. Even though the telephone has been around for more than one hundred years, applications such as voice mail and data transfer have emerged only recently. Aspirin, one of the world‘s most widely used drugs, has again been around for more than a hundred years but its efficacy in reducing the incidence of heart attack, due to its blood thinning properties, was discovered much later. So, while evaluating new technologies a longer time horizon must be used than in the case for existing technologies. To better appreciate the impact of a new technology, established companies would do well to go beyond their existing customer base and start talking to potential users whom they have not seriously targeted till now. Conventional planning, budgeting and investment appraisal processes can be counter-productive when applied to disruptive technologies. Creative ideas cannot be filtered through traditional financial screens. Companies must be prepared to jump into the fray and go through a process of learning, instead of waiting for the numbers to start looking good, when the technology gains acceptance. Companies must also note that technological performance often overshoots market requirements. Consequently, today‘s underperforming technology may meet the needs of customers tomorrow. On the other hand, technologies which perform satisfactorily today may over-perform tomorrow, but customers may not be willing to pay for this over-performance. According to Michael PORTER, the basic aim of differentiation is to provide something extra that the customers value and charge a premium for it. If customers do not value the additional fea-

Threat OF SUBSTITUTES

223

tures, differentiation as a competitive strategy will not be effective. So if a new technology fares relatively low on some of the currently accepted attributes but scores heavily on a new attribute, it has the potential to unseat the older technology. Thus, in the disk drive industry capacity became less important, and factors such as physical size and reliability became the more important attributes. To understand and work with new technologies, the critical requirement is a new mindset. Established players are not short of financial muscle or talented manpower. But they usually have a mindset problem. On the other hand, successful innovators often have fewer resources but the right mindset. They worry less about what the technology can do and, instead, look for markets which will be happy with the current performance levels. One way to encourage a new mindset is to create small, empowered teams outside the main organization and allow them to try new technologies. Since entrenched processes and values stand in the way of change, a separate organization is a more practical arrangement than grandiose attempts to change the entire company‘s culture. (See also: INNOVATOR’S DILEMMA, S-CURVE)

Threat of Substitutes Industries are usually defined in terms of the products or services they provide. However, if we define industries from the buyer‘s point of view, we might come up with a quite different set of firms which deal in different products but who meet the same type of buyer needs. Substitute products are alternative ways of meeting buyer needs. Substitutes lie outside the traditional industry definition adopted by the firm. They can be viewed in two ways. Substitutes-in-kind are products that look alike and represent the same application of a distinct technology to the provision of a distinct set of customer functions. Substitutes-in-use are products that have shared functionality based on the customer‘s perceptions of all the ways in which their needs can be satisfied in a given usage or application situation. The attractiveness of a substitute product depends on its initial price, customer switching costs, post purchase costs of operation and the additional benefits the customer perceives and values.

224

Tipping POINT

(See also: FIVE FORCES MODEL)

Tipping Point A sociological term that refers to that dramatic moment when something unique becomes common, it is a phrase coined by Morton Grodzins. In the early 1960s, Grodzins discovered that many white families in the US would remain in a neighborhood so long as the comparative number of black families remained small. But beyond a point the remaining white families would move out en masse in a process known as white flight. He called that moment the tipping point. The idea was expanded by Nobel Prize-winner Thomas Schelling in 1972. More recently, Malcom Gladwell has written a best selling book on this theme. Around the principle of tipping point, management scholars W. Chan Kim and Renee Mauborgne, have developed the concept of tipping point leadership. In every company, there are people, acts, and activities that exercise a disproportionate influence on performance. Launching a major strategic initiative is not about launching huge initiatives which demand heavy investments in time and resources. Rather, it is about conserving resources and cutting time by identifying and leveraging the factors of disproportionate influence. Instead of mobilizing more resources, tipping point leaders attempt to multiply the value of the resources they have. Instead of diffusing change efforts widely, tipping point leaders focus on kingpins, fishbowl management, and atomization. Kingpins are the key influencers in the organization; well respected and persuasive leaders who have an ability to unlock or block access to key resources. Kingpins can be motivated into action by focusing attention on their actions in a repeated and highly visible way. This is what Kim and Mauborgne refer to as fishbowl management, where the actions of kingpins become as transparent as fish in a bowl of water. This way, the stakes of inaction are greatly raised. Finally, there is atomization which relates to the framing of the strategic challenge. People must believe that the strategic challenge is attainable. To overcome resistance to change, tipping point leaders focus on three kinds of people: 

Angels



Devils

are those who have the most to gain from the strategic shift. are those who have the most to lose from it.

Total QUALITY MANAGEMENT (TQM)



225

A consigliere is a politically adept but highly respected insider who knows in advance all the potential stumbling blocks, including who will support and also who will block the new initiative.

Total Quality Management (TQM) An integrated, cross-functional approach that attempts to facilitate continuous improvement in the quality of goods and services. TQM is a systems approach that considers interactions between various subsystems of an organization including design, planning, production, distribution, field service and various management processes. The TQM philosophy believes that there is scope for continuous improvement in any product, process or service. A basic notion of TQM is that quality is essential in all functions, not just manufacturing. TQM also emphasizes satisfaction of customers, both internal and external. Implementing TQM involves a cultural shift and change in behavior of employees. (See also: DEMING, WILLIAM EDWARDS)

226

Utterback, JAMES

U Utterback, James A pioneering scholar in the area of innovation. Though not as well known as others like Peter DRUCKER and Clayton CHRISTENSEN, Utterback‘s work is highly insightful and offers a lot of ideas on how innovation takes place in different industries. Utterback has dealt with the relationship between product and process innovation, behavior of established firms when a radical innovation enters the industry, factors that prevent successful firms from transiting from current technologies to new ones and how firms can cope with technological change. (See also: INNOVATION, INNOVATOR’S DILEMMA, PROCESS INNOVATION, PRODUCT INNOVATION)

Value CHAIN

227

V Valuation A concept commonly used in the context of a merger. The value of the company being acquired must be established carefully. There are various ways to value a company — market price of shares, replacement cost of assets, present value of the future expected cash flows, etc. Ultimately, valuation is a subjective exercise that is as much art as science. (See also: MERGER)

Value Chain A framework developed by Michael PORTER for analyzing the various activities a firm performs in order to create value for its customers. By analyzing the value chain, a firm can understand how it is adding value, in which activities it is strong, where it is weak, and how it can further streamline the value addition process. The value chain* breaks down the firm into various activities in order to understand the behavior of costs — and the existing or potential sources of differentiation. A firm gains competitive advantage either by performing these activities more cheaply, or doing them better than its rivals. Value is the amount buyers are willing to pay for what a firm provides them. A firm is profitable if the value created exceeds the costs incurred. Creating value for buyers that exceeds the cost of doing so, is the goal of any generic strategy. Value chain activities can be categorized into primary and support. Primary Value Chain Activities 

Inbound logistics:

Receiving, warehousing, and inventory control of

input materials. *

See: The Essence of Strategic Management by Cliff Bowman, Prentice Hall of India, 1990.

228

Value CHAIN



Operations:



Outbound Logistics:





Activities that transform the inputs into the final product. Comprise the activities that get the finished product to the customer, including warehousing, order fulfillment, etc. Marketing and Sales: Activities that try to persuade buyers to purchase the product, including channel selection, advertising, pricing, etc. Service: Activities such as customer support, after sales service, etc.

One or more of these primary activities may be vital in developing a competitive advantage. For example, logistics activities are critical for a retail chain. Marketing may be a critical activity for a company offering branded consumer goods. Support Activities 







Procurement:

Purchasing of raw materials and other inputs used in the value-creating activities Technology Development: Activities such as research and development and process automation. Human Resource Management: Activities like recruiting, development, and compensation of employees. Firm Infrastructure: Activities such as finance, legal services, and management information systems

Porter emphasizes that a firm‘s value chain must be viewed as an interdependent system or network of activities, connected by linkages*. Linkages occur when the way in which one activity is performed, affects the cost or effectiveness of other activities. Linkages often create trade-offs in performing different activities that must be optimized. For example, more expensive components can reduce after-sale service costs. Linkages also require activities to be coordinated. Coordinating linked activities reduces transaction costs, allows better information for control purposes, substitutes less costly operations in one activity for more costly ones elsewhere and can also reduce cycle time. For exam-

*

Porter, Michael E., The Competitive Advantage of Nations, The Free Press, 1990.

Value CHAIN

229

ple, dramatic time savings can be achieved through such coordination in the design and introduction of new products and in order processing and delivery. The value chain can help managers understand the sources of cost advantage. Many managers view cost too narrowly and concentrate on manufacturing. They also need to look at product development, marketing and service and draw cost advantage from throughout the value chain. Gaining cost advantage also usually requires optimizing the linkages among activities as well as close coordination with suppliers and channels. The value chain also helps identify the sources of differentiation. Differentiation results, fundamentally, from the way a firm‘s product, associated services and other activities affect its buyer‘s activities. The various points of contact between a firm and its buyers offer scope for differentiation. The value chain allows a deeper look not only at the types of COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE but also at the role of COMPETITIVE SCOPE in gaining competitive advantage. Scope shapes the nature of a firm‘s activities, the way they are performed, and how the value chain is configured. By selecting a narrow target segment, a firm can tailor each activity more precisely and effectively to the segment‘s needs compared to competitors with broader scope. On the other hand, broad scope may lead to a competitive advantage if the firm can share activities across industry segments or even when competing in related industries. The current trend is towards smaller and more focused value chains. The idea is to help companies focus on core competencies and leave the remaining activities to partners with specialized expertise. What is becoming critical is excellent capability in a small section of the value chain. Taiwanese semiconductor companies, for example, concentrate on manufacturing. They do not generally get involved in design or marketing. Nike concentrates on brand management and outsources most of its manufacturing. In the PC industry, we have companies like Intel (microprocessors), Samsung (monitors), HP (printers), Microsoft (operating systems) and Mitec (modems) offering specialized products. As value chains fragment, the ability to coordinate value chain activities performed by different entities has also become important. The chain as a whole must perform effectively and provide value to customers in a superior way. Effective coordination depends crucially on trust

230

Value MIGRATION

and relationships between the orchestrator and the different entities involved. Information technology can facilitate coordination but cannot take the place of trust. (See also: PROCESS NETWORKS, SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT)

Value Migration Shifting of forces that create value. Companies are in business to create value for the customer. They can do this by offering a product or service that corresponds to customer needs. In a fast changing business environment, the factors that determine value are constantly changing. As Adrian SLYWOTZKY* put it, value migration is the shifting of valuecreating forces. Over time, value migrates from outmoded business models to business designs that are better able to satisfy customer priorities. That is when established players find it difficult to compete and the circumstances become ripe for challengers.

Value System A term coined by Michael PORTER. A firm‘s value chain is linked to the value chains of upstream suppliers and downstream buyers. The result is a larger stream of activities known as the value system. The development of sustainable competitive advantage depends not only on the firm‘s value chain, but also on the value system of which the firm is a part. In a manner of speaking, value system is equivalent to the supply chain. (See also: SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT, VALUE CHAIN)

Values The set of principles which a company regards as sacrosanct. These principles are non-negotiable and cannot be compromised. Values may refer to the company‘s philosophy vis-à-vis its customers, suppliers, society and investors. Values define what is right, what is wrong and what are the priorities. Values guide employees while taking decisions. (See also: CORE IDEOLOGY)

*

In his book Value Migration: How to Think Several Moves Ahead of the Competition, Harvard Business School Press, 1995.

Vertical INTEGRATION

231

Vertical Integration The expansion of a business by acquiring or developing businesses engaged in earlier, or later stages, of the VALUE CHAIN. For example, in forward integration manufacturers might enter retailing; in backward integration, on the other hand, retailers might enter manufacturing. All firms are vertically integrated to some extent. Arriving at the optimum level of vertical integration involves examination of important trade-offs. Outsourcing increases flexibility but vertical integration gives the company a greater sense of control. The most important issue in outsourcing is deciding which resources or capabilities are core and strategic. If such competencies are not developed in-house, the long-term competitive position of the firm would be threatened. For example, the research efforts of global pharmaceutical companies involve tremendous risk, but cannot be outsourced. This is because research forms the basis for competition in the pharmaceuticals business. Thus, what a company does in-house and what it outsources has significant strategic implications for the company. One of the best examples is IBM. In a bid to get its PC project going fast, the computer giant decided to entrust the development of the operating system to Microsoft. The rest, as they say, is history. Michael PORTER has offered deep insights on vertical integration*. Benefits of Vertical Integration 

*

Economies of Integration:

By combining technologically distinct operations, there are opportunities for reducing the number of steps in the production process, handling and transportation, and, consequently, the costs of scheduling and co-ordinating. Integrated operations can reduce information gathering, marketing and purchasing costs. Upstream and downstream stages can take a long term view and develop specialized procedures for dealing with each other in areas such as logistics, packaging, record keeping and control. Vertical integration also allows the upstream unit to tune its product to the exact requirements of the downstream unit and for the downstream unit to adapt itself more fully to the characteristics of the upstream unit.

In his book, Competitive Strategy: Techniques for Analyzing Industries and Competitors, The Free Press, 1998.

232













Vertical INTEGRATION

Technological Advantages:

A unit may integrate forward to understand the technology in the downstream business. Similarly, it may integrate backwards to familiarize itself with the technology in the upstream business. Assured Supply / Demand: Vertical integration can hedge the firm against fluctuations in supply / demand. Offsetting Bargaining Power: Vertical integration can enable a firm to reduce the bargaining power of powerful suppliers or customers. Further, by gaining a better understanding of costs, the firm has opportunities to improve its profitability. Ability to Differentiate: By manufacturing proprietary items in-house and exercising greater control on the channels of distribution, etc., a firm can increase the scope for differentiation. Creation of Entry Barriers: The more significant the net benefits of integration, the greater the pressure on new entrants to integrate. As a result, the entry barriers increase. Entry into a High Returns Business: Integration may allow the company to enter a more profitable part of the value chain.

Costs of Vertical Integration 









Exit Barriers:

Integration often increases strategic interrelationships and emotional ties to the business. Some commitments are irreversible. As a result, exit barriers are raised. Increased Operating Leverage: Vertical integration increases fixed costs. When an input is produced internally, the firm has to bear the overheads even during downturns. Reduced Flexibility to Change Partners: Technological changes, or changes in product design involving components, etc. can create a situation in which the in-house supplier may be providing a high cost, inferior or inappropriate product. It is not easy to switch to an outside supplier at short notice. Capital Investment Requirements: Vertical integration consumes capital resources which have an opportunity cost. Foreclosure of Access to Supplier / Consumer Research: By integrating, a firm may risk cutting itself off from the flow of technology from its suppliers or customers.

Vertical INTEGRATION







233

Imbalances:

When the upstream and downstream units are not balanced, potential problems arise. Inefficiencies: Since buying and selling occurs through a captive relationship, the incentive to perform may be less for both the upstream and downstream businesses, resulting in inefficiencies. Different Managerial Requirements: Businesses can differ in structure, technology and management despite having a vertical relationship. For example, manufacturing and retailing are fundamentally different. Understanding how to manage these different activities can be a major cost of integration.

John Hagel III and Marc Singer* offer a very useful framework for resolving the vertical integration dilemma. They recommend examining the coordination problems which arise when different players are involved in a value chain activity. When the interaction costs can be reduced by performing an activity internally, a company will vertically integrate rather than outsource. Reduction in interaction costs leads to a shakeout in the industry and changes the basis for COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE. The emergence of information technology in general, and the Internet in particular, has dramatically lowered interaction costs. So, the chances are that specialized players will hold the aces. Hagel and Singer add that there are three different core processes which are integral to any business. These are:   

Customer relationship management; Product innovation; and Infrastructure creation.

The competencies needed to manage each one are quite distinct. Customer relationship management focuses on attracting and retaining customers. It involves big marketing investments that can be recovered only by achieving economies of scope. A wide product range and a high degree of customization to suit the needs of different customers are the critical success factors in customer relationship management. Product innovation aims at bringing out attractive new products and services to the market in quick succession. Speed is important because *

Hagel III, John; Singer, Marc, ―Unbundling the corporation‖, Harvard Business Review, March-April 1999, pp. 133-141.

234

Value INNOVATION

early mover advantages are often critical. Small organizations with an entrepreneurial style of management are often better at innovation than large bureaucracies. Infrastructure creation (e.g. an information technology backbone) is necessary to efficiently handle high volume repetitive transactions. Economies of scale are vital for recovering fixed costs. Standardization and reutilization are the essence of this process. When these three processes are combined within a single corporation, conflicts are bound to arise. Scope, speed and scale cannot be achieved simultaneously. So many industries such as newspapers, credit cards and pharmaceuticals are splitting along these lines. There are alternatives to vertical integration. A firm can resort to partial integration. Independent suppliers can be used to bear the risk of market fluctuation while in house suppliers maintain steady production rates. Another alternative is quasi integration. This refers to a relationship between vertically related businesses that are somewhere in between long term contracts and full ownership. There can be various forms of quasi integration:     

Minority equity investment. Loans or loan guarantee. Prepurchase credits. Exclusive dealing agreements. Co-operative R & D.

Quasi integration tends to reduce the costs associated with full integration. It also avoids the need to make major capital investments required for integration and eliminates the complexities involved in managing other types of businesses. On the negative side, quasi integration may fail to achieve the full benefits of integration, such as differentiation. (See also: BACKWARD INTEGRATION, FORWARD INTEGRATION)

Value Innovation A strategy wherein a firm creates new space by developing products or services with value instead of competing head-on with its rivals. Value innovation is a term coined by Chan Kim and Renee Mauborgne. Smart

Vision

235

companies focus on new markets which Kim and Mauborgne call blue oceans, pursuing a strategy called value innovation. Instead of fighting competitors, these companies try to make them irrelevant by creating a leap in value for buyers and the company, thereby opening up new and uncontested business opportunities called blue oceans. Value innovation places equal emphasis on value and innovation. Value without innovation tends to be incremental and does not give the company a competitive edge in the marketplace. INNOVATION without value tends to be technology-driven, market pioneering, or futuristic, often shooting beyond what buyers are ready to accept and pay for. Value innovation occurs only when companies align innovation with utility, price and cost positions. Companies that seek to create blue oceans, often pursue differentiation and low cost simultaneously. Buyer value comes from the utility and price that a company offers to its buyers. The value to the company is determined by the price and the cost structure. So value innovation is achieved only when the utility, price and cost activities are properly aligned. Such an integrated approach holds the key to the successful implementation of a BLUE OCEAN STRATEGY.

Vision A guiding theme that articulates the nature of the business and its intentions for the future. These intentions are based on how the management believes the environment will unfold and what the business can and should be in the future. A vision has the following characteristics: 1. Informed — rooted in a deep understanding of the business and the forces shaping the future, 2. Shared and created through collaboration, 3. Competitive — creates an obsession with winning throughout the organization, and 4. Enabling — empowers individuals to make meaningful decisions about strategies and tactics. A vision must be able to inspire people by making a powerful statement in simple terms so that people at all levels can relate to it. (See also: CORPORATE PURPOSE, MISSION)

236

Whistle BLOWER

W Whistle Blower An employee, former employee, or member of an organization who reports misconduct to people or entities that have the power to take corrective action. A sense of moral outrage may prompt people to expose wrong doing within an organization. Generally the misconduct is a violation of law, rule, regulation and / or a direct threat to public interest. Fraud, health and safety violations and corruption are just a few examples. The vast majority of cases are based on relatively minor misconduct. The most common type of whistleblowers are internal whistleblowers who report misconduct to a superior within their company. In contrast, external whistleblowers report misconduct to outside persons or entities such as lawyers, the media, law enforcement or watchdog agencies, or to other local, state, or federal agencies. (See also: BUSINESS ETHICS, CODE OF ETHICS)

White Knight An expression used to describe a company that comes to the rescue of a firm facing a hostile take-over bid from a predator. The white knight steps in with a counter-offer for the firm, thereby saving it from the predator. The term comes from Lewis Carroll‘s Through the Looking Glass (1871) in which Alice is captured by a red knight but is then immediately rescued by a white knight. (See also: ANTI-TAKEOVER STRATEGY, HOSTILE BID)

Williamson, Oliver E. An American economist who has become closely associated with the economics of transaction costs by building on the work of Nobel prizewinner Ronald Coase. Transactions can take place through markets or hierarchies. The mode chosen will depend on the amount of information available and the degree of trust between buyer and seller. Transaction cost theory has important implications for industrial organization, com-

Winner’s CURSE

237

petition policy, corporate governance and employment relations. Transaction costs can affect make-or-buy decisions by companies. (See also: VERTICAL INTEGRATION)

Willpower That which enables a person to act even when beset by inertia or faced with overwhelming odds. Knowing is not enough. Unless managers get into action mode, knowing is of little use. Heike Bruch and Sumantra GHOSHAL mention in their book, A Bias for Action, that despite all their knowledge and competence, and the influence and resources at their disposal, managers do not grab the opportunities to achieve something significant. Purposeful action requires energy and focus. Motivation alone cannot spur people to purposeful action. What is needed is willpower. Willpower is what enables managers to take action even when they are not inclined to do something. Managers with willpower overcome barriers, deal with setbacks and persevere to the end. Just as defensive reasoning can block learning, lack of will power can block action. (See also: KNOWING-DOING GAP)

Winner’s curse A term often used in the context of a merger or acquisition. In their enthusiasm to close an M&A deal, companies may end up bidding too high. Though the deal is clinched, the win effectively turns out to be a curse as the high premium paid becomes difficult to justify. The end result is that shareholder value gets eroded. (See also: MERGER)

238

Zero BASE BUDGETING

Z Zero Base Budgeting Budgeting usually tends to be an incremental exercise. The current year‘s figures are adjusted suitably to arrive at the next year‘s figures. Zero based budgeting challenges basic assumptions and tries to arrive at budget figures for the next year from scratch. This kind of an approach to budgeting is useful for exposing and eliminating inefficiencies which have accumulated over a period of time.

Bibliography

239

Bibliography Aaker, David A.; Joachimsthaler, Erich, ―The Lure of Global Branding,‖ Harvard Business Review, November-December 1999, pp. 137 -144. Abell, Derek F., Defining the Business: The Starting Point of Strategic Planning, Prentice Hall, 1980. Ackoff, Russell L., A Concept of Corporate Planning, John Wiley & Sons, 1970. Ackoff, Russell L., Creating the Corporate Future: Plan or be Planned for, Wiley, 1981. Ackoff, Russell L., The Art of Problem Solving: Accompanied by Ackoff’s Fables, Wiley, 1987. Ackoff, Russell L., Re-Creating the Corporation: A Design of Organizations for the 21st Century, Oxford University Press, 1999. Aiello, Robert J; Watkins, Michael D., ―The Fine Art of Friendly Acquisition,‖ Harvard Business Review, November-December, 2000, pp. 100-107. Almquist, Eric; Wyner, Gordon, ―Boost Your Marketing RoI with Experimental Design,‖ Harvard Business Review, October 2001, pp. 135-141. Amabile, T. M., ―How to Kill Creativity,‖ Harvard Business Review, September-October 1998, pp. 76-87. Amram, Martha; Kulatilaka, Nalin, ―Disciplined Decisions: Aligning Strategy with the Financial Markets,‖ Harvard Business Review, January–February 1999, pp. 95-104. Ansoff, Igor H., Corporate Strategy, McGraw Hill, 1965. Argyris, Chris, Reasoning, Learning and Action: Individual and Organizational, Jossey Bass, 1982. Ashkenas, Ronald N.; Francis, Suzanne C., ―Integration Managers: Special Leaders for Special Times,‖ Harvard Business Review, November-December, 2000, pp. 108-116. Baden-Fuller, Charles; Stopford, John M., Rejuvenating the Mature Business: The Competitive Challenge, Harvard Business School Press, 1994. Baker, Walter L.; Lin, Eric; Marn, Michael V.; Zawada, Craig C., ―Getting Prices Right on the Web,‖ The McKinsey Quarterly, 2001, Issue 2, pp. 54-63. Bangle, Chris, ―The Ultimate Creativity Machine: How BMW Turns Art into Profit,‖ Harvard Business Review, January 2001, pp. 47-55.

240

A to Z of Business Strategy

Baron, David P; Hoyt, David, ―E Bay: Private Ordering for an Online Community,‖ Stanford University Graduate School of Business, Case No. P37, August 2001. Bartlett, Christopher A., ―McKinsey & Company: Managing Knowledge and Learning,‖ Harvard Business School, Case 396-397, 1996. Bazerman, Max; Gillespie, James, ―Betting on the Future: The Virtues of Contingent Contracts,‖ Harvard Business Review, September-October 1999, pp. 155-160. Beinhocker, Eric D., ―Strategy at the Edge of Chaos‖, McKinsey Quarterly, 1997 Issue 1, pp. 24-39. Bell, David E.; Feiner, Jeffrey M., ―Wal-Mart Neighborhood Markets,‖ Harvard Business School, Case No. 9-503-034, 2002. Bleeke, Joel; Ernst, David, ―Is Your Strategic Alliance Really a Sale?‖ Harvard Business Review, January–February, 1995, pp. 97–105. Bossidy, Larry, ―The Job No CEO Should Delegate,‖ Harvard Business Review, March 2001, pp. 46-49. Bowen, Kent H.; Clark, Kim B., ―Development Projects: The Engine of Renewal,‖ Harvard Business Review, September-October 1994, pp. 110-118. Bower, Joseph L.; Christensen, Clayton M., ―Disruptive Technologies: Catching the Wave,‖ Harvard Business Review, January-February 1995, pp. 43-53. Bowman, Cliff; The Essence of Strategic Management, Prentice Hall of India, 1990. Bowman, Cliff; Faulkner, David, The Essence of Competitive Strategy, Prentice Hall of India, 2002. Brown, Shona L.; Eisenhardt, Kathlene M., Competing on the Edge: Strategy as Structured Chaos, Harvard Business School Press, 1998. Bryan, Lowell L.; Fraser, Jane N., ―Getting to Go Global,‖ The McKinsey Quarterly, 1999, Number 4, pp. 28-37. Bryan, Lowell L.; Fraser, Jane N.; Oppenheim, Jeremy; Rall, Wilhelm, Race for the World, Harvard Business School Press, 1999. Budhiraja, S. N.; Athreya, M. B., Cases in Strategic Management, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1996. Bund Jackson, Barbara, ―Manage Risk in Industrial Pricing,‖ Harvard Business Review, July-August 1980, pp. 121-133. Burgelman, Robert A.; Grove, Andrew S., ―Strategic Dissonance,‖ California Management Review, Winter 1996, pp. 8-28. Byrd, John; Hickman, Kent, ―Diversification — A Broader Perspective,‖ Business Horizons, March–April 1997, pp. 40-44. Byrne, John A., ―Strategic Planning‖, BusinessWeek, 26th August 1996, pp. 4653.

Bibliography

241

Carey, Denis, ―Lessons from Master Acquirers,‖ Harvard Business Review, May-June 2000, pp. 145-154. Champion, David, ―Mastering the Value Chain: An Interview with Mark Levin of Millennium Pharmaceuticals,‖ Harvard Business Review, June 2001, pp. 109-115. Chopra, Sunil; Meindl, Peter, Supply Chain Management: Strategy, Planning and Operations, Prentice Hall, 2006. Christensen, Clayton M.; Bower, Joseph L., ―Disruptive Technologies: Catching the Wave,‖ Harvard Business Review, January-February 1995, pp. 43-53. Christensen, Clayton M., The Innovator’s Dilemma, Harvard Business School Press, 1997. Christensen, Clayton M., ―Making Strategy: Learning by Doing,‖ Harvard Business Review, November-December 1997, pp. 141-156. Christensen, Clayton M; Tedlow, Richard S., ―Patterns of Disruption in Retailing,‖ Harvard Business Review, January-February 2000, pp. 42-45. Christensen, Clayton M.; Overdorf, Michael, ―Meeting the Challenge of Disruptive Change,‖ Harvard Business Review, March–April, 2000, pp. 66-76. Christensen, Clayton M; Johnson, Mark W.; Rigby, Darrel K., ―Foundations for Growth,‖ Sloan Management Review, Spring 2002, pp. 22-32. Christensen, Clayton M; Raynor, Michael E., The Innovator’s Solution: Creating and Sustaining Successful Growth, Harvard Business School Press, 2003. Christensen, Clayton M; Roth, Erik A; Anthony, Scott D., Seeing What’s Next: Using Theories of Innovation to Predict Industry Change, Harvard Business School Press, 2004. Chu, T. C.; MacMurray, Trevor, ―The Road Ahead for Asia‘s Leading Conglomerates,‖ The McKinsey Quarterly, 1993, Number 3, pp. 117-126. Ciampa, Dan; Watkins, Michael, ―The Successor‘s Dilemma,‖ Harvard Business Review, November-December 1999, pp. 161-168. Colby, Susan J; Kingsley, Tony; Whitehead, Bradley W., ―Debunking the Myths of Environmental Management,‖ The McKinsey Quarterly, 1995, Number 2, pp. 132-143. Collins, James C; Porras, Jerry I., Built to Last, Random House Business Books, 1997. Collins, Jim, Good to Great: Why Some Companies Make the Leap and Others Don’t, Harper Collins, 2001. Courtney, Hugh; Kirkland, Jane; Viguerie, Patrick, ―Strategy under Uncertainty,‖ Harvard Business Review, November–December 1997, pp. 66-79. Covey, Stephen R., The Seven Habits of Highly Effective People, The Free Press, 1990. Covey, Stephen R., Principle Centered Leadership, The Free Press, 1992.

242

A to Z of Business Strategy

Covey, Stephen R., First Things First: to Live, to Love, to Learn, to Leave a Legacy, The Free Press, 1996. Covey, Stephen R., “The 8th Habit: From Effectiveness to Greatness,” The Free Press, 2004. Cusumano, Michael A., Manufacturing Innovation: Lessons from the Japanese Auto Industry,‖ Sloan Management Review, Fall 1988, pp. 29-39. Cusumano, Michael A., ―Japanese Manufacturing,‖ Harvard Business Review, May-June 1993, pp. 10-11. Cusumano, Michael A., ―The Limits of Lean,‖ Sloan Management Review, Summer 1994, pp. 27-32. Cusumano, Michael A; Selby, Richard W., Microsoft Secrets: How the World’s Most Powerful Software Company Creates Technology, The Free Press, 1995. Cusumano, Michael A.; Suarez, Fernando, ―An Empirical Study of Flexibility in Manufacturing,‖ Sloan Management Review, Fall 1995, pp. 25-32. Cusumano, Michael A.; Yoffie, David B., Competing on Internet Time, The Free Press, 1998. Cusumano, Michael A.; Nobeoka, Kentaro, Thinking Beyond Lean: How Multi Project Management is Transforming Product Development at Toyota and Other Companies, The Free Press, 1998. Cusumano, Michael A.; Yoffie, David B., ―Judo Strategy,‖ Harvard Business Review, January-February 1999, pp. 70-81. Cusumano, Michael A.; von Krogh, Georg, ―Three Strategies for Managing Fast Growth,‖ MIT Sloan Management Review, Winter 2001, pp. 53-61. Cusumano, Michael A.; Gawer, Annabelle, ―The Elements of Platform Leadership‖, Sloan Management Review, Spring 2002, pp. 51-58. Cusumano, Michael A.; Gawer, Annabelle, Platform Leadership: How Intel, Microsoft, and Cisco Drive Industry Innovation, Harvard Business School Press, 2002. D‘Aveni, Richard, ―The Empire Strikes Back — Counter Revolutionary Strategies for Industry Leaders,‖ Harvard Business Review, November 2002, pp. 66-74. Dalens Francois; Gell Jeff; Rutstein Carl; Birge, Robert, ―Winning the New Product War,‖ bcg.com Davenport, Thomas H., Process Innovation — Reengineering Work through Information Technology, Harvard Business School Press, 1993. Davies, Warnock, ―SMR Forum: Unsticking the State of the Art of Political Risk Management,‖ Sloan Management Review, Summer 1981, pp. 59-63. Davis, Tom, ―Effective Supply Chain Management,‖ Sloan Management Review, Summer 1993, pp. 35-46.

Bibliography

243

Dawar, Niraj; Frost, Tony, "Competing with Giants — Survival Strategies for Local Companies in Emerging Markets," Harvard Business Review, MarchApril, 1999, pp. 119-129. Day, George S., Market Driven Strategy: Processes for Creating Value, The Free Press, 1990. Day, George S., ―Strategies for Surviving a Shakeout,‖ Harvard Business Review, March-April 1997, pp. 92-102. De Bono, Edward, Six Thinking Hats, Penguin Books, 1999. De Geus, Arie, ―Planning as Learning,‖ Harvard Business Review, March-April 1988, pp. 70-74. De Geus, Arie, Living Company Growth, Learning and Longevity in Business, Nicholas Brealey, 1997. De Geus, Arie, The Living Company, Harvard Business School Press, 2002. Deringer, Heidi; Wang, Jennifer; Spar, Debora, ―Note on Political Risk Analysis,‖ Harvard Business School, Case No. 9-798-022, September 17, 1997. DeSimone, L. D.; Hatsopoulos, George N.; O‘Brien, William F.; Harris, Bill; Holt, Charles P., ―How Can Big Companies Keep the Entrepreneurial Spirit Alive?‖ Harvard Business Review, November-December 1995, pp.183-192. Dhebar, Anirudh, ―Six Chasms in Need of Crossing,‖ Sloan Management Review, Spring 2001, pp. 95-99. Doz, Yves. L; Hamel, Gary, Alliance Advantage: The Art of Creating Value Through Partnering, Harvard Business School Press, 1998. Drucker, Peter F., The Practice of Management, Harper Business, 1954. Drucker, Peter F., Managing for Results, William Heinemann, 1964. Drucker, Peter F., The Age of Discontinuity, Harper & Row, 1969. Drucker, Peter F., Managing in Turbulent Times, Harper Business, 1980. Drucker, Peter F., ―How to Make People Decisions,‖ Harvard Business Review, July-August 1985, pp. 22-25. Drucker, Peter F., Innovation and Entrepreneurship, Harper Business, 1985. Drucker, Peter F., Managing for Results, Collins, 1993. Drucker, Peter F., Management: Tasks, Responsibilities, Practices, Collins, 1993. Drucker, Peter F., Post-Capitalist Society, Collins, 1994. Drucker, Peter F., The Effective Executive, Harper Business, 1996. Drucker, Peter F., ―The Discipline of Innovation,‖ Harvard Business Review, November-December 1998, pp. 149-157. Drucker, Peter F., Management Challenges for the 21st Century, Collins, 2001.

244

A to Z of Business Strategy

Drucker, Peter F., ―The Discipline of Innovation,‖ Harvard Business Review, August 2002, pp. 95-103. Drucker, Peter F., The New Realities, Transaction Publishers, 2003. Drucker, Peter F., ―What Executives Should Remember,‖ Harvard Business Review, February 2006, pp.144-152. Dyer, Jeffrey H. ―How Chrysler Created an American Keiretsu,‖ Harvard Business Review, July-August 1996, pp. 42-56. Eccles, Robert G.; Lanes, Kersten L.; Wilson, Thomas C., ―Are You Paying Too Much for That Acquisition?‖ Harvard Business Review, July-August, 1999, pp. 136-146. Edelman, David C., Patterns of Deconstruction: The Orchestrator, The Boston Consulting Group Inc., 1998, www. bcg. com Egelhoff, William G., ―Great Strategy or Great Strategy Implementation — Two Ways of Competing in Global Markets,‖ Sloan Management Review, Winter 1993, pp. 37-50. Eisenhardt, Kathleen M.; Sull, Donald N., ―Strategy as Simple Rules,‖ Harvard Business Review, January 2001, pp. 106-116. Evans, Philip B; Wurster, Thomas S., ―Strategy and the New Economics of Information,‖ Harvard Business Review, September-October, 1997, pp. 71-82. Evans, Philip, How Deconstruction Drives De Averaging, The Boston Consulting Group Inc., 1998, www. bcg. com Foster, Richard N., Innovation: The Attacker’s Advantage, Summit Books, 1986. Foster, Richard N., ―Attacking through Innovation,‖ The McKinsey Quarterly, Summer 1986, pp. 2-12. Foster, Richard N., The S-Curve: A New Forecasting Tool — Innovation: The Attacker’s Advantage, Summit Books, Simon and Schuster, 1996. Froot, Kenneth A; Scharfstein, David S.; Stein, Jeremy C., ―A Framework for Risk Management,‖ Harvard Business Review, November–December, 1994, pp. 91–102. Fulmer, Robert M.; Gibbs, Philip A.; Goldsmith, Marshall, ―Developing Leaders: How Winning Companies Keep on Winning,‖ Sloan Management Review, Fall 2000, pp. 49-59. Gadiesh, Orit, ―Transforming Corner-Office Strategy into Frontline Action,‖ Harvard Business Review, May 2001, pp. 72-79. Garten, Jeffrey E., ―Troubles ahead in Emerging Markets,‖ Harvard Business Review, May-June 1997, pp. 38-45. Garvin, David A., ―Building a Learning Organization,‖ Harvard Business Review, July-August 1993, pp. 78–91. Gates, Bill, The Road Ahead, Penguin, Books 1995.

Bibliography

245

Gates, Bill, Business @ The Speed of Thought, Penguin Books, 1999. Gerstner, Louis V., Who Says Elephants Can’t Dance? Harper Business, 2002. Ghemawat, Pankaj, Commitment: The Dynamic of Strategy, The Free Press, 1991. Ghemawat, Pankaj; Sol, Del P., ―Commitment Vs Flexibility,‖ California Management Review, Summer 1998, pp. 26-43. Ghemawat, Pankaj, ―The Forgotten Strategy,‖ Harvard Business Review, November 2003, pp. 76-83. Ghoshal, Sumantra; Nohria, Nitin, ―Horses for Courses, Organizational Forms for Multinational Corporations,‖ Sloan Management Review, Winter 1993, pp. 23-35. Ghoshal, Sumantra; Bartlett, Christopher A., ―Changing the Role of Top Management: Beyond Strategy to Purpose,‖ Harvard Business Review, NovembeDecember 1994, pp. 79–88. Ghoshal, Sumantra; Bartlett, Christopher A., ―Rebuilding Behavioral Context: Turn Process Reengineering into People Rejuvenation, ‖ Sloan Management Review, Fall 1995, pp. 11-23. Ghoshal, Sumantra; Bartlett, Christopher A., ―Changing the Role of Top Management: Beyond Structure to Processes,‖ Harvard Business Review, JanuaryFebruary 1995, pp. 86-96. Ghoshal, Sumantra; Bartlett, Christopher A., ―Changing the Role of Top Management: Beyond Systems to People,‖ Harvard Business Review, May–June 1995, pp. 132–142. Ghoshal, Sumantra; Bartlett, Christopher, ―Rebuilding Behavioral Context: Turn Process Reengineering into People Reengineering,‖ Sloan Management Review, Fall 1995, pp. 11-23. Ghoshal, Sumantra; Bartlett, Christopher A., ―Rebuilding Behavioral Context: A Blueprint for Corporate Renewal,‖ Sloan Management Review, Winter 1996, pp. 23-36. Ghoshal, Sumantra; Bartlett, Christopher A., The Individualized Corporation, Harper Collins, 1997. Ghoshal, Sumantra; Piramal, Gita; Bartlett, Christopher A., Managing Radical Change: What Indian Companies Must Do to Become World-class, Viking, 2000. Ghoshal, Sumantra, World Class in India: A Case Book of Companies in Transformation, Penguin Books, 2001. Ghoshal, Sumantra; Bartlett, Christopher A., Managing Across Borders: The Transnational Solution, Harvard Business School Press, 2002. Ghoshal, Sumantra; Mintzberg, Henry; Lampel, Joseph B.; Quinn, James Brian, The Strategy Process: Concepts, Context, Cases, Prentice Hall, 2002.

246

A to Z of Business Strategy

Ghoshal, Sumantra; Bruch, Heike, A Bias for Action: How Effective Managers Harness Their Willpower, Achieve Results and Stop Wasting Time, Penguin, 2004. Gladwell, Malcolm, The Tipping Point: How Little Things Can Make a Big Difference, Back Bay Books, 2002. Goleman, Daniel. ―Leadership That Gets Results‖ Harvard Business Review, March-April 2000, pp. 78-90. Gomes-Casseres, Benjamin, ―Group Versus Group: How Alliance Networks compete,‖ Harvard Business Review, July-August, 1994, pp. 62-66. Govindarajan, Shank, Strategic Cost Management: The New Tool for Competitive Advantage, The Free Press, 1993. Govindarajan, Vijay; Trimble, Chris, ―Strategic Innovation and the Science of Learning,‖ Sloan Management Review, Winter 2004, pp. 67-75. Govindarajan, Vijay; Trimble, Chris, Ten Rules for Strategic Innovators: From Idea to Execution, Harvard Business School Press, 2005. Hall, Edward T., ―The Silent Language in Overseas Business,‖ Harvard Business Review, May-June, 1960, pp. 87-95. Hagel III, John; Singer, Marc, ―Unbundling the Corporation,‖ Harvard Business Review, March-April 1999, pp. 133-141. Hagel III, John, ―Leveraged Growth: Expanding Sales Without Sacrificing Profits,‖ Harvard Business Review, October 2002, pp. 68-77. Hagel III, John; Seely Brown, John, The Only Sustainable Edge: Why Business Strategy Depends on Productive Friction and Dynamic Specialization, Harvard Business School Press, 2005. Hammer, Michael; Champy J, Reengineering the Corporation, Harper Business, 1993. Hammer, Michael, ―Deep Change,‖ Harvard Business Review, April 2004, pp. 84-93. Hamel, Gary; Doz, Yves L.; Prahalad, C. K. ―Collaborate with Your Competitors and Win,‖ Harvard Business Review, January-February, 1989, pp. 133139. Hamel, Gary; Prahalad, C. K., ―Strategic Intent,‖ Harvard Business Review, May-June 1989, pp. 63-76. Hamel, Gary; Prahalad, C. K., ―The Core Competence of the Corporation,‖ Harvard Business Review, May-June 1990, pp. 19-91. Hamel, Gary; Prahalad, C. K., ―Corporate Imagination and Expeditionary Marketing,‖ Harvard Business Review, July-August 1991, pp. 81-92. Hamel, Gary; Prahalad, C. K., ―Capabilities-Based Competition,‖ Harvard Business Review, May-June 1992, pp. 164-170.

Bibliography

247

Hamel, Gary; Prahalad, C. K., ―Strategy as Stretch and Leverage,‖ Harvard Business Review, March-April 1993, pp. 75-84. Hamel, Gary; Prahalad, C. K., ―Competing for the Future,‖ Harvard Business Review, July-August 1994, pp. 122-128. Hamel, Gary, ―Strategy as Revolution,‖ Harvard Business Review, July-August 1996, pp. 69-82. Hamel, Gary, ―Killer Strategies That Make Shareholders Happy‖ Fortune, 23rd June 1997, p. 32. Hamel, Gary, ―Strategy Innovation and the Quest for Value,‖ Sloan Management Review, Winter 1998, pp. 7-14. Hamel, Gary, Leading the Revolution, Harvard Business School Press, 2000. Hargadon, Andrew B., ―Firms as Knowledge Brokers: Lessons in Pursuing Continuous Innovation,‖ California Management Review, Spring 1998, pp. 209227. Hargadon, Andrew B; Sutton, Robert I., ―Building an Innovation Factory,‖ Harvard Business Review, May-June 2000, pp. 157-167. Hargadon, Andrew B., How Breakthroughs Happen: The Surprising Truth About How Companies Innovate, Harvard Business School Press, 2003. Hax, Arnoldo C; Wilde II, Dean L. ―The Delta Model: Adaptive Management for a Changing World‖ Sloan Management Review, Winter 1999, pp.11-28.

Hayashi, Alden M., ―When to Trust Your Gut,‖ Harvard Business Review, February 2001, pp. 59-65. Hayes, Robert H; Wheelwright, Steven C., ―Link Manufacturing Process and Product Life Cycles,‖ Harvard Business Review, January-February 1979, pp.133-140. Hayes, Robert H; Wheelwright, Steven C., ―The Dynamics of Process-Product Life Cycles,‖ Harvard Business Review, March-April 1979, pp.127-136. Helmstein, Martin; Leppaner, Rolf; Joachimsthaler, Erich A, ―A Note on the Organizational Implications of Globalization,‖ International Graduate School of Management, University of Navarra, Barcelona-Madrid, 1992, pp. 1-21. Hodgetts, Richard M; Luthans, Fred, International Management, Mc Graw Hill Inc., 1994. pp. 58-83. House, R. J.; Mitchell, T.R.,"A Path-goal Theory of Leadership", Journal of Contemporary Business, Vol. 3, 1974, pp. 81-97. Iansiti, Marco; MacCormack, Alan.; "Developing Products on Internet Time," Harvard Business Review, September-October, 1997, pp. 108-117. John S., III; Hammond, Ralph L.; Keeney, Howard Raiffa, ―The Hidden Traps in Decision Making,‖ Harvard Business Review, 24th June 2006.

248

A to Z of Business Strategy

Kanter, Rosabeth Moss, ―Collaborative Advantage: The Art of Alliances‖ Harvard Business Review, July-August, 1994, pp. 96-108. Kanter, Rosabeth Moss, "Thriving Locally in the Global Economy," Harvard Business Review, September-October, 1995, pp. 151-160. Kanter, Rosabeth Moss, ―When a Thousand Flowers Bloom: Structural, Collective and Social Conditions for Innovation in Organizations‖ in P S Myers, Knowledge Management and Organizational Design, Butterworth Heinemann, 1996. Kao, John J., Jamming: The Art and Discipline of Business Creativity, Harper Collins, 1996. Kaplan, Robert S.; Norton, David P., ―The Balanced Scorecard — Measures That Drive Performance,‖ Harvard Business Review, January-February, 1992, pp. 71-79. Kaplan, Robert S.; Norton, David P., The Balanced Scorecard: Translating Strategy into Action, Harvard Business School Press, 1996. Kaplan, Robert S.; Norton, David P., ―Having Trouble with Your Strategy? Then Map It,‖ Harvard Business Review, September-October 2000, pp. 167176. Kaplan, Robert S.; Norton, David P., ―Measuring the Strategic Readiness of Intangible Assets,‖ Harvard Business Review, February 2004, pp. 52-63. Kaplan, Robert S.; Anderson, Steven R., ―Time-Driven Activity Based Costing,‖ Harvard Business Review, November 2004, pp. 131-138. Kaplan, Robert S.; Norton, David P., ―The Office of Strategy Management,‖ Harvard Business Review, October 2005, pp. 72-80. Kaplan, Robert S.; Norton, David P., ―How to Implement a New Strategy without Disrupting Your Organization,‖ Harvard Business Review, March 2006, pp100-109. Kaplan, Robert S.; Norton, David P., Alignment Using the Balanced Score-card to Create Corporate Synergies, Harvard Business School Press, 2006. Khanna, Tarun; Palepu, Krishna, ―Why Focused Strategies may be Wrong for Emerging Markets,‖ Harvard Business Review, July-August, 1997, pp. 41-51. Khanna, Tarun; Palepu, Krishna, ―The Right Way to Restructure Conglomerates in Emerging Markets,‖ Harvard Business Review, July-August 1999, pp. 125134. Kim, W. Chan; Mauborgne, Renee, ―Value Innovation: The Strategic Logic of High Growth,‖ Harvard Business Review, January-February 1997, pp.102112. Kim, W. Chan; Mauborgne, Renée, ―Fair Process: Managing in the Knowledge Economy,‖ Harvard Business Review, July-August 1997, pp. 65-75.

Bibliography

249

Kim, W. Chan; Mauborgne, Renée, ―Knowing a Winning Business Idea When You See One,‖ Harvard Business Review, September–October 2000, pp. 129138. Kim, W. Chan; Mauborgne, Renee, ―Tipping Point Leadership,‖ Harvard Business Review, April 2003, pp. 60-69. Kim, W. Chan; Mauborgne, Renee, ―Blue Ocean Strategy,‖ Harvard Business Review, October 2004, pp. 76-84. Kim, W. Chan; Mauborgne, Renee, Blue Ocean Strategy: How to Create Uncontested Market Space and Make Competition Irrelevant, Harvard Business School Press, 2005. Kotter, John P., The General Managers, The Free Press, 1986. Kotter, John P., Force For Change: How Leadership Differs From Management, The Free Press, 1990. Kotter, John P., Corporate Culture and Performance, The Free Press, 1992. Kotter, John P., ―Leading Change: Why Transformation Efforts Fail,‖ Harvard Business Review, March-April 1995, pp. 59-67. Kotter, John P., Leading Change, Harvard Business School Press, 1996. Kotter, John P.; Collins, James; Pascale, Richard; Porras, Jerry; Athos, Anthony, Harvard Business Review on Change, Harvard Business School Press, 1998. Kotter, John P., ―What Leaders Really Do,‖ Harvard Business Review, December 2001, pp. 85-96. Kotter, John P., The Heart of Change: Real-Life Stories of How People Change Their Organizations, Harvard Business School Press, 2002. Kumpe, Ted; Bolwijn, Pief T., ―Manufacturing: The New Case for Vertical Integration‖ Harvard Business Review, March-April 1988, pp. 75-81. Lauenstein, Milton C., ―Diversification — The Hidden Explanation of Success,‖ Sloan Management Review, Fall 1985, pp. 49-55. Leonard-Barton, Dorothy; Bowen, H. Kent; Clark, Kim B.; Holloway, Charles A.; Wheelwright, Steven C., ―Prototypes: Tools for Learning and Integrating,‖ Harvard Business Review, September-October 1994, pp. 124-125. Leuehrman, T. A., ―Strategy as a Portfolio of Real Options,‖ Harvard Business Review, September-October 1998, pp. 89-99. Levitt, Theodore, ―Marketing Myopia,‖ Harvard Business Review, July-August 1960, pp. 45-56. Levitt, Theodore, ―Exploit the Product Life Cycle,‖ Harvard Business Review, November-December 1965, pp. 81-94. Levitt, Theodore, ―Innovative Imitation,‖ Harvard Business Review, SeptemberOctober, 1966, pp. 63-70.

250

A to Z of Business Strategy

Levitt, Theodore, ―The Globalization of Markets‖ Harvard Business Review, May-June, 1983, pp. 2–11. Levy, David L., ―Lean Production in an International Supply Chain,‖ Sloan Management Review, Winter 1997, pp. 94-102. Lorsch, Jay W; Khurana, Rakesh, ―Changing Leaders: The Board‘s Role in CEO Succession,‖ Harvard Business Review, May-June 1999, pp. 96-105. Loveman, Gary and Connell, Jamie O., ―Li & Fung (Trading) Ltd,‖ Harvard Business School, Case No. 9-396-075, 1995. Luthans, Fred, Organizational Behavior, McGraw Hill, 1995. Lynn, Gary S; Morone, Joseph G; Paulson, Albert S., ―Marketing and Discontinuous Innovation: The Probe and Learn Process,‖ California Management Review, Spring 1996, pp. 8-37. Macdonald, Stuart, ―Too Close for Comfort? The Strategic Implications of Getting Close to the Customer,‖ California Management Review, Summer 1995, pp 8-27. Mackiewicz, Andrea, "Guide to Building a Global Image," The Economist Intelligence Unit, McGraw Hill Inc, 1993. Magretta, Joan, ―The Power of Virtual Integration: An Interview with Dell Computer‘s Michael Dell,‖ Harvard Business Review, March-April 1998, pp. 72-85. Magretta Joan, ―Fast, Global, and Entrepreneurial: Supply Chain Management, Hong Kong Style — An Interview with Victor Fung,‖ Harvard Business Review, September-October, 1998, pp. 104-114. Maljers, Floris A., ―Inside Unilever: The Evolving Transnational Company,‖ Harvard Business Review, September-October, 1992, pp. 46–52. Markides, Constantinos, ―Strategic Innovation,‖ Sloan Management Review, Spring 1997, pp. 9-23. Markides, Constantinos, ―Strategic Innovation in Established Companies,‖ Sloan Management Review, Spring 1998, pp. 31-42. Mccli, David F.; Keough, Mark, ―Creating the Learning Organization: An Interview with Peter Senge,‖ The McKinsey Quarterly Anthologies: Business Dynamics, 1997, pp. 79-93. McCutcheon, David M.; Raturi, Amitabh S., ―The CustomizationResponsiveness Squeeze,‖ Sloan Management Review, Winter 1994, pp. 89105. McGrath, Rita Gunther; MacMillan, Ian C., ―Discovery-driven Planning,‖ Harvard Business Review, July–August 1995, pp. 44-52. Mintzberg, Henry, ―Organization Design: Fashion or Fit?‖ Harvard Business Review, January-February 1981, pp 103-116.

Bibliography

251

Mintzberg, Henry, ―Crafting Strategy,‖ Harvard Business Review, July-August 1987, pp. 66-75. Mintzberg, Henry., The Rise and Fall of Strategic Planning: Reconceiving Roles for Planning, Plans, Planners, Simon & Schuster, 1993. Mintzberg, Henry, ―The Fall and Rise of Strategic Planning,‖ Harvard Business Review, January-February 1994, pp. 107-114. Mintzberg, Henry, ―Musings on Management,‖ Harvard Business Review, JulyAugust 1996, pp.. 61-67. Mintzberg, Henry, ―Covert leadership: Notes on Managing Professionals,‖ Harvard Business Review, November-December 1998, pp. 140-147. Mintzberg, Henry; Gosling, Jonathan, ―The Five Minds of a Manager,‖ Harvard Business Review, November 2003, pp. 54-63. Mintzberg, Henry, ―Enough Leadership,‖ Harvard Business Review, November 2004, p. 22. Mintzberg, Henry; Lampel, Joseph; Ahlstrand, Bruce, Strategy Safari: A Guided Tour through the Wilds of Strategic Management, The Free Press, 2005. Morita, Akio; Reingold, Edwin M; Shimomura, Mitsuko, Made in Japan, Harper Collins Business, London, 1994, p. 141. Moss Kanter, Rosabeth, Change Masters: Innovation and Entrepreneurship in the American Corporation, Simon & Schuster, 1984. Naisbitt, John, Global Paradox, Avon Books, 1994 Nemeth, Charlan Jeanne, ―Managing Innovation: When Less is More,‖ California Management Review, Fall 1997, pp. 59-70. Nero, Henry De, ―Creating the Hyphenated Corporation,‖ The McKinsey Quarterly, 1990, Number 4, pp. 153-174. Nichols, Anita M., ―Medicine, Management and Mergers: An Interview with Merck‘s Roy P. Vagelos,‖ Harvard Business Review, November-December 1994, pp. 105-114. Nichols, Nancy A., ―Interview with Judy Lewent, CFO, Merck,‖ Harvard Business Review, January-February 1994, pp. 88-99. Ohmae, Kenichi, ―Getting Back to Strategy,‖ Harvard Business Review, November-December 1988, pp. 149–156. Ohmae, Kenichi, The Borderless World, Harper Collins, 1990. Ohmae, Kenichi, ―Putting Global Logic First,‖ Harvard Business Review, January–February 1995, pp. 119–125. Pearce, John; Robinson, Richard, Strategic Management: Formulation, Implementation and Control, McGraw Hill, 2002. Peters, Thomas J; Waterman, Robert H., In Search of Excellence, Harper & Row, 1982.

252

A to Z of Business Strategy

Pisano, Gary P; Wheelwright, Steven C., ―The New Logic of High-Tech R&D,‖ Harvard Business Review, September-October 1995, pp. 93-105. Porter, Michael E., Competitive Strategy: Techniques for Analyzing Industries and Competitors, The Free Press, 1980. Porter, Michael E; Hout, Thomas; Rudden, Eileen, ―How Global Companies Win Out,‖ Harvard Business Review, September-October 1982, pp. 98-108. Porter, Michael E.; Millar, Victor E., ―How Information Gives You Competitive Advantage,‖ Harvard Business Review, July-August 1985, pp. 149-160. Porter, Michael E., ―From Competitive Advantage to Corporate Strategy,‖ Harvard Business Review, May-June 1987, pp. 43-59. Porter, Michael E., The Competitive Advantage of Nations, The Free Press, 1990. Porter, Michael E., ―The Competitive Advantage of Nations,‖ Harvard Business Review, March-April 1990, pp. 73-89. Porter, Michael E., ―What Is National Competitiveness?‖ Harvard Business Review, March-April 1990, pp. 84-85. Porter, Michael E., ―Competitiveness: Challenging the Conventional Wisdom,‖ Harvard Business Review, May-June 1990, pp. 190-192. Porter, Michael E.; Wayland, Rebecca, ―Capital Disadvantage: America‘s Failing Capital Investment System,‖ Harvard Business Review, SeptemberOctober 1992, pp. 65-82. Porter, Michael E., ―The Competitive Advantage of the Inner City,‖ Harvard Business Review, May-June 1995, pp 55-71. Porter, Michael E; Der Linde, Claas Van, ―Green and Competitive: Ending the Stalemate,‖ Harvard Business Review, September-October 1995, pp. 120133. Porter, Michael E., ―What is Strategy?‖, Harvard Business Review, NovemberDecember 1996, pp. 61-78. Porter, Michael E., "Clusters and the New Economics of Competition," Harvard Business Review, November-December 1998, pp. 77-90. Porter, Michael E., Competitive Advantage: Creating and Sustaining Superior Performance, The Free Press, 1998. Porter, Michael E.; Kramer, Mark R., ―Philanthropy‘s New Agenda: Creating Value,‖ Harvard Business Review, November-December 1999, pp. 121-130. Porter, Michael E., Can Japan Compete, Basic Books, 2000. Porter, Michael E; Tekeuchi, Hirotaka; Sakakibara, Mariko, Can Japan Compete? Palgrave Macmillan, 2000. Porter, Michael E., ―Strategy and the Internet,‖ Harvard Business Review, March 2001, pp. 63-77.

Bibliography

253

Porter, Michael E.; Kramer, Mark R., ―The Competitive Advantage of Corporate Philanthropy,‖ Harvard Business Review, December 2002, pp. 56-68. Porter, Michael E.; Lorsch, Jay W.; Nohria, Nitin, ―Seven Surprises for New CEOs,‖ Harvard Business Review, October 2004, pp. 62-72. Prahalad, C. K.; Krishnan M. S., ―The New Meaning of Quality in the Information Age,‖ Harvard Business Review, September-October 1999, pp. 109118. Prahalad, C. K.; Ramaswamy, Venkatram., ―Co-opting Customer Competence,‖ Harvard Business Review, January-February 2000, pp. 79-87. Prahalad, C. K., ―Serving the World‘s Poor, Profitably,‖ Harvard Business Review, September 2002, pp. 48-57. Prahalad, C. K.; Lieberthal, Kenneth., ―The End of Corporate Imperialism,‖ Harvard Business Review, August 2003, pp. 109-117. Prahalad, C. K., Fortune at the Bottom of the Pyramid: Eradicating Poverty through Profits, Wharton School Publishing, 2006. Prokesch, Steven E., "Unleashing the Power of Learning: An Interview with British Petroleum‘s John Browne," Harvard Business Review, SeptemberOctober, 1997, pp. 147-168. Quinn, James Brian, ―Strategies for Change: Logical Incrementalism,‖ Irwin, 1980. Quinn, James Brian, ―Managing Innovation: Controlled Chaos,‖ Harvard Business Review, May-June 1985, pp.73-84. Quinn, James Brian, ―Software Based Strategies Will Drive the Future Innovation,‖ Directorship, January 1998, pp. 3-6. Quinn, James Brian, ―Outsourcing Innovation: The New Engine of Growth,‖ Sloan Management Review, Summer 2000, pp. 13-28. Rafii, Farshad; Kampas, Paul J., ―How to Identify Your Enemies before They Destroy You,‖ Harvard Business Review, November 2002, pp. 115-123. Rangan, Kasturi; Bell, Marie, ―Merck-Medco: Vertical Integration in the Pharmaceutical Industry,‖ Harvard Business Schoo,l Case No. 9-598-091, 1998. Reichfield, Fredrick F., ―Lead for Loyalty,‖ Harvard Business Review, JulyAugust 2001, pp. 76-84. Reilly, William K., ―Private enterprises and public obligations, Achieving Sustainable Development,‖ California Management Review, Summer 1999, pp. 17-26. Reinhardt, Forest L., ―Alberta-Pacific Industries Inc.,‖ Harvard Business School, Case No. 9-794-099, 1994. Reinhardt, Forest L., Down to Earth, Harvard Business School Press, 2000. Robbins, Stephen P., Organizational Behavior, Prentice Hall of India, 1996.

254

A to Z of Business Strategy

Roberts, Edward B.; Liu, Wenyun Kathy, ―Ally or Acquire? How Technology Leaders Decide,‖ Sloan Management Review, Fall 2001, pp. 26-34. Rogers, Everett M., Diffusion of Innovations, The Free Press, 1995. Rosenberg, Nathan, Inside the Black Box: Technology and Economics, Cambridge University Press, 1983. Rosenberg, Nathan, Exploring the Black Box: Technology, Economics and History, Cambridge University Press, 1994. Rosenberg, Nathan, ―Why Technology Forecasts Often Fail,‖ The Futurist, JulyAugust, 1995. Rosenberg, Nathan, ―Innovation‘s Uncertain Terrain,‖ The McKinsey Quarterly, Issue 3, 1995, pp. 170-185. Rosenblum, David; Tomlinson, Doug and Scott, Larry, ―Bottom-Feeding for Blockbuster Businesses,‖ Harvard Business Review, March 2003, pp. 52-60. Rosenzweig, Philip M., ―National Culture and Management,‖ Harvard Business School Note, 1994. Rummel R. J.; Heenan, David A., ―How Multinationals Analyze Political Risk,‖ Harvard Business Review, January-February 1978, pp. 67-76. Sawhney, Mohanbir; Prandelli, Emanuela, ―Communities of Creation: Managing Distributed Innovation in Turbulent Markets,‖ California Management Review, Summer 2000, pp. 24-46. Schein, Edgar H., ―How Can Organizations Learn Faster? The Challenge of Entering the Green Room,‖ Sloan Management Review, Winter 1993, pp. 85-92. Schein, Edgar H., ―Three Cultures of Management: The Key to Organizational Learning,‖ Sloan Management Review, Fall 1996, pp. 9-20. Schoeffler, S.; Buzzell R. D; Heany D. F., ―Impact of Strategic Planning on Profit Performance,‖ Harvard Business Review, March-April 1974, pp. 137145. Scholfield, Brian, ―Building and Rebuilding a Global Company: An Interview with Thomas J. Bata, Chairman, Bata Shoe Organization,‖ The McKinsey Quarterly, 1994 Number 2, pp. 37-45. Schumpeter, Joseph A., The Theory of Economic Development, Harvard University Press, 1934. Senge, Peter M., The Fifth Discipline, Currency, 1990. Shaw, Gordon; Brown, Robert; Bromiley, Philip, ―Strategic Stories: How 3M is Rewriting Business Planning,‖ Harvard Business Review, May-June 1998. Sheth, Jagdish; Sisodia, Rajendra, The Rule of Three: Surviving and Thriving in Competitive Markets, The Free Press, 2002. Simon, Hermann, Hidden Champions: Lessons from 500 of the World’s Best Unknown Companies, Harvard Business School Press, 1996.

Bibliography

255

Simons, Robert, ―How Risky is Your Company?‖ Harvard Business Review, May–June 1999, pp. 85–94. Simonson, Itamar, ―Get Closer to Your Customers by Understanding; How They Make Choices,‖ California Management Review, Summer 1993, pp. 6884. Sirower, Mark L., The Synergy Trap, The Free Press, New York, 1997. Slywotzky, Adrian J.; Shapiro, Benson P., ―Leveraging to Beat the Odds: The New Marketing Mind-set,‖ Harvard Business Review, September-October 1993, pp. 97-107. Slywotzky, Adrian J., Value Migration: How to Think Several Moves Ahead of the Competition, Harvard Business School Press, 1995. Slywotzky, Adrian J., ―The Age of Choiceboard,‖ Harvard Business Review, January-February 2000, pp. 40-41. Slywotzky, Adrian J.; Morrison, David J; Andelman, Bob, The Profit Zone: How Strategic Business Design Will Lead You to Tomorrow’s Profits, Three Rivers Press, 2002. Slywotzky, Adrian J.; Wise, Richard, ―The Growth Crisis and How to Escape It,‖ Harvard Business Review, July 2002, pp. 72-83. Slywotzky, Adrian J; Wise, Richard; Weber, Karl, How to Grow When Markets Don’t, Warner Business Books, 2003. Slywotzky, Adrian J., The Art of Profitability, Warner Business Books, 2003. Slywotzky, Adrian J., ―Countering the Biggest Risk of All,‖ Harvard Business Review, April 2005, pp. 78-88. Spear, Steven; Bowen, H. Kent, ―Decoding the DNA of the Toyota Production System,‖ Harvard Business Review, September-October 1999, pp. 96-107. Stewart, Thomas A., Intellectual Capital: The New Wealth of Organizations, Currency, 1998. Sull, David N., ―Why Good Companies Go Bad,‖ Harvard Business Review, July-August 1999, pp. 42-50. Sull, Donald N., ―Managing by Commitments,‖ Harvard Business Review, June 2003, pp. 82-91. Sutton, Robert I., Weird Ideas That Work, The Free Press, 2001. Takeuchi, Hirotaka and Nonaka, Ikujiro, ―The New Product Development Game,‖ Harvard Business Review, January-February, 1986, pp. 137-146. Tanner Pascale, Richard; Athos, Anthony G., The Art of Japanese Management: Applications for American Executives, Warner Books, 1982. Tatsuo, Ohbora; Andrew, Parsons and Hago, Riesenback, ―Alternate Routes to Global Marketing,‖ The McKinsey Quarterly, 1992, Number 3, pp. 117-126.

256

A to Z of Business Strategy

Taylor, William, ―The Business of Innovation: An Interview with Paul Cook,‖ Harvard Business Review, March-April 1990, pp. 96-106. Taylor, William, ―The Logic of Global Business: An Interview with ABB‘s Percy Barnevik,‖ Harvard Business Review, March–April, 1991, pp. 91 – 105. Taylor, William, ―An Interview with Swatch Titan, Nicolas Hayek,‖ Harvard Business Review, March–April 1993, pp. 99-110. Tedlow, Richard S., ―What Titans Can Teach Us,‖ Harvard Business Review, December 2001, pp.70-77. Tellis, Gerard; Golder, Peter, ―First to Market, First to Fail? Real Causes of Enduring Market Leadership,‖ Sloan Management Review, Winter 1996, pp. 6575. Theuerkauf, Ingo; Ernst, David, ―Think Local, Organize,‖ The McKinsey Quarterly, 1993, Number 1, pp. 107-114. Thomke, Stefan and Von Hippel, Eric, ―Customers as Innovators: A New Way to Create Value,‖ Harvard Business Review, April 2002, pp.74-81. Tichy, Noel; Charan, Ram, ―Speed, Simplicity, Self Confidence: An Interview with Jack Welch,‖ Harvard Business Review, September-October 1989, pp. 112-120. Tushman, Michael L.; Newman, William H.; Romanelli, Elaine, ―Convergence and Upheaval: Managing the Unsteady Pace of Organizational Evolution,‖ California Management Review, Fall 1986, pp. 29-44. Tushman, Michael L; O‘ Reilly III, Charles, Winning Through Innovation, Harvard Business School Press, 1997, p. 171. Tushman, Michael; Nadler, David; Nadler, Mark B., Competing by Design: The Power of Organizational Architecture, Oxford University Press, 1997. Tushman, Michael L; O‘Reilly III, Charles, ―The Ambidextrous Organization: Managing Evolutionary and Revolutionary Change,‖ California Management Review, Summer 1998, pp1-23. Tzu, Sun, The Art of War, Oxford University Press, 1971. Ulwick, Anthony W., ―Turn Customer Input into Innovation,‖ Harvard Business Review, January 2002, pp..91-98. Utterback, James M., ―Developing Technologies: The Eastman Kodak Story,‖ The McKinsey Quarterly, 1995, Number 1, pp. 130-143. Utterback, James M., Mastering the Dynamics of Innovation, Harvard Business School Press, 1996. Varianini, Vittoria; Vaturi, Diana, ―Marketing Lessons from E-failures,‖ The McKinsey Quarterly, 2000, Issue 4, pp. 86-97. Vedpuriswar, Ayalur Vishwanath, The Global CEO: Lessons from World’s Leading Corporations, Vision Books, 2001.

Bibliography

257

Vedpuriswar, Ayalur Vishwanath, Strategic Financial Management: Achieving Sustainable Competitive Advantage, Vision Books, 2002. Vedpuriswar, Ayalur Vishwanath, Enterprise Risk Management: A Strategic Approach to Derisking an Enterprise, Vision Books, 2003. Vedpuriswar, Ayalur Vishwanath, Business Innovation: Lessons from Great Companies, Vision Books, 2005. Vishwanath, Vijay; Harding, David, ―The Starbucks Effect,‖ Harvard Business Review, March-April 2000, pp.17-18. Wetzel, Patric; Perregaux, Oliver de, ―Must It Always be Risky Business?‖ The McKinsey Quarterly, 1998, Number 1. Wheelwright, Steven C.; Sasser Jr., W. Earl, ―The New Product Development Map,‖ Harvard Business Review, May-June 1989, pp. 112-125. Whyte, William H; Nocera, Joseph, The Organization Man, Anchor Books, 1957. Williamson, Peter J., "Asia‘s New Competitive Game," Harvard Business Review, September-October, 1997, pp. 55-67. Williamson, O. E., Markets and Hierarchies, The Free Press, 1975. Yip, George. S., Market Selection and Direction: Role of Product Portfolio Planning, Harvard Business School Press, 1981. Yip, George. S., Total Global Strategy, Prentice Hall Inc, New Jersey, 1995. Yip, George. S; Kozminski, Andrzej K., Strategies for Central and Eastern Europe, Palgrave Macmillan, 2000. Yoffie, David B.; Cusumno, Michael A., ―Building a Company on Internet Time: Lessons from Netscape,‖ California Management Review, Spring 1999, pp. 8-28. Yoffie, David B.; Kwak, Mary. ―Mastering Strategic Movement at Palm,‖ Sloan Management Review, Fall 2001, pp. 55-63. Zook, Chris; Allen, James, Profit From the Core: Growth Strategy in an Era of Turbulence, Harvard Business School Press, 2001. Zook, Chris; Allen, James, ―Growth Outside the Core,‖ Harvard Business Review, December 2003, pp. 66-73. Zook, Chris, Beyond the Core: Expand Your Market Without Abandoning Your Roots, Harvard Business School Press, 2004. Websites www.wikipedia.org www.dabur.com